Manual Técnico THB_iTNC530_34049x-02sp9_en

Prévia do material em texto

Technical Manual 
iTNC 530
NC Software
340 490-02
340 491-02
340 492-02
340 493-02
September 2006
Contents Volume I
 Volume II
 1
 2
 3
 4
 5
 6
 7
 8
 9
 10
 11
 12
 13
Update Information
Introduction
Mounting and Electrical Installation
Machine Parameters
Modules, Markers and Words
Confi guring the Axes and Spindle
CC 424 Controller Unit
Machinen Integration
PLC Programming
Data Interface
iTNC 530 with Windows 2000
Error Messages
Subject Index
September 2006
1 Update Informa
1.1 General Informatio
Upd
part 
cont
hard
new
Each
Inter
http:
iTNC
Regi
whe
new
tion
n
ate Information for the iTNC 530 appears at irregular intervals, often as 
of a new software version. This is preliminary information in PDF format, 
aining brief descriptions of new software functions as well as new 
ware components. After the Update Information has been published, the 
 items are included in the iTNC 530 Technical Manual.
 Update Information is saved in the HEIDENHAIN FileBase on the 
net, where registered users can access it under 
//filebase.heidenhain.de. The files are in the “NC Milling 
530/Documentation” folder in the FileBase.
stered users of the HEIDENHAIN FileBase receive an e-mail message 
n a new Update Information appears, as well as upon the publication of a 
 printed version of the Technical Manual for the iTNC 530.
General Information 1 – 1
1 – 2
 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1 Update Information No. 1
1.1 Releases
The following NC software was released:
� NC software 340 420-02 and 340 421-02 December 2001
� NC software 340 420-03 and 340 421-03 January 2002
� NC software 340 420-04 und 340 421-04 March 2002
� NC software 340 420-05 and 340 421-05 May 2002
1.2 NC Software 340 420-xx
Machine 
Parameters
� MP1086.x is new: 
Maximum permissible jerk during single-axis movements at rapid traverse 
for the operating modes Program Run Full Sequence, Program Run Single 
Block und Positioning with Manual Data Input 
Input: 0: Function inactive 
 0.1 to 1000.0 [m/s3]
� MP7365.x has been expanded: 
Color settings of the oscilloscope 
MP7365.0 = $0FFFFFF Background 
MP7365.1 = $0808080 Grid 
MP7365.2 = $00000FF Cursor and text 
MP7365.3 = $0FF0000 Selected channel 
MP7365.4 = $0C08030 Channel 1 
MP7365.5 = $000FF00 Channel 2 
MP7365.6 = $0FF00FF Channel 3 
MP7365.7 = $00000FF Channel 4 
MP7365.8 = $0FFCF00 Channel 5 
MP7365.9 = $000CFFF Channel 6
Configuring the 
Axes and Spindle
� The path acceleration is calculated from the axis proportions.
� New signals in the integrated oscilloscope:
• I2-t monitoring of the motor
• I2-t monitoring of the power module
• Utilization of the motor
• Position difference in gantry axes
� The oscilloscope has six channels; of those, no more than four can display 
data from the current and speed controller.
� The signals of the oscilloscope can be referenced to the datum line and are 
therefore optimally adjusted in the display.
NC Software Export version Release
340 420-02 340 421-02 December 2001
October 2003 Releases 1 – 1
Machine 
Integration
� A starting and ending time can be entered for the log.
� An internal EMERGENCY STOP can be simulated with the code number 
FAILTEST in order to check the wiring of the machine. The control-is-ready 
output is reset. The NC and PLC are no longer operable.
� If the control is switched off by a POWERFAIL, Power Fail Interrupt is 
entered in the log.
� If no value is saved during the probing process, the error message No mea-
sured value saved <axis> appears.
PLC Programming � Extended ranges of the PLC operands:
• Markers M0 to M9999 (M4000 to M5999 are reserved for NC/PLC)
• Bytes B0 to B9999, words W0 to W9998, double words D0 to D9996 
(B128 to B2047 reserved for NC/PLC)
• Timers T0 to T999
• Counters C0 to C143
� The functions FN15: PRINT and FN16: F-PRINT make it possible to write data 
from an OEM cycle to the PLC partition also.
Miscellaneous � Enabled directories of a Windows computer can also be connected as a net-
work drive:
• MOUNTDEVICE: //<computer name</<release name>
• MOUNTPOINT: <device name>:
• FILESYSTEMTYPE: smb
• OPTIONS: ip=<iii.iii.iii.iii>,username=<user name>, 
workgroup=<group>,password=<password>
� In the settings for network operation of the iTNC 530, the name and path to 
an ASCII file can be entered in the DOMAIN column. In this file, the IP 
addresses of network drives can be assigned to computer names. In the 
network settings, the computer name is then entered instead of the IP 
address. 
Example: 
PC1 160.1.180.20 
PC2 160.1.180.21
� In Cycles 202, 204 and 209 the spindle angle Q336 can be entered negative.
� New, expanded search function.
� If the control is not properly shut down, the file system is checked during 
the next startup and the result is entered in the log.
1 – 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Machine 
Parameters
� MP4040 is new: 
Setting a PLC output after shutting down the control 
Input: 0 = do not set a PLC output 
1 = only after shut down over Module 9279 
2 = after shut down over Module 9279 or soft key
� MP4041 is new: 
Time after shut down of the control until setting the PLC output from 
MP4042 
Input: 0 to 1000 [s]
� MP4042 is new: 
PLC output to be set after shutting down the control 
Input: 0 to 31
Configuring the 
Axes and Spindle
� If more than four channels in the oscilloscope are to display data from the 
current and speed controller, the error message channel <number> cannot 
be displayed appears.
� During execution of field orientation there is a display of progress.
Machine 
Integration
� A display of progress appears while the log file is created over the code 
number LOGBOOK.
� The results of evaluation of the soft-key resource file of the vertical soft keys 
is saved in an ASCII file along with the name <name of the soft-key 
resource file>.SYS.LOG.
� When the pocket table TOOL_P.TCH is reset, the data are taken over from the 
file PLC:\PROTO\PROTOTYP.TCH if it exists.
PLC modules � Module 9279 expanded: 
Mode 2: Control shut down depending on MP4040, MP4041 and MP4042
Miscellaneous � The A, B and C axes can be used a helical axis.
NC Software Export version Release
340 420-03 340 421-03 January 2002
NC Software Export version Release
340 420-04 340 421-04 March 2002
October 2003 NC Software 340 420-xx 1 – 3
Machine 
Parameters
� MP1011 is new: 
Limit of rapid traverse on the path 
Input: 10 to 300 000 [mm/min] or [°/min]
� MP1061 is new: 
Limitation of the path acceleration 
Input: 0.001 to 100.000 [m/s2] or [1000°/s2]
� MP1146.x is new: 
When the control is switched off, the actual position of the axes is saved 
with an absolute encoder. During switch-on it is compared with the position 
values read by the encoder. If the positions differ by more than the diffe-
rence defined in MP1146.x, a pop-up window appears with both positions. 
The new position must be confirmed with a soft key. If it is not confirmed, 
the error message Check the position encoder <axis> appears. 
Input: 0.0000 to 300.0000 [mm]
� MP1355 is new: 
With MP1355 you can set a double reference run. First, the absolute posi-
tion of the speed encoder is read over the EnDat interface. If at a later time 
the reference mark of the position encoder is traversed, the control conti-
nues to work with this reference. For operation of the double reference run, 
the distance between the speed encoder and position encoder must be 
entered in MP1356.x. 
Format: %00000000000000 
Input: 0: Reference run as defined in MP1350.x 
1: Double reference run
� MP1356 is new: 
Distance between speed and position encoder for double reference run. 
After the double reference run has been activated in MP1355, when the 
reference mark is traversed for the first time the message Set MP1356.<axis 
number> to <value> appears. Enter this value in MP1356.x. 
Input: –99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999 [mm] or [°]
� MP2202.x is new: 
MP2202.x overwrites the entry Line count of the rotary encoder (STR 
column) fromthe motor table for the selected motor (entry in MP2200.x). 
The new value is not saved with the motor table. 
Input: *: Input from the motor table active 
0: No speed encoder (volts-per-hertz control mode) 
1 to 999 999
� MP2204.x is new: 
MP2204.x overwrites the entry Counting direction (DIRECT. column) from 
the motor table for the selected motor (entry in MP2200.x). The new value 
is not saved with the motor table. 
Input: *: Input from the motor table active 
+: Positive counting direction 
–: Negative counting direction
NC Software Export version Release
340 420-05 340 421-05 May 2002
1 – 4 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
October 2003
Configuring the 
Axes and Spindle
01AktInf1.fm Seite 5 Donnerstag, 14. Septe
MP2206.x is new:
MP2206.x overwrites the entry Type of encoder (SYS column) from the 
motor table for the selected motor (entry in MP2200.x). The new value is not 
saved with the motor table.
Input: *: Input from the motor table active
0: No speed encoder (volts-per-hertz control mode)
1: Incremental rotary encoder with Z1 track
2: Aligned, absolute rotary encoder with EnDat interface
3: Absolute linear encoder with EnDat interface
4: reserved
5: Nonaligned absolute rotary encoder with EnDat interface
6: Incremental rotary encoder without Z1 track
MP7370.x is new:
Color settings of the small PLC window
MP7370.0 = $0ECECEC Background
MP7370.1 = $0FF0000 Color 1
MP7370.2 = $000FF00 Color 2
MP7370.3 = $00000FF Color 3
MP7370.4 = $0C0C0C0 Color 4
MP7370.5 = $0FFFFFF Color 5
MP7370.6 = $0000000 Color 6
MP7370.7 = $0000000 Color 7
MP7370.8 = $0000000 Color 8
MP7370.9 = $0000000 Color 9
MP7370.10 = $0000000 Color 10
MP7370.11 = $0000000 Color 11
MP7370.12 = $0000000 Color 12
MP7370.13 = $0000000 Color 13
MP7370.14 = $0000000 Color 14
MP7350 (frame of window) is used as color 15.
MP7691 is new:
With MP7691, the size of a log file can be given in which messages of the 
operating system are recorded. Only HEIDENHAIN can evaluate with log 
file. Set MP7691 = 0.
Input: 0: Function inactive
1 to 10 [MB]
Previously, an incorrect setting of the axis configuration over the kinematic 
table could be corrected only by a change of the path in OEM.SYS and a restart 
of the control. To make this possible now also for the machine operator, the 
new column DOC was introduced in the assignment table. In this column, the 
machine tool builder can enter a comment on the kinematics. By entering 
the code number KINEMATIC, the machine tool builder calls a selection win-
dow with the entries of the column DOC. After a new kinematic configuration 
is selected, the control resets.
After the code number FAILTEST is entered, before the simulation of an 
internal emergency stop, a message window is shown prompting execution 
of the test by soft key.
In the integrated oscilloscope, the RESTORE SCREEN soft key can be used 
mber 2006 2:43 14
NC Software 340 420-xx 1 – 5
to reload the *.DTA signals saved in a file.
PLC Programming � FN18: SYSREAD has been expanded: 
File information can be interrogated from selected files. 
ID56 
NR1: Number of lines of the selected tool table 
NR2: Number of lines of the selected datum table 
NR3 IDX<Number of the first of 9 successive Q parameters for the axes X, 
Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V, W>: Quantity of the axes defined in the selected datum 
table (function identical with FN18: SYSREAD ID990 NR3)
PLC modules Module 9035 Reading status information
Module 9163 Switching the modes of operation
The module was expanded by an error code.
Error detection: 
Miscellaneous � The help graphics of the probing and fixed cycles for the BF 150 were revi-
sed.
� The maximum input value for the LBREAK column of the tool table was 
increased from 0.9999 to 3.2767.
� When the MOD key is pressed, the Id. Nr. of the setup software is no longer 
displayed, since the NC software and the associated setup software are 
always released together.
� In Cycle 403 (ROT IN ROTARY AXIS) you can enter in Q337 whether the 
rotary axis is set after alignment to 0.
� Program section repeats and subprograms are displayed in a new status 
window.
� There is a zoom function in the 3-D display of the graphic in the Test Run.
� The status of the Machining time ON/OFF soft key in the Test Run is retained 
even after a power interruption.
� If another NC software is entered in the SIK as that installed, a message win-
dow appears after control startup that the control can be operated only as a 
programming station.
� NC error messages with more than 32 characters are displayed in two lines.
Transferred number Return code
28 Machine mode in background 3: Tool table 
(in editing mode) 
4: Pocket table (in editing mode)
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Operating mode switched
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Switching not possible for this control loop
2 Incorrect operating mode or incorrect control-loop 
number
1 – 6 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1.3 Difference in the Tool-Change Macro between TNC 4xx and iTNC 530
In the TNC 426 / TNC 430, the tool number and the index are programmed as 
a number with one decimal place and read as such with FN18:SYSREAD ID60 
NR1. 
In the iTNC 530 the tool number and index are treated as two separate 
parameters. The tool number is read with FN18: SYSREAD ID60 NR1 and the 
index with FN18: SYSREAD ID60 NR8. 
If a tool change macro of the TNC 426 / TNC 430 is used on the iTNC 530 in 
connection with indexed tools, the index is not transferred!
Example 
TNC 426 / TNC 430
Indexed tool with number 4.1
FN18: SYSREAD Q1 = ID60 NR1 4.1 are read here. 
TOOL CALL Q1 T4 and index 1 are read here.
Example iTNC 530 Indexed tool with number 4.1
FN18: SYSREAD Q1 = ID60 NR1 Here 4.0 is read. 
FN18: SYSREAD Q2 = ID60 NR8 Here 0.1 is read. 
TOOL CALL Q1,Q2 T4 and index 1 are set here.
October 2003 Difference in the Tool-Change Macro between TNC 4xx and iTNC 530 1 – 7
1 – 8 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1 Update Information No. 2
1.1 Releases
The following versions of the NC software were released:
� NC software 340 420-06 and 340 421-06 July 2002
� NC software 340 420-07 and 340 421-07 August 2002
� NC software 340 422-01 and 340 423-01 August 2002
1.2 NC Software 340 420-xx
Machine 
parameters
� MP110.x and MP111.x were expanded: 
An error message appears when values are entered for position encoder 
inputs that do not exist.
� The maximum input range of MP960.x was increased from +/– 99 999.9999 
to +/– 1.79769313486E+308 (= 1.79769313486 ⋅ 10308).
� MP2160 has been expanded into MP2160.x: 
Input value 2 selects operation with HEIDENHAIN EcoDyn synchronous 
motors. For this to function, you must select from the motor table the 
motors with the designation QSY1xxx EcoDyn or QSY1xxx EcoDyn EnDat for 
MP2200.x.
� MP2195 is new: 
Suppress error messages from the HEIDENHAIN supply units 
Input: %xxxxxxxx 
0: Error message is not suppressed 
1: Error message is suppressed 
Bit 0: Reserved 
Bit 1: ERR.UZ.GR signal 
Bit 2: ERR.TMP signal 
Bit 3: Reserved 
Bit 4: ERR.IZ.GR signal 
Bit 5: RDY.PS signal 
Bit 6: ERR.ILEAK signal 
Bit 7: Reserved
� MP2220 has been expanded: 
Bit 1 – Monitoring the rotational direction 
This monitoring function cannot be switched off for synchronous motors 
(entry SM in the column TYPE of the motor table). 
Bit 3 – Activated motor brakes cause a change of the controlled system. This 
change can lead to vibrations when the controller is switched off while the 
brakes are on. 
Bit 3 = 0: Suppress vibrations 
Bit 3 = 1: Vibrations are allowed
� MP2304.x is new: 
Reference value for I2t monitoring of the power module 
Input: 0 to 1000.000 [⋅ rated current of power module] 
0: I2t monitoring of the power module switched off 
1: Rated current of power module as reference value
NC software Export version Release
340 420-06 340 421-06 July 2002
October 2003 Releases 1 – 1
� MP2308.x is new: 
Time between the output of the braking signal BRK (X51 to X62) and the 
switch-off of the controller (overlap time).Input: 0.001 to 0.500 [s] 
0 = 0.200 s
� MP7263 has been expanded: 
With bit 1 you can configure the output of the column in the pocket table 
during backup and during conversion from binary format to ASCII. 
Bit 1 = 0: Output only the displayed columns 
Bit 1 = 1: Output all columns
� MP7357.x has been expanded: 
Color settings of the “machine” soft-key display 
MP7357.2 = $0000000 Inactive soft-key row 
MP7357.3 = $00000FF Active soft-key row
� MP7358.x has been expanded: 
Color settings of the “programming” soft-key display 
MP7357.2 = $0000000 Inactive soft-key row 
MP7357.3 = $00000FF Active soft-key row
� MP7370.x has been expanded: 
Color settings of the small PLC window 
MP7370.15 = $0FF2020 Color 15
� MP7481.x is new: 
For each tool change operation between magazines you can specify the 
sequence with which the new tool and the tool be returned are to be output. 
M4540 remains in effect. 
Input: %xxxx 
0: First, output the pocket of the tool to be returned 
1: First, output the pocket of the new tool 
Bit 0: New tool from magazine 1 
Bit 1: New tool from magazine 2 
Bit 2: New tool from magazine 3 
Bit 2: New tool from magazine 4 
MP7481.0 Tool to be returned to magazine 1 
MP7481.1 Tool to be returned to magazine 2 
MP7481.2 Tool to be returned to magazine 3 
MP7481.3 Tool to be returned to magazine 4
� MP7482 is new: 
You can specify independently for each magazine whether it should operate 
with variable or fixed pocket coding. MP7480.x must be set to 3 or 4. 
Input: %xxxx 
0: Magazine does not use fixed pocket coding 
1: Magazine uses fixed pocket coding 
Bit 0: Magazine 1 
Bit 1: Magazine 2 
Bit 2: Magazine 3 
Bit 3: Magazine 4
� MP7684 has been expanded: 
Bit 7 – Reserved
Configuring the 
axes and spindle
� After switching on the controller (Module 9161) there is a delay of 50 ms in 
the switch-on of the current controller. This also delays the acknowledg-
ment over Module 9162 by 50 ms. This may have to be taken into account 
in the PLC program.
1 – 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Machine 
integration
� In the log, the end of an NC macro is indicated with the entry MACEND.
� If a *.PET table contains more than 999 PLC error messages, the excessive 
messages are ignored and the error message PET table: Too many lines 
appears.
� In the manual operating modes, the screen switchover key is active after the 
M or S function has been started. This makes it possible to display a PLC 
window when an M function starts.
� M4185 can determine whether an internal stop was performed. The marker 
must be reset by the PLC.
� New possible entries in the soft-key resource file *.SPJ:
• The entry VROOT in the header of the main menu defines a menu for the 
vertical soft-key row, while HROOT defines it for the horizontal row.
• The entry EMODE in the heading of the main menu defines a menu for the 
programming modes, and the entry MMODE defines a menu for the 
machining modes.
• The entry ENABLE: <marker> locks (marker = 1) or enables (marker = 0) 
a soft key.
• The entry STATUS: <marker or word> assigns an operand to a soft key 
(in addition to W302/W304). When the soft key is pressed, the marker 
is set or the soft-key number is entered in the word.
• The entry POPUPMENU: <menu name> displays a soft-key menu in the 
respective other soft-key row. The entry CLOSEPOPUPMENU closes this 
soft-key menu again.
• The entry LARGEWINDOW: <mask file for PLC window> or SMALLWINDOW: 
<mask file for PLC window> opens a large PLC window with the spe-
cified mask file. LARGEWINDOW opens a large PLC window over the entire 
screen, SMALLWINDOW opens a large PLC window instead of the gra-
phic/status window. The entry CLOSEPLCWINDOW closes the PLC window 
again.
• The entry FirstInGroup indicates the first RADIO soft key in a group of 
RADIO soft keys, if more than one group with RADIO soft keys exists 
in a soft-key menu. If in addition to FirstInGroup, the entry STATUS: 
<word> also exists, the number of the pressed soft key is saved in the 
word (beginning with 0). The entries FirstInGroup and STATUS: <word> 
can also be used for groups of CHECK soft keys.
PLC programming � The WATCH LIST soft key in the PLC main menu is for PLC diagnosis. With 
the WATCH LIST function you can create a table with dynamic display of the 
states of the selected operands
� FN18: SYSREAD ID52 NR2 IDX<tool number> finds the corresponding tool 
magazine.
October 2003 NC Software 340 420-xx 1 – 3
PLC modules Module 9136 Switching the touch probe on/off
Module 9136 switches a touch probe on X12 on or off once. If the touch probe 
does not supply a ready signal, and if M4056 is set (NC stop for deflected 
touch probe in all operating modes), the feed-rate enable is reset.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Touch probe state>
0: Switch off touch probe
1: Switch on touch probe
CM 9136
Error detection: 
Module 9157 Drive controller status
The module was expanded by the status information 4 (spindle in operating 
mode 0 (bit 15 = 0) or operating mode 1 (bit 15 = 1)).
Module 9148 Use nominal value as actual value
With Module 9148 you can use the nominal value as actual value for selected 
axes when the position loop is open. This makes it possible to use the nominal 
value for certain internal functions such as the actual value display and 
calculations such as transformation chains of tilting axes.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Axis>
Bits 0 to 13 represent axes 1 to 14
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
0: Use nominal value as actual value
CM 9148
Error detection: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Touch probe on or off
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid touch probe state
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Nominal value used as actual value
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid mode
2 Invalid axes
24 Module was called in a spawn job or submit job
1 – 4 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Module 9321 Find the current block number
The current block number is ascertained with Module 9321.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <String number (reserved for future applications)>
CM 9321
PL B/W/D <Current block number>
Error detection: 
Module 9305 Tool exchange in the pocket table
The module was expanded by an error code.
Error detection: 
Module 9306 Exchange tools between tool magazines
The module was expanded by an error code.
Error detection: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Block number has been found
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 2 Invalid string number
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Tools exchanged
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 2 Invalid pocket number
6 Magazine management using magazine rules is active
20 Module was not called in a submit job or spawn job
21 Module was called during NC program run
30 No valid tool in the original pocket
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Tools exchanged
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid pocket number
2 Invalid magazine number
6 Magazine management using magazine rules is active
20 Module was not called in a submit job or spawn job
21 Module was called during NC program run
30 No valid tool in the original pocket
36 File error
October 2003 NC Software 340 420-xx 1 – 5
Module 9342 Find magazine and pocket number
Module 9342 determines the magazine and pocket number from the tool 
number. The module takes the RSV column of the pocket table into account if 
magazine rules are in effect. If the module is used to find reserved pockets, it 
returns the first reserved pocket with ascending magazine number. However, 
further pockets can be reserved. In this case the search must be repeated with 
another “start magazine for the search.” 
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Tool number>
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
0: Look for occupied pocket
1: Look for reserved pocket
PS B/W/D/K <Start magazine for the search>
CM 9342
PL B/W/D/K <Magazine number>
–1: Magazine could not be found
PL B/W/D/K <Pocket number>
–1: Pocket could not be found
Error detection: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Magazine and pocket number found
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid mode
2 Invalid start magazine for the search
20 Module was notcalled in a submit job or spawn job
30 Tool not found
36 File error in pocket table
1 – 6 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Miscellaneous � If a tolerance for rotary axes is programmed with inactive HSC filter 
(MP1094 = 0), the error message rotary axis tolerance not allowed 
appears.
� In the Editing machine parameters operating mode, ASCII files with the 
extension .A (e.g. READ_MP.A) can be displayed.
� With M140 MB<retraction length> F<feed rate,> a feed rate can be optio-
nally programmed in order to move away from the contour in the current tool 
axis direction.
� A network ping can be run in the network settings through the code number 
NET123.
� The software version of the control (standard or export version) is saved in 
the SIK. If the NC software is exchanged for another software version, after 
the control starts up a message appears that the control can be operated 
only as a programming station. This message must be acknowledged. 
If you exchange software from a standard version to the export version, the 
control asks whether the compressed files of the standard versions should 
be deleted from the hard disk. If you answer with YES, all compressed files 
with the names of the standard version are deleted from the hard disk.
� If the control hardware components have to be loaded with a new controller 
during control startup, a display of progress appears.
� With the NC block CYCLE CALL POS you can move to the specified position 
and call a cycle.
NC software Export version Release
340 420-07 340 421-07 August 2002
October 2003 NC Software 340 420-xx 1 – 7
1.3 NC Software 340 422-xx
HEIDENHAIN released the new NC software 340 422-01 for the iTNC 530 in 
August 2002. This NC software will only be delivered if you specifically order it. 
There are new User’s Manuals for this NC software:
� HEIDENHAIN conversational programming: Id. Nr. 375 738-xx
� Touch probe cycles: Id. Nr. 375 319-xx
Expansions since NC software 340 420-07:
Machine 
parameters
� MP7294 is new: 
Disable axis-specific datum setting in the preset table 
Format: %xxxxxxxxxxxxxx 
Input: Bits 0 to 13 represent axes 1 to 14 
0: Not disabled 
1: Disabled
Machine 
integration
� After COPY SAMPLE FILE is executed, two new prototypes for pallet tables 
(PROTOPR.P and PROTO_TOPR.P), containing the column PRESET, are 
saved in the directory PLC:\PROTO.
Miscellaneous � Multiple presets can be managed with the preset table TNC:\PRESET.PR. 
The presets are recalculated using the defined tilting-axis geometry.
� The cycle structure of the machining cycles was revised.
� If MP7475 = 1 (Use machine datum as datum for datum tables) and Cycle 7 
(DATUM) is programmed, the error message Use preset table! appears.
� In Cycle 205 (UNIVERSAL PECKING) a lowered start point can be entered in 
Q379.
� In Cycle 220 (POLAR PATTERN) the type of traverse (straight line or circular 
arc) can be entered in Q365.
� Cycle 247 (SET DATUM) activates a preset from the preset table.
� In Cycles 400 (BASIC ROTATION), 401 (ROT OF 2 HOLES) and 402 (ROT OF 
2 STUDS) you can enter in Q305 the line in the preset table in which the 
basic rotation is to be entered.
� In Cycles 410 to 418 you can decide in Q303 if the measured values are to 
be written in a datum table or preset table.
� In Cycles 414 (DATUM OUTSIDE CORNER) and 415 (DATUM INSIDE COR-
NER) the line in the preset table for the datum and basic rotation can be 
entered in Q305.
� Cycle 419 (DATUM IN ONE AXIS) can be used to set a datum in any axis.
� Cycles 420 to 430 take an active rotation into account.
NC software Export version Release
340 422-01 340 423-01 August 2002
1 – 8 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1 Update Information No. 3
1.1 Releases
The following versions of the NC software were released:
� NC software 340 420-08 and 340 421-08 October 2002
� NC software 340 422-02 and 340 423-02 October 2002
� NC software 340 480-02 and 340 481-02 October 2002
1.2 NC Software 340 420-xx
Machine 
parameters
� MP2230.x is new: 
By entering MP2230.x ≠ 0, the correct operation of the motor brake is tested 
each time the control is started. The test is carried out after the drive is swit-
ched on, but before the reference marks are traversed. A current with the 
strength <MP2230.x> ⋅ <rated current of motor> is output. If the maximum 
permissible path from MP2232.x is exceeded, the error message 8130 
Motor brake defective <axis> appears, and the axis remains controlled. In 
case of an error, the axis must be moved to a safe position, and physically 
supported, if necessary. Only then may the machine be switched off so that 
the defect can be corrected. 
If no current flows to the motor during the test, the error message DSP error 
8140 <axis> appears. 
Input: 0 to 30.0 [⋅ rated current of motor] 
0: Do not test, or motor without brake 
1.3: Recommended input value
� MP2232.x is new: 
Maximum permissible path for testing the motor brake. 
Input: 0 to 10 [mm] or [degrees]
� MP4000.x has been expanded: 
The number of indexes was increased from 16 to 32 (MP4000.0 to 
MP4000.31).
� MP4045 is new: 
If all PLC outputs are switched off (e.g., during PLC program compilation or 
due to a PLC run-time error), the outputs that can not be switched off by an 
emergency stop can be switched off delayed by 250 ms. 
Input: %xxxxxxx 
Bits 0 to 6 correspond to O24 to O30 
0: Do not switch off output with delay 
1: Switch off output with delay
� MP7310 has been expanded: 
Until further notice, bits 5 and 6 have no function.
� MP7246 has been expanded: 
Bit 1: Function of the DEL key 
0: Deletion with the DEL key does not have to be confirmed. 
1: Deletion with the DEL key must be confirmed via soft key.
NC Software Export version Release
340 420-08 340 421-08 October 2002
October 2003 Releases 1 – 1
� MP7680 has been expanded: 
Bit 14 is used to determine the behavior of an NC start after an NC stop and 
an internal stop. For example, if the spindle is stopped after an internal stop 
and is not automatically started again after an NC start, you can force a block 
scan before the NC start by setting bit 14 equal to 1. 
Bit 14 = 0: NC start permitted 
Bit 14 = 1: NC start only permitted after block scan
� MP7682 has been expanded: 
Bit 6 = 0: No precision stop with TOOL DEF. 
Bit 6 = 1: Precision stop with TOOL DEF (the NC program is stopped, and 
only continued after acknowledgment). 
Bit 7: The ISO editor of the iTNC 530 does not sort the block elements. 
Bit 7 = 0: Block elements are executed unsorted. 
Bit 7 = 1: Block elements are automatically executed sorted (but the NC 
block is not displayed sorted).
Configuring the 
Axes and Spindle
� The 5-V power supply is monitored. The limits are 4.75 V and 5.40 V.
Machine 
Integration
� If the control is shut down or restarted by the PLC, the module and line num-
ber from which the command is called are entered in the log.
PLC modules � PLC modules 9092, 9093 and 9094 have been expanded by the following 
element numbers:
• *.T file 
30: Tool type for pocket table (PTYP)
• *.TCH file: 
5: Tool type for pocket table (PTYP) 
6: Reserve pocket (RSV) 
7: Value 1 (P1) 
to 
11: Value 5 (P5)
Miscellaneous � In the Machine Parameter Programming mode of operation, you can enter the 
code number NET123 after pressing the MOD key in order to set the network 
configuration during commissioning.
� In the Machine Parameter Programming mode of operation, you can use the 
DELETE CHAR, DELETE WORD or DELETE LINE soft keys to delete the 
corresponding entries. A deleted word or line can be reinserted with the 
INSERT LINE / WORD soft key.
� The small character set for the BF 150 was revised.
� The maximum input value for the jog increment infeed was limited to 10 mm 
for the setup operation according to the EN 12417 (12/2001) specification.
� In Cycles 21 to 25, climb milling (with M3) is standard (Q15 = +1).
� Enter the code number VERSION to generate the file TNC:\version.a. System 
data is saved in this filefor diagnostic purposes.
1 – 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1.3 NC Software 340 422-xx
Machine 
parameters
� MP2230.x is new: 
By entering MP2230.x ≠ 0, the correct operation of the motor brake is tested 
each time the control is started. The test is carried out after the drive is swit-
ched on, but before the reference marks are traversed. A current with the 
strength <MP2230.x> ⋅ <rated current of motor> is output. If the maximum 
permissible path from MP2232.x is exceeded, the error message 8130 
Motor brake defective <axis> appears, and the axis remains controlled. In 
case of an error, the axis must be moved to a safe position, and physically 
supported, if necessary. Only then may the machine be switched off so that 
the defect can be corrected. 
If no current flows to the motor during the test, the error message DSP error 
8140 <axis> appears. 
Input: 0 to 30.0 [⋅ rated current of motor] 
0: Do not test, or motor without brake 
1.3: Recommended input value
� MP2232.x is new: 
Maximum permissible path for testing the motor brake. 
Input: 0 to 10 [mm] or [degrees]
� MP4000.x has been expanded: 
The number of indexes was increased from 16 to 32 (MP4000.0 to 
MP4000.31).
� MP4045 is new: 
If all PLC outputs are switched off (e.g., during PLC program compilation or 
due to a PLC run-time error), the outputs that can not be switched off by an 
emergency stop can be switched off delayed by 250 ms. 
Input: %xxxxxxx 
Bits 0 to 6 correspond to O24 to O30 
0: Do not switch off output with delay 
1: Switch off output with delay
� MP7310 has been expanded: 
Until further notice, bits 5 and 6 have no function.
� MP7246 has been expanded: 
Bit 1: Function of the DEL key 
0: Deletion with the DEL key does not have to be confirmed. 
1: Deletion with the DEL key must be confirmed via soft key.
� MP7680 has been expanded: 
Bit 14 is used to determine the behavior of an NC start after an NC stop and 
an internal stop. For example, if the spindle is stopped after an internal stop 
and is not automatically started again after an NC start, you can force a block 
scan before the NC start by setting bit 14 equal to 1. 
Bit 14 = 0: NC start permitted 
Bit 14 = 1: NC start only permitted after block scan
NC Software Export version Release
340 422-02 340 423-02 October 2002
October 2003 NC Software 340 422-xx 1 – 3
� MP7682 has been expanded: 
Bit 6 = 0: No precision stop with TOOL DEF. 
Bit 6 = 1: Precision stop with TOOL DEF (the NC program is stopped, and 
only continued after acknowledgment). 
Bit 7: The ISO editor of the iTNC 530 does not sort the block elements. 
Bit 7 = 0: Block elements are executed unsorted. 
Bit 7 = 1: Block elements are automatically executed sorted (but the NC 
block is not displayed sorted).
Configuring the 
Axes and Spindle
� The 5-V power supply is monitored. The limits are 4.75 V and 5.40 V.
Machine Integra-
tion
� If the control is shut down or restarted by the PLC, the module and line num-
ber from which the command is called are entered in the log.
PLC modules � PLC modules 9092, 9093 and 9094 have been expanded by the following 
element numbers:
• *.T file 
30: Tool type for pocket table (PTYP)
• *.TCH file: 
5: Tool type for pocket table (PTYP) 
6: Reserve pocket (RSV) 
7: Value 1 (P1) 
to 
11: Value 5 (P5)
Miscellaneous � In the Machine Parameter Programming mode of operation, you can enter the 
code number NET123 after pressing the MOD key in order to set the network 
configuration during commissioning.
� In the Machine Parameter Programming mode of operation, you can use the 
DELETE CHAR, DELETE WORD or DELETE LINE soft keys to delete the 
corresponding entries. A deleted word or line can be reinserted with the 
INSERT LINE / WORD soft key.
� The small character set for the BF 150 was revised.
� The maximum input value for the jog increment infeed was limited to 10 mm 
for the setup operation according to the EN 12417 (12/2001) specification.
� In Cycles 21 to 25, climb milling (with M3) is standard (Q15 = +1).
� New: Cycles 251 (RECTANGULAR POCKET), 252 (CIRCULAR POCKET), 
253 (SLOT MILLING) and 254 (CIRCULAR SLOT).
� Enter the code number VERSION to generate the file TNC:\version.a. System 
data is saved in this file for diagnostic purposes.
1.4 NC Software 340 480-xx
HEIDENHAIN released the new NC software 340 480-02 for the iTNC 530 
with Windows 2000 in October 2002. The functionality of NC software 
340 480-02 corresponds to 340 422-02.
NC Software Export version Release
340 480-02 340 481-02 October 2002
1 – 4 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1 Update Information No. 4
1.1 Releases
The following versions of the NC software were released:
� NC software 340 420-09 and 340 421-09 October 2002
� NC software 340 422-03 and 340 423-03 January 2003
� NC software 340 480-03 and 340 481-03 January 2003
1.2 NC Software 340 420-xx
Machine parame-
ters
� MP2220.x has been expanded: 
Bits 7 to 15: Reserved
� MP2254.x is new: 
The field angle can be determined in various manners. 
Input: 0: The field angle does not have to be determined via the 
FIELD ORIENT. soft key. It is determined when the drive is 
first switched on. 
1: The field angle must be determined via the FIELD ORIENT. 
soft key.
Only when using a CC 424:
� MP2560.x is new: 
MP2560.x defines the number of values used for building the mean value of 
the first order low-pass filter. 
Input: 0 to 20 
Recommended input value: 0 
For high-frequency interference oscillations on one spindle: 12
Miscellaneous � The combination of Cycle 12 (PGM CALL) with Cycle 220 (POLAR PAT-
TERN) or Cycle 221 (CARTESIAN PATTERN) results in the No fixed cycle 
defined error message.
NC software Export version Release
340 420-09 340 421-09 December 2002
October 2003 Releases 1 – 1
1.3 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx
Machine parame-
ters
� Use the keyword PWMPARAMETER = in OEM.SYS to activate up to 30 “y” inde-
xes of MP2xxx.y for the current and speed controller.
� The maximum input value of MP2620.x was increased from 30.000 [A] to 
100.000 [A].
� The maximum input value of MP6550 was increased from 20 000 [mm/min] 
to 300 000 [mm/min].
� MP1120.x is new: 
The maximum motion of an axis when determining the field angle is moni-
tored. 
Input: 0.0000 to 300.0000 [mm] or [°]
� MP2220.x has been expanded: 
Bits 7 to 15: Reserved
� MP2254.x is new: 
The field angle can be determined in various manners. 
Input: 0: The field angle does not have to be determined via the 
FIELD ORIENT. soft key. It is determined when the drive is 
first switched on. 
1: The field angle must be determined via the FIELD ORIENT. 
soft key.
� MP2256.x and MP2257.x are new: 
The determined field angle is entered in MP2256.x instead of in the 
NCDATA.SYS system file. For purposes of reliability and redundancy, either 
the serial number of the encoder (only for encoders with EnDat interface) or 
a unique control ID is entered as identification in MP2257.x. If the current 
identification does not match the entry in MP2257.x, an error message 
appears. 
When using an encoder with EnDat interface, the error message 8830 
EnDat: no field angle <axis> appears. In any case the field angle must be 
determined anew, since the encoder does not match the field angle from 
MP2256.x 
When using an incremental encoder, the error message MP2257.<index> 
incorrect (ID=$<identification>) appears. The field angle from 
MP2256.x and the new identification (ID=$<identification>) for 
MP2257.x can only be assumed after determining that the same drive is 
meant (e.g. after changing controls).
NC software Export version Release
340 422-03 340 423-03 January 2003
340 480-03 340 481-03 January 2003
Danger
In all other cases the field angle must be determined anew, since otherwise 
uncontrolled drive motions could occur!
1 – 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
� MP2607.x is new: 
Damping factor for the active damping of low-frequency interference oscil-
lations (< approx. 20 Hz). 
Input: 0 to 30.0000: No damping 
1.5: Typical damping factor
� MP2608.x is new: 
Damping time constant for active damping of low-frequency interference 
oscillations. The time constant can be calculated according to the following 
formula: 
k: Factor from 0.8 to 1.0 
f: Frequency to be damped (< approx. 20 Hz) 
Input: 0 to 0.9999 [s] 
0: No damping 
0.005 to 0.02: Typical damping time constant
� MP7160 has been expanded: 
Bit 4: During tapping, the tool axis can track the spindle, or it can be interpo-
lated with the spindle. Interpolation can result in higher speed stability of the 
tool axis. The path jerk (spindle and tool axis) can be set via MP3415.3: 
Whichever value is smaller from this formula and from MP1090.0 is valid. 
= 0: Tool axis tracked 
= 1: Tool axis and spindle interpolated
� MP7246 has been expanded: 
Bit 2: When testing an NC program in the Test Run operating mode (calcu-
late machining time: active), a tool-usage file (*.T.DEP) can be created auto-
matically. This contains all required tools (number, index, name, radius), the 
machining times (at 100% override) and program calls. 
= 0: Do not create tool-usage file 
= 1: Create tool-usage file
� MP7266.x has been expanded: 
MP7266.32Maximum shaft speed [rpm] (NMAX)
� MP7492.x is new: 
You can couple axes when setting a datum, meaning that the datum is set 
in more than one axis at once. Enter the number of the axis in which the 
same datum is to be set in MP7492.x The preset table function must be 
active. 
Input: 0 to 65535 
–1: Do not set a datum 
MP7492.0 Datum set in the first axis 
MP7492.1 Datum set in the second axis 
...
� In order to see them more easily, comments and unused machine parame-
ters are displayed with the color from MP7355.3 ($00000FF) in the machine 
parameter file.
MP2608.x k
2 π f⋅ ⋅
-----------------=
r a
MP3415.3
---------------------------=
October 2003 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx 1 – 3
Only when using a CC 424:
� MP2250.x is new: 
The field angle can be determined in various manners. 
Input: 0: Same as input value 2 
1: The field angle is determined when the motor brake is 
 applied (MP2252.x is necessary). 
2: The field angle is determined without moving the motor 
 when the motor brake is applied (MP2254.x = 0 is used). 
3: Same as input value 2, but the motor brake is released 
before the field angle is determined. Possibly more exact 
 values can be determined than with MP2250.x = 2.
� MP2252.x is new: 
If you determine the field angle when the motor brake is applied, then you 
must define how far the motor can move against the brake for this move-
ment to be recognized as a motion. 
Input: 0.0001 to 100 000 [mm] or [°] 
� MP2254.x is new: 
The field angle can be determined in various manners. 
Input: 0: The field angle does not have to be determined via the 
FIELD ORIENT. soft key. It is determined when the drive is 
first switched on. 
2: The field angle must be determined via the FIELD ORIENT. 
soft key. During this determination, the relevant settings as well 
as the correct wiring are checked.
� MP2560.x is new: 
MP2560.x defines the number of values used for building the mean value of 
the first order low-pass filter. 
Input: 0 to 20 
Recommended input value: 0 
For high-frequency interference oscillations on one spindle: 12
� Machine parameter MP7600.x has no function. The position controller cycle 
time results from the PWM frequency TPosition controller = 1:fPWM.
� MP7602 is new: 
MP7602 sets the PLC cycle time in steps of 3 ms. Invalid entries are roun-
ded down. 
Input: 12 to 60 [ms] 
0: 10.8 ms
1 – 4 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Configuring the 
axes and spindle
� Up to 20 commands (positioning, override settings, etc.) for auxiliary axes 
can be executed per run-through of the PLC program.
� When commissioning with TNCopt, the machine axes must be moved. For 
safety purposes, a function of this type should be enabled on the control. 
The entry TNCOPT.LOCKSOFTKEYVISIBLE = YES in OEM.SYS makes the soft 
key TNCOPT OFF ON visible after pressing the MOD key. It is used to enable 
such functions. As a default, the soft key is always set to OFF when the con-
trol is started up.
� With the WRITE TO KINEMATIC AT COLUMN “<column to be written to>” 
CAPTURE “<searched column>” KEY “<keyword>” = <value> command you 
can overwrite individual cells in the active kinematics table in the Program 
Run operating modes. The line is selected by searching for the entry KEY in 
the column CAPTURE. The column COLUMN is overwritten with <value>. 
After entering the codenumber 555343 and pressing the SPECIAL TNC 
FUNCTIONS soft key, the ENTRY IN KINEMATIC TABLE soft key appears for this 
function.
� A circular interpolation test can be run in the oscilloscope. In the oscillos-
cope, you must select the CIRC operating mode, set Deviation in the chan-
nel settings, and then select the two axes with which the circular interpola-
tion test is to be run. After starting the oscilloscope, start an NC program in 
which a circle is programmed. The circle center point must be at the origin 
of both axes. The oscilloscope records the deviations from the circle.
� An X/Y graph of two axes can be selected in the oscilloscope. The XY opera-
ting mode must be selected in the oscilloscope. Choose the YT operating 
mode for chronological representation.
� The machining plane position indication has been expanded by the following 
swivel-axis combination: 
Swivel head and rotary table: Axis sequence C fixed, A fixed, B fixed –90°, 
A variable, B fixed +90°, A fixed, C variable (tool axis Z)
Machine integra-
tion
� The entry PRESETTABLE = OFF in OEM.SYS deactivates the preset table after 
a control reset. The stored datums are no longer valid, and a new datum 
must be set in each axis (possible in all traverse ranges). The active status 
of preset tables is reported with M4589=1. When the control is started up, 
new cycle data is generated (with or without support from preset tables). 
In order to preserve the possibility of switching between active/inactive pre-
set tables in OEM cycles, the following procedure could be followed: 
Create a separate directory on the PLC partition for each cycle project 
(PLC:\OEMCYC_ZIP\, PLC:\OEMCY2_ZIP\, PLC:\OEMCY3_ZIP\, etc.). For 
each cycle project, enter in OEM.SYS a keyword with the name of the .ZIP 
file to be unzipped, i.e. OEMCYC.ZIPNAME = ABC.ZIP, OEMCY2.ZIPNAME = 
DEF.ZIP, OEMCY3.ZIPNAME = GHI.ZIP. The ZIP files contain all information for 
the cycles, including the directory structure. When the control is started up, 
the appropriate ZIP files are unpacked in the folders.
� After the keyword KINEMATIC has been entered, more than 15 entries can be 
displayed in the selection window.
� When an NC program is stopped by an error message, the following additio-
nal information is entered in the log: NC program, line number, actual posi-
tion, datum, datum shifts, tool number
October 2003 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx 1 – 5
� The PR.LINESLOCKED = entry in OEM.SYS is used to write-protect lines in the 
preset table, such as for the machine datum. Separate each line number 
with a comma, and connect line ranges with a dash: PR.LINESLOCKED = 1,4-
8,22. Write-protection can only be assigned to the first 255 lines. Write-pro-
tected lines are shown in a different color. The active line is always write-
protected.
� Limit the maximum shaft speed of the tool in the NMAX column in the tool 
table. If a higher speed is programmed, the error message Calculated rpm 
too large appears. The maximum override value is limited to NMAX. The 
speed is not limited if “-” is entered under NMAX, or if NO ENT was pressed.
� Images in .BMP or .BMX format can be displayed in the PLC window. The 
following applies to the keyword in the mask file: 
GRAPHICS= <File name> [,<Layer>] [/c] 
<File name>: Name of the image file (*.BMP or *.BMX). If no path is 
entered, the path PLC:\LANGUAGE\<Language> is used. <Language> 
depends on MP7230.3. If %GraphicsResolution%is entered in the path, then 
this text is replaced by the current screen resolution (1024x768 or 640x480). 
The images must have a color depth of 16 or 24 bits, and a maximum size 
of 429 x 442 (BF 150) or 271 x 312 (BF 120) pixels. Images that are too large 
are truncated. 
<Layer> (optional): Layer of a BMX file to be displayed. If no entry is made, 
the basic image (layer 0) is displayed. 
/c (optional): If it is a BMX file, the layers are displayed cyclically, beginning 
with 0 or <Layer>. The cycle time is defined via the REFRESH = keyword. 
Example: GRAPHICS=PLC:\Images\%GraphicsResolution%\Test.BMX 
The file Test.BMX is searched for in the paths PLC:\Images\1024x768\ or 
PLC:\Images\640x480\.
� In the TCR file containing the magazine rules for a tool magazine the defini-
tion of the search sequence must be given for each magazine. It can no lon-
ger be given globally at the beginning of the file. If the search sequence is 
the same for each magazine, then it must be repeated after each magazine 
definition. 
Example: 
... 
[magazine]4 
[search]1 = 1 2 
[search]2 = 2 
...
Warning
The definition(s) of the search sequence(s) must be adapted in all existing 
TCR files!
1 – 6 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
PLC programming � FN17: SYSWRITE has been expanded: 
Use the keyword MPFRAGMENT<value> = in OEM.SYS to define up to 10 
machine parameter subfiles (<value> from 0 to 9). They can also be activa-
ted with FN17: SYSWRITE. Changes to spindle machine parameters (MP3xxx 
or MP13xxx) are only active after an S output. All other machine parameters 
are active immediately. The changes also remain in effect if a new NC pro-
gram is selected, but not if the control is restarted. 
ID1020 
NR1 = <value>
� FN17: SYSWRITE and FN18: SYSWRITE have been expanded: 
Nine variables are available for storing and reading in machine statuses by 
using NC macros. MP7300 controls the clearing of the variables. As oppo-
sed to Q parameters, these variables can only be overwritten with 
FN17:SYSWRITE. 
ID590 
NR1 
IDX<1 to 9>
� FN18: SYSREAD has been expanded: 
It can find the current range of traverse. 
ID20 
NR17
� FN18: SYSREAD has been expanded: 
You can interrogate whether a line in the preset table is write-protected. A 
return code not equal to 0 means it is write-protected. 
ID530 
NR2 
IDX<line>
� FN18: SYSREAD has been expanded: 
The ASCII value of the axis designations defined in MP410.3 or MP410.4 
can be read. 
ID1000 
NR410 
IDX<3 or 4>
� FN18: SYSREAD has been expanded: 
The system time of the control is read in seconds. 
ID320 
NR1 
IDX0
� FN17: SYSWRITE and FN18: SYSREAD have been expanded: 
In order to write data to the new columns in the tool table (or to read it out), 
ID50 was expanded by the following NR:
• NR24: Probe center offset in reference axis (CAL-OF1)
• NR25: Probe center offset in minor axis (CAL-OF2)
• NR26: Spindle angle during calibration (CAL-ANG)
• NR27: Tool type for pocket table (PTYP)
• NR28: Maximum shaft speed [rpm] (NMAX)
� The entry NUMBERMP4230 = in OEM.SYS defines the number of indexes for 
MP4230.x. The maximum input value is 99; no entry or an invalid entry defi-
nes 32 indexes.
October 2003 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx 1 – 7
� If the NC macro defined under RESETINIT = in NCMACRO.SYS is not execu-
ted completely, you cannot switch to the Program Run operating modes. 
The error message Machine not initialized and the soft key INIT appear. 
The soft key can be used to restart the NC macro.
� The entry FNERROR = in OEM.SYS is used to indicate an ASCII file (*.A) that 
in lines 1 to 300 contains the error messages for FN14: ERROR = (0 to 299). 
The file must be located under PLC:\LANGUAGE\<language>, where <lan-
guage> depends on MP7230.3. In order to receive additional information via 
the HELP key, ASCII files for the error cause and corrective action can be 
defined with the FNERRREASON = and FNERRFIX = entries. The setup of these 
files must correspond to that of the files for PLC error messages.
PLC modules � PLC modules 9092, 9093 and 9094 have been expanded by element num-
ber 31 (NMAX).
� In PLC module 9186, the soft-key function for feed-rate limiting can be car-
ried out with transfer value 7.
Module 9217 Display pop-up window for messages
Module 9217 can be used in the Machine operating modes to display a pop-
up window with the text of a file (max. 16 KB) and various soft-key rows. The 
pressed key or soft key is reported. Starting at a certain number of lines (up to 
500 lines possible), a scroll bar is displayed automatically. Use the arrow keys 
or the PgUp and PgDn keys to scroll through the pop-up window. The 
keyboard is assigned to the pop-up window. The width of the window is 
determined by the longest line. The module should be called in a SPAWN job, 
since the module does not return until the window is closed, and therefore 
submit jobs would be blocked.
Call:
PS S <Window title>
PS S <ASCII file with message text>
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
0: No soft-key row; clear window with CE
1: Soft-key row with OK soft key
2: Soft-key row with YES and NO soft keys
3: Soft-key row with YES, NO and END soft keys
CM 9217
PL B/W/D <Pressed key or soft key>
–1: Error
0: CE key
1: OK soft key
2: YES soft key
3: NO soft key
4: END soft key
1 – 8 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Error detection: 
Miscellaneous � If the 24-V voltage is missing at X44, the error message Supply voltage 
missing at X44 is displayed.
� A text file (jh_error.txt) including all NC error messages (with error numbers) 
is placed in the corresponding folder for each language under PLC:\LAN-
GUAGE\.
� After pressing the MOD key and the DIAGNOSIS soft key, the two soft keys 
DSP DIAGNOSIS and HEROS DIAGNOSIS are displayed.
• DSP DIAGNOSIS: After pressing this soft key, various release, inverter, 
and PLC signals are displayed dynamically. After selecting the supply 
unit used and pressing the DSP STATUS soft key, the signals are dis-
played as in the PC software TNCopt and TNCdiag.
• HEROS DIAGNOSIS: After pressing this soft key, the file TNC:\herosdia-
gnose.txt is created. HEIDENHAIN uses this file for diagnosis of the 
operating system.
� The zoom function for the graphics was accelerated.
� When a touch probe cycle is called in the Manual Operation and Electronic 
Handwheel operating modes, and the current angles of the swivel axes do 
not coincide with those in the Tilt working plane function, the error mes-
sage Axis angle not equal tilt angle appears.
� The PLANE function defines the position of the machining plane. The TILT 
MACHINING PLANE soft key appears after pressing the SPECIAL TNC FUNCTIONS 
soft key. The machining plane can be defined through space angles, Euler 
angles, projection angles, incremental angles, the entry of three points, or 
by two vectors. The programming of each function is aided by animated sup-
port graphics. This function is only available in conjunction with preset 
tables. The PLANE function can be programmed after M128.
� During remote control via the LSV2 protocol, keystrokes assigned to the 
PLC windows and PLC pop-up windows are evaluated.
� The file PLC:\PROTO\EXAMPLE.TAB is created after pressing the COPY SAM-
PLE FILE soft key. This template only contains the column Name, and is offe-
red as a template when creating a new table.
� The Exchange touch probe battery error message no longer leads to the 
probing process being interrupted. Only the error message appears.
� If an appropriate tool-usage file exists when an NC program is started, then 
this data is compared with the tool table, and appropriate error messages 
are displayed if necessary. The value entered for TIME2 in the tool table must 
be at least 10% greater than the time required.
� A popup window appears when a datum from a touch-probe cycle is to be 
assumed into the active line of the preset table.
� When automatic programming graphics are active, a CYCLE CALL is carried 
out for SL cycles without an error message even if the contourwas not des-
cribed completely.
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Pop-up window displayed
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid mode
6 No connection to display server
11 Invalid string for title
20 Module was not called in a spawn job or submit job
28 Pop-up window already active
October 2003 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx 1 – 9
� The screen mask for setting a datum in the touch probe cycles in the Manual 
Operation and Electronic Handwheel operating modes was changed.
� The combination of Cycle 12 (PGM CALL) with Cycle 220 (POLAR PAT-
TERN) or Cycle 221 (CARTESIAN PATTERN) results in the No fixed cycle 
defined error message.
� After Cycle 2 (CALIBRATE TS), the determined probe radius is automatically 
assumed as the tool radius if MP7411 bit 1 = 1.
� The length of a touch probe can be calibrated with Cycle 9 (CALIBRATE TS 
LENGTH).
� In Cycles 210 (SLOT RECIP. PLNG) and 211 (CIRCULAR SLOT), the feed 
rate for the plunging depth can be defined with Q206.
� The approach behavior of Cycle 215 (C. STUD FINISHING) was optimized.
� In Cycle 403 (ROT IN ROTARY AXIS), the reference angle for the probing 
surface can be defined with Q380. Q305 and Q303 define whether and in 
which line of the preset or datum table the rotary axis angle is set to 0.
� In Cycle 431 (MEASURE PLANE), the tool axis coordinates of the three pro-
bing points are saved in Q parameters Q173 to Q175. This way the PLANE 
function can be used by entering three points.
1.4 Additional Enhancements to NC Software 340 480-xx
� MP7235 was removed, meaning that on Windows PCs the time zone must 
be set correctly, since the time difference is calculated from this setting.
1 – 10 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1 Update Information No. 5
1.1 Releases
The following versions of the NC software were released:
� NC software 340 422-04 and 340 423-04 February 2003
� NC software 340 480-04 and 340 481-04 February 2003
� NC software 340 422-05 and 340 423-05 April 2003
� NC software 340 480-05 and 340 481-05 April 2003
� NC software 340 420-10 and 340 421-10 April 2003
1.2 NC Software 340 420-xx
Miscellaneous � The approach behavior of Cycle 215 (C. STUD FINISHING) was optimized.
1.3 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx
Machine parame-
ters
� MP1357.x is new: 
MP1357.x defines the behavior of W1032 (reference marks not yet traver-
sed) during the double reference run. 
Input: 0: Reset W1032 if the current position was read via the EnDat 
interface of the speed encoder 
1: Reset W1032 if the reference mark was traversed with the 
position encoder
� The meaning of the bits in MP 7500 depend on whether the function of the 
preset table is active or not (PRESETTABLE = entry in OEM.SYS).
NC Software Export version Release
340 420-10 340 421-10 April 2003
NC Software Export version Release
340 422-04 340 423-04 February 2003
340 480-04 340 481-04 February 2003
NC Software Export version Release
340 422-05 340 423-05 April 2003
340 480-05 340 481-05 April 2003
October 2003 Releases 1 – 1
MP7500 Preset table active Preset table not active
Bit 0 “Tilted working plane” 
0: Off 
1: On
“Tilted working plane” 
0: Off 
1: On
Bit 1 0: Angles correspond to the position of the 
tilting axes of the head/table 
1: Angles correspond to the spatial angle 
(the iTNC calculates the position of the 
tilted axes of the head/table)
0: Angles correspond to the position of the 
tilting axes of the head/table 
1: Angles correspond to the spatial angle 
(the iTNC calculates the position of the 
tilted axes of the head/table)
Bit 2 0: The tilting axes are not positioned with 
Cycle 19 
1: The tilting axes are positioned with 
Cycle 19
0: The tilting axes are not positioned with 
Cycle 19 
1: The tilting axes are positioned with 
Cycle 19
Bit 3 No function 0: The current tilting-axis position is taken 
into account with respect to the machine 
datum 
1: The 0° position is assumed for the first 
rotary axis
Bit 4 No function 0: Compensate mechanical offset during 
exchange of the spindle head when calling 
M128, M114 or “tilted working plane” 
1: Compensate mechanical offset during 
PLC datum shift
Bit 5 Test of the tilting axis during “datum 
setting” in X, Y and Z 
0: Current tilting-axis position must fit to 
the defined tilting angles 
1: No test
0: The current tilting-axis position is taken 
into account with respect to the machine 
datum 
1: The tilting-axis position that was 
entered with the 3-D ROT soft key applies.
Bit 6 0: Spatial angle C is realized through a 
rotation of the coordinate system. 
1: Spatial angle C is realized through a 
rotation of the table.
0: Spatial angle C is realized through a 
rotation of the coordinate system. 
1: Spatial angle C is realized through a 
rotation of the table.
Bit 7 No function 0: The current tilting-axis position is taken 
into account with respect to the machine 
datum 
1: The active tilting-axis position is 
a) derived from the tilting angles in the 3D 
ROT window if manual tilting is active 
b) derived from the reference coordinates 
of the rotary axes if tilting is inactive
Bit 8 No function 0: The tilting axis positioning is considered 
depending on bit 3, bit 5 and bit 7 
1: If manual tilting is active, the datum to 
be set for the principal axes X, Y and Z is 
recalculated back to the home position of 
the tilting element.
1 – 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1.4 Miscellaneous
In the iTNC 530, bits 9 to 15 are without function in NC software levels 
340 420-x, 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx with module 9035 code 4 (displayed 
screen window).
October 2003 Miscellaneous 1 – 3
1 – 4 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1 Update Information No. 6
1.1 Releases
The following versions of the NC software were released:
� NC software 340 422-06 and 340 423-06 June 2003
� NC software 340 480-06 and 340 481-06 June 2003
1.2 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx
As of June 2003, after the release of the NC software 340 422-06, the 
iTNC 530 will be shipped with the NC software 340 422-xx as standard.
Machine parame-
ters
� MP2220.x has been expanded: 
Bit 3—CC 422 und CC 424: Switching off the controller when the motor bra-
kes are activated 
0: Suppress vibrations 
1: Do not suppress vibrations 
Bit 5—CC 422 and CC 424: Monitoring temperature too low 
0: Active 
1: Inactive 
Bit 7—CC 424: Monitoring of encoder input frequency 
0: Active 
1: Inactive 
Bit 8—CC 424: Compensate the mechanical offset during switch-on by gra-
dually increasing the kV factor 
0: Active 
1: Inactive
� MP2234.x is new: 
With MP2234.x, you can suppress the output of the BRK signal over the 
PWM interfaces in order to control the motor brakes through HEIDENHAIN 
inverters. 
Bit 0 – 
0. Signal is transmitted 
1. Signal is not transmitted 
Bit 1—reserved
� MP7266.x has been expanded: 
MP7266.33 Retract tool (LIFTOFF)
� MP7351 has been expanded: 
With MP7351.x, the colors of the error classes are defined for error messa-
ges from the PET table. 
MP7351.0: Error 
MP7351.1: Warning 
MP7351.2: Information
� The maximum input value of MP7492.x was reduced to 9.
NC Software Export version Release
340 422-06 340 423-06 June 2003
340 480-06 340 481-06 June 2003
October 2003 Releases 1 – 1
� Standard color settings: 
MP7354.3 = $0A0A0A0 
MP7355.3 = $0A0A0A0 
MP7367.0 = $0ECECEC
� MP7494 has been added: 
M134 (exact stop at nontangential contour transitions when positioning with 
rotary axes) applies only for rotary axes. With MP7494 you can define a 
required exact stop for specific axes. 
Bits 0 to 13 represent axes 1 to 14 
0: No exact stop 
1: Exact stop
� MP7500 has been expanded: 
Bit 9: Reserved
� MP7620 has been expanded: 
Bit 7: Reserved
� MP7641 has been expanded: 
Bit 1: Reserved
� MP7672.x is new: 
Reserved, enter 0
� MP7684 has been expanded: 
Bit 8: Reserved
� MP7690 has been expanded: 
Bit 0—Evaluation of the electronic ID labels of HEIDENHAIN power modules 
0: Active 
1: Inactive 
Bit 0—Evaluation of the electronic ID labels of HEIDENHAIN synchronousmotors 
0: Active 
1: Inactive
Configuring the 
Axes and Spindle
� The machining plane position indication has been expanded by the following 
swivel-axis combination: 
A+45, B variable, A–45, C variable (tool axis Y)
� Traverse does not begin during tapping until after M4030 or M4031 has 
been set and after a cyclic PLC program scan. This makes it possible in the 
PLC program to recognize the start of a tapping cycle.
� With the CC 424 it is possible to change milling heads. Encoders with EnDat 
interface can be used. After the kinematics is switched over, the absolute 
value can be read out again by pressing the PASS OVER REFERENCE soft key.
� With MP2392.x you can set a power limit for the spindle when the 
ERR.IZ.GR signal is active.
1 – 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Machine Integra-
tion
� With FN18: SYSREAD ID61 NR0 IDX<tool number> you can ascertain the tool 
change sequence. 
Return codes: 
–1: Sequence cannot be ascertained 
0: Tool already in the spindle 
1: Manual tool → manual tool 
2: Normal tool → manual tool 
3: Special tool → manual tool 
4: T0 → manual tool 
5: Manual tool → normal tool 
6: Normal tool → normal tool 
7: Special tool → normal tool 
8: T0 → normal tool 
9: Manual tool → special tool 
10: Normal tool → special tool 
11: Special tool → special tool 
12: T0 → special tool 
13: Manual tool → T0 
14: Normal tool → T0 
15: Special tool → T0 
This information is reported to the PLC at the same time with the pocket and 
magazine numbers. You can find this information with Module 9035.
� In the PET table the strings S4 to S15 can be used.
� In the MFUNCT.TAB table in the MANLOCK column can be used Y/N to define 
whether the M function is allowed in the manual modes, and in the NONESTED 
column with Y/N you can define whether the NC macro can be called from 
another NC macro.
� HEIDENHAIN power modules of the UM 1xxD or UM 1xxBD series and HEI-
DENHAIN synchronous motors with absolute encoders with EnDat inter-
face are equipped with an electronic ID label. The product name, the ID 
number and the serial number are saved in this ID label. The units are auto-
matically detected and, after confirmation by the user, are automatically 
transferred to MP2100.x or MP2200.x. During every further control restart, 
the control checks whether the connected units with electronic ID label 
match the entries in MP2100.x or MP2200.x. If not, an error message might 
appear. In exceptional cases, the evaluation of the electronic ID label can be 
deactivated with MP7690.
� Through the LIFTOFF column of the tool table, a function can be activated 
that retracts the tool from the workpiece by 0.1 mm in tool-axis direction 
after an NC stop. You must activate this function in M4620. This function 
must also be activated in the NC program with M148 (M149 deactivates it 
again).
� A tool change by M101 is transmitted delayed by at least one block and by 
no later than one minute.
� In the log, the source of the key inputs is registered under INFO: MAIN KEY-
SOURCE <source.> <Source> can accept the following entries:
• KEYBOARD
• PLC
• PLCNCSTART
• HANDWHEEL
• LSV2
October 2003 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx 1 – 3
PLC Programming � The values of the machine parameters MP1054.x and MP7530.x can be 
read with FN18: SYSREAD ID1000 if they do not contain any formulas.
� The RESTART PLC soft key stops the PLC program and restarts it. Marker 
M4173 is supported.
� The column heading of the TRACE IN-CODE function have been revised.
� The compiled PLC program is saved in the control, i.e. after confirmation of 
power interruption, the PLC program need not be compiled. It is compiled 
only if one of the source files has changed. A binary PLC program can be 
created with PLCdesignNT for test purposes and transferred to the control. 
This does not change the entry in OEM.SYS.
� W1016 is new: 
The number of the most recently unsuccessfully executed PLC module is 
saved in W1016 for diagnostic purposes.
PLC modules � Module 9035 expanded: 
The module was expanded by the following status information to find the 
information from FN18: SYSREAD ID61 NR0 IDX<tool number>: 
50: Tool change sequence (see FN18: SYSREAD) 
51: Read pocket number for reserve 
52: Read magazine number for reserve 
53: Read pocket number for inserting 
54: Read magazine number for inserting
� Modules 9092, 9093 and 9094 have been expanded by element number 32 
for tool retraction (LIFTOFF).
1 – 4 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Module 9072 Copying a byte block into a string
Module 9072 copies a byte block into a string. The module does not check 
whether the byte block consists of valid ASCII characters. The content of the 
string may not be correctly displayed (e.g. due to special characters for string-
end codes). A string end code is automatically set after the last copied byte. 
The module always copies the programmed byte block, regardless of any 
string-end code in the byte block.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <start byte>
PS B/W/D/K <length of the byte block>
PS B/W/D/K <string number>
CM 9072
Error detection: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Byte block was copied into string
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid length of the programmed byte block (max. 127 
characters)
3 Invalid address of the start byte
4 Invalid sum of start byte and length of the byte block
11 Invalid string
October 2003 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx 1 – 5
Module 9140 Set axis-specific feed-rate limit
With Module 9140 you can set axis-specific feed-rate limits. The limits are 
saved in sequential double words for each axis. Invalid feed-rate values are set 
to 0 and M4203, other axes retain their limits.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <start double word>
>= 0: Feed rate from corresponding double word
–1: Maximum feed rate
–2: Axis-specific rapid traverse from MP1010.x
–3: Axis-specific manual feed rate from MP1020.x
PS B/W/D/K <Number of axes or double words>
CM 9140
Error detection: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Feed-rate limit is set.
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid value of start address (< –3)
2 Invalid number of axes or double words
3 Invalid block length as of starting address
5 No double word address
24 Module was called in a spawn job or submit job
1 – 6 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Module 9141 Read the axis-specific feed-rate limit
With Module 9141 you can read axis-specific feed-rate limits. The limits are 
saved in sequential double words for each axis.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <start double word>
>= 0: Feed rate from corresponding double word
–1: Maximum feed rate
–2: Axis-specific rapid traverse from MP1010.x
–3: Axis-specific manual feed rate from MP1020.x
PS B/W/D/K <Number of axes or double words>
CM 9140
Error detection: 
Miscellaneous � If more than one error message occurs, you can display a list of them with 
the ERR key.
� The search function was expanded by the REPLACE ALL soft key.
� To be able to use the PLANE function with tilting axes and Hirth coupling, 
after the PLANE function the position of the angular axes can be transferred 
for the coordinate transformation with M114. The transferred coordinates 
must be in the Hirth grid.
� OEM.SYS is reevaluated during activation of the machine parameter pro-
gramming operating mode and before downloading a machine parameter file. 
In connection with TNCremoNT 2.2, during the restoring of a backup, first 
OEM.SYS is transferred and also evaluated before transferring the machine 
parameter file.
� In the help window for error messages, further notes on the error message 
is shown under Additional information. 
� Cycles 253 (SLOT MILLING) and 254 (CIRCULAR SLOT) were expanded by 
the parameters Q385 (FEED RATE FOR FINISHING) and Q366 (PLUNGING).
� Cycles 1 (PECKING) to 5 (CIRCULAR POCKET), 17 (RIGID TAPPING) and 18 
(THREAD CUTTING) were moved in the cycle structure. They are pro-
grammable over the soft keys SPECIAL CYCLES and OLD CYCLS:
� Cycles 410 (DATUM INSIDE RECTAN.) to 416 (DATUM INSIDE CIRCLE) and 
418 (DATUMFROM 4 HOLES) were expanded by the parameters Q381 
(PROBING IN TS AXIS), Q382 (1ST CO. FOR TS AXIS), Q383 (2ND CO. FOR 
TS AXIS), Q384 (3RD CO. FOR TS AXIS) and Q333 (DATUM).
� Cycles 251 (RECTANGULAR POCKET) and 252 (CIRCULAR POCKET) were 
expanded by the parameters Q385 (FEED RATE FOR FINISHING). The pok-
ket is cleared in a spiral path from the inside to the outside.
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Feed-rate limit is set.
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 2 Invalid number of axes or double words
3 Invalid block length as of starting address
5 No double word address
24 Module was called in a spawn job or submit job
October 2003 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx 1 – 7
� Swivel-head axes are ignored when M116 is programmed.
� In Cycle 32 (TOLERANCE) the tolerance for rotary axes is also active 
with single and double filter (up to now it was active only with HSC filter).
� Cycle 3 (MEASURING) was expanded by the DATUM SYSTEM input box.
� With the UPPER/LOWERCASE ON OFF soft key, the search function in the ASCII 
editor can differentiate between upper and lower case letters.
� The manually set datum, which was set by the user with the axis keys, is 
automatically written into line 0 of the preset table.
� Pressing the Q key displays the newly arranged menu for FN functions. The 
submenus feature a “Back” soft key.
� With FN16: F-PRINT the output can be shown in a pop-up window. The pro-
tocol file screen: must be entered.
� After the MOD key and the UPDATE DATA soft key in the Machine parameter 
programming operating mode, the SP → iTNC soft key appears. With this soft 
key you can install “service packs” that are released by HEIDENHAIN when 
required. An installed service pack is displayed after the MOD key through 
SP<x> after the ID number of the NC software.
� The tool insert file can be generated through an LSV2 command.
� If the program is aborted, the point of interruption is saved and is displayed 
after the RESTORE POS. AT soft key is pressed. It can be loaded with the SEL-
ECT LAST N soft key. If the program is aborted due to a power outage, or if 
the iTNC 530 with Windows 2000 was shut down in Windows, after the 
Power interrupted message is acknowledged, the NC program is aborted 
message appears (the power-fail monitoring must be active).
� TCPM FUNCTION can be programmed with the SPECIAL TNC FUNCT. And 
FUNCTION soft keys. FUNCTION TCPM is a further development of the M128 
function with which you can define behavior during positioning of rotary 
axes. Unlike M128, with FUNCTION TCPM the user can himself define the 
behavior of various functions:
• F TCP/F CONT: Behavior of the programmed feed rate
• AXIS POS/AXIS SPAT: Interpretation of the NC coordinates programmed 
in the NC program
• PATHCTRL AXIS/PATHCTRL VECTOR: Type of interpolation between starting 
and target position
� With the CONVERT PROGRAM soft key:
• The FK programming can be resolved (FK -> H soft key).
• Two NC programs can be generated that only contain lines and circular 
arcs and can be run in the programmed sequence or the opposite 
sequence (CONVERT PGM → .FWD/.REV) soft key.
1 – 8 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1.3 Additional Enhancements to NC Software 340 480-xx
� Module 9133 was expanded by the code 2 (temperature of 2nd CPU).
� MP7225 is new: 
MP7225 defines the windows drives that are not supposed to appear in the 
TNC file management (PGM MGT). 
Input:A to Z 
If there are more than one drive, they are entered without spaces, 
e.g. MP7225 = CDE
� Hard disks that are shipped with 340 480-06, support the Windows 2000 
MultiLanguage version. In the version you can select the language of the 
operating system. This new function cannot be retrofitted.
� The HeROS real-time operating system tests cyclically within 5 seconds 
whether a connection to the iTNC application exists under Windows, whe-
ther the file system can be accessed, and whether the X server for the dis-
play and keyboard is functioning. If one of these tests is impossible for more 
than 5 seconds, M4600 is set. M4600 is reset when all tests are possible 
again. If one test is impossible for more than 10 seconds, the control is shut 
down.
October 2003 Additional Enhancements to NC Software 340 480-xx 1 – 9
✎
1 – 10 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1 Update Information No. 7
1.1 Releases
The following versions of the NC software were released:
� NC software 340 422-07 and 340 423-07 August 2003
� NC software 340 480-07 and 340 481-07 August 2003
1.2 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx
Machine parame-
ters
� The maximum input value for MP3142 and MP13142 (line count of the 
spindle position encoder) was increased from 9999 to 30000.
� MP4043 and MP4044 are new: 
If all PLC outputs are switched off (e.g., during PLC program compilation or 
due to a PLC run-time error), the outputs that can not be switched off by an 
emergency stop can be switched off delayed by 250 ms. 
MP4043 Outputs O0 to O15 
Input: %xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 
Bits 0 to 15 correspond to O0 to O15 
0: Do not switch off output with delay 
1: Switch off output with delay 
MP4044 Outputs O16 to O23 
Input: %xxxxxxxx 
Bits 0 to 7 correspond to O16 to O23 
0: Do not switch off output with delay 
1: Switch off output with delay
� MP7224.x has been expanded: 
MP7224.2 is used to disable the EDIT ON/OFF soft key for specified file 
types. If the soft key is disabled via MP7224.2 or the file is protected via 
MP7224.1, the error message Protected file! appears if you press this 
soft key.
� Changes to MP7235 (time difference to Universal Time) causes a reset.
� MP7237.x and MP7238.x have been expanded: 
The machine parameters support the PLC operating times 9 to 13 
(MP7237.x bits 8 to 12, MP7238.8 to MP7238.12).
NC Software Export version Release
340 422-07 340 423-07 August 2003
340 480-07 340 481-07 August 2003
October 2003 Releases 1 – 1
Configuring the 
axes and spindle
� The integrated oscilloscope can be activated via the DIAGNOSIS, DRIVE DIA-
GNOSIS and OSCI soft keys without using code number 688379. Press the 
END key to switch from the oscilloscope display to the setup. Entering code 
number 807667 (PLC programming) followed by the DIAGNOSIS and DRIVE 
DIAGNOSIS soft keys or code number 688379 (oscilloscope) enables the I 
CONTROL soft key for adjusting the current controller.
� The input range for the number of pole pairs in the motor table was expan-
ded from 99 to 999.
� In the Program Run, Single Block and Program Run, Full Sequence opera-
ting modes, press the TOOL USAGE TEST soft key to compare the data in the 
tool usage file with the data in the tool table. If the tool usage file is not cur-
rent or does not exist, the error message Generate tool usage file! 
appears. Otherwise a popup window with the results of the comparison 
appears.
Machine integra-
tion
� For each soft key pressed, an entry is made in the log file, including the path 
to the appropriate image file.
� The DIAGNOSIS soft key is also available in the PLC Programming operating 
mode (code number 807667).
� The NC cyclically monitors the supply voltage and short circuits of the PLC 
outputs of a PL 510.
� The diagnosis functions are only available if at least one reference axis has 
a HEIDENHAIN synchronous motor with electronic ID label attached to it, or 
Option #14 (DSP Diagnostics) is enabled.
� Each traverse range uses its own preset table. The preset table of the cur-
rent traverse range can be viewed in the Manual operating mode. 
FN17: SYSWRITE and FN18: SYSREAD refer to the active preset table.
� The maximum number of all dependencies for non-linear axis-error compen-
sation is 15.
PLC programming � Markers M4800 through M4999 are deleted before the first run of the PLC 
program (after compilation or restarting).
� The EDIT soft key is available on both rows of soft keys in the main menu of 
the PLC Programming operating mode. Within the WATCH LIST function, the 
BEGIN LINE ← and END LINE → soft keys are available.
� Theuser interface of the TRACE function and the LOGIC DIAGRAM 
function were revised:
• Editor for selecting markers in the LOGIC DIAGRAM was revised
• Soft keys BEGIN ↑, END ↓, PAGE ↑, PAGE ↓ in the TRACE function
• Soft keys START TRACE and FREEZE TRACE for starting and stopping the 
display
• Soft keys START LOGIC TRACE and STOP LOGIC TRACE for starting and 
stopping the TRACE function
1 – 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
PLC modules � In Module 9133, the voltage in mV of the buffer battery can be determined 
with code 3.
� Calling Module 9203 with <number of soft key menu> < 0 supplies the cur-
rent resource handle.
� If Modules 9246 or 9256 are used to write to a line that does not yet exist 
in a table, the file is filled with blank spaces up to the defined line. If –1 is 
given as the line number, the next empty line is used.
Module 9073 Copying a string to a byte block
Module 9073 copies a string into a byte block. The module does not check 
whether the string consists of valid ASCII characters. The module always 
copies over the entire programmed length of the byte block, regardless of any 
string-end code in the byte block.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <target byte>
PS B/W/D/K <length of the byte block>
PS B/W/D/K <string number>
CM 9073
Error detection: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 String was copied into byte block
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid target byte
2 Invalid length of the programmed byte block 
(max. 127 characters)
4 Invalid sum of target byte and length of the byte block
11 Invalid string
October 2003 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx 1 – 3
Module 9350 Read data from the tool table
Module 9350 reads the contents of a cell in the tool table with the status M. 
The value is read as an integer value.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Tool number>
PS B/W/D/K <Tool index>
≤ 0: Main entry
PS B/W/D/K <Element number>
0: Tool length L
1: Tool radius R
2: Not used
3: Replacement tool (–1 if not defined)
4: Not used
5: Maximum tool age TIME1
6: Maximum tool age for TOOL CALL TIME2
7: Current tool age CUR.TIME
8: Tool radius 2 R2
9: Oversize for tool length DL
10: Oversize for tool radius DR
11: Oversize for tool radius 2 DR2
12: Tool locked TL (0=No, 1=Yes)
13: Number of tool teeth CUT.
14: Wear tolerance in length LTOL
15: Wear tolerance in radius RTOL
16: Cutting direction DIRECT. (0=+; 1=–)
17: PLC status PLC
18: Tool offset for length TT: L-OFFS
19: Tool offset for radius TT: R-OFFS
20: Break tolerance for length LBREAK
21: Break tolerance for radius RBREAK
22: Tooth length LCUTS
23: Maximum plunge angle ANGLE
24: Tool number
25: Tool index
26: PLC value PLC-VAL
27: Probe center offset in reference axis CAL-OF1
28: Probe center offset in minor axis CAL-OF2
29: Spindle angle during calibration CAL-ANG
30: Tool type PTYP
31: Maximum speed NMAX
32: Retract tool LIFTOFF
CM 9350
PL B/W/D <Element value>
PL B/W/D <Error number>
0: No error, element value was read
1: Module was not called in a spawn job or submit job
2: File type does not exist
3: No tool table with status M
4: Line number does not exist
5: Incorrect element number
1 – 4 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Error detection: 
Module 9351 Write data to tool table
Module 9351 writes the contents of a cell in the tool table with the status M. 
The value must be given as an integer value.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Tool number>
PS B/W/D/K <Tool index>
–1: Write all indexes of a tool
PS B/W/D/K <Element number>
See Module 9350
PS B/W/D/K <Element value>
CM 9351
PL B/W/D <Error number>
0: No error, element value was written
1: Module was not called in a spawn job or submit job
2: File type does not exist
3: No tool table with status M
4: Line number does not exist
5: Incorrect element number
6: Element value is out of range
7: Error while writing to the file
Error detection: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Element value read
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 2 Incorrect element number
7 Line number does not exist
20 Module was not called in a spawn job or submit job
36 No tool table with status M
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Element value written
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 2 Incorrect element number
7 Line number does not exist
20 Module was not called in a spawn job or submit job
36 No tool table with status M
October 2003 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx 1 – 5
Miscellaneous � Cycle 232 (FACE MILLING) is used to face mill rectangular surfaces.
� Cycles 25x can be used with an inactive tool table. Q366 = 0 (PLUNGE) must 
be defined in the cycles.
� For Cycle 251 (RECTANGULAR POCKET), the error message Tool radius too 
large appears if the corner radius defined in Q220 is less than the tool 
radius.
� A new probe cycle in the Manual operating mode finds the distance between 
two points, as well as the mid-point.
� All touch probe functions in the Manual mode can also be used by manually 
touching the workpiece with the tool or other suitable devices. In place of 
the electronic trigger signal, the probing process can be initiated manually 
by pressing the actual-position-capture key.
� Rather than entering a feed rate in a traversing block, you can also enter a 
time in seconds over which the programmed block is to be traversed. The 
function is activated with the F T soft key, and is effective blockwise. For 
operating panels that also feature a rapid traverse potentiometer, the F MAXT 
soft key is also available.
� The PLANE function also features the TURN possibility for automatic posi-
tioning. As opposed to MOVE, there are no compensating movements of the 
linear axes when you tilt the rotary axes.
� Normal and tool directional vectors of LN blocks no longer need to be given 
standardized to the value 1.
� A progress indicator appears when sorting block numbers of an ISO machi-
ning program.
� The display of options upon entry of the SIK keyword was revised.
� An “autorepeat” function is in effect for the PG UP and PG DN keys, as well 
as for the PAGE ↑ and PAGE ↓ soft keys.
1.3 Hardware
There is a new, more powerful MC 422 B for the standard versions of the 
iTNC 530. With this hardware, the housing, hard disk, and SIK are all supplied 
separately.
Properties of the MC 422 B:
� Pentium III with 800 MHz
� 128 MB RAM
� 133 MHz bus frequency
� HDR removable hard disk
� SIK with NC software license
� X133 omitted, X131 reserved
The basic version of the iTNC 530 will still be supplied with the MC 422.
1 – 6 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Housing with main 
computer
Main computer 
(standard version)
Signal inputs Id. Nr. of MC for 
BF 120 display unit
Id. Nr. of MC for 
BF 150 display unit
MC 422 B
Without position encoder 
inputs (for CC 424)
– – 387 173-0x
5 position encoder inputs Position: 1 VPP/EnDat 387 171-0x 387 181-0x
10 position encoder 
inputs
387 172-0x 387 189-0x
MC 422 (basic version)
5 position encoder inputs Position: 1 VPP/EnDat 367 224-0x 367 225-0x
MC 422 B (with Windows 2000)
Without position encoder 
inputs (for CC 424)
– – 387 175-0x
5 position encoder inputs Position: 1 VPP/EnDat – 387 183-0x
10 position encoder 
inputs
– 387 191-0x
October 2003 Hardware 1 – 7
HDR removable 
hard disk
SIK with NC soft-
ware license
HDR hard disk for iTNC 530 Id. Nr.
Export version 387 546-51
Standard version 387 546-01
Export version with Windows 2000 387 545-51
Standard version with Windows 2000 387 545-01
SIK with NC software license Id. Nr.
Export version with 4 or 7 control loops 389 764-51
Standard version with 4 or 7 control loops 389 764-01
Export version with 5 or 8 control loops 389 764-52
Standard version with 5 or 8 control loops 389 764-02
Export version with 6 or 9 control loops 389 764-53
Standard version with 6 or 9 control loops 389 764-03
Export version with Windows 2000 with 4 or 7 control loops 389 769-51
Standard version with Windows 2000 with 4 or 7 control loops 389 769-01
Export version with Windows 2000 with 5 or 8 control loops 389 769-52
Standard version with Windows 2000 with 5 or 8 control loops 389769-02
Export version with Windows 2000 with 6 or 9 control loops 389 769-53
Standard version with Windows 2000 with 6 or 9 control loops 389 769-03
1 – 8 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1 Update Information No. 8
1.1 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx
Several descriptions from Updates 7 and 8 were revised.
� MP4043 and MP4044 are new: 
If all PLC outputs are switched off (e.g., during PLC program compilation or 
due to a PLC run-time error), the outputs that can be switched off by an 
emergency stop can be switched off delayed by 250 ms. The 24-V supply 
may not be shut off in an emergency stop. 
MP4043 Outputs O0 to O15 
Input: %xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 
Bits 0 to 15 correspond to O0 to O15 
0: Do not switch off output with delay 
1: Switch off output with delay 
MP4044 Outputs O16 to O23 
Input: %xxxxxxxx 
Bits 0 to 7 correspond to O16 to O23 
0: Do not switch off output with delay 
1: Switch off output with delay
Module 9140 Set axis-specific feed-rate limit
With Module 9140 you can set axis-specific feed-rate limits. The limits are 
saved in sequential double words for each axis. The address of the starting 
double word must be given. Along with a feed-rate value (≥ 0), the following 
limitations are possible in the double words: 
� –1: Maximum feed rate
� –2: Axis-specific rapid traverse from MP1010.x
� –3: Axis-specific manual feed rate from MP1020.x
Invalid feed-rate values are set to 0 and M4203, other axes retain their limits.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Start double word>
PS B/W/D/K <Number of axes or double words>
CM 9140
NC software Export version Release
340 422-07 340 423-07 August 2003
340 480-07 340 481-07 August 2003
NC software Export version Release
340 422-06 340 423-06 June 2003
340 480-06 340 481-06 June 2003
October 2003 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx 1 – 1
Error detection: 
Module 9141 Read the axis-specific feed-rate limit
With Module 9141 you can read axis-specific feed-rate limits. The limits are 
saved in sequential double words for each axis. Along with feed-rate values 
(≥ 0), the limitations –1, –2 or –3 (see Module 9140) are also transferred.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Start double word>
PS B/W/D/K <Number of axes or double words>
CM 9140
Error detection: 
1.2 Hardware
A new variant of the MC 422 (standard and basic versions) was released:
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Feed-rate limit is set
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid feed-rate value (< –3)
2 Invalid number of axes or double words
3 Invalid block length as of starting address
5 No double word address
24 Module was called in a spawn job or submit job
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Feed-rate limit is set
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 2 Invalid number of axes or double words
3 Invalid block length as of starting address
5 No double word address
24 Module was called in a spawn job or submit job
Variant Changes in MC 422 (standard and basic versions)
xxx xxx-y2 Main computer revised
1 – 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1 Update Information No. 9
1.1 Releases
The following versions of the NC software were released:
� NC software 340 420-11 and 340 421-11 November 2003
� NC software 340 422-08 and 340 423-08 October 2003
� NC software 340 480-08 and 340 481-08 October 2003
� NC software 340 422-09 and 340 423-09 November 2003
� NC software 340 480-09 and 340 481-09 November 2003
1.2 NC Software 340 420-xx
NC software 340 420-11 contains all of the functions of NC software 
340 422-09. In the standard setting, datum management via preset tables is 
deactivated.
1.3 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx
Configuring the 
axes and spindle
� For the MC 422B, measurement of the CPU temperature via Module 9133 
is not possible for the time being.
Machine interfacing � If a service pack is installed, a corresponding information box appears during 
the Power interrupted message. In OEM.SYS you can use the keyword 
LOGOSP = to define the complete path of a specific logo that then appears 
instead of this information. The same conditions apply for the logo as for the 
standard logo.
NC software Export version Release
340 420-11 340 421-11 November 2003
NC software Export version Release
340 422-08 340 423-08 October 2003
340 480-08 340 481-08 October 2003
NC software Export version Release
340 422-09 340 423-09 November 2003
340 480-09 340 481-09 November 2003
December 2003 Releases 1 – 1
Machine 
parameters
� MP4043, MP4044 and MP4045 have been removed.
� MP4060.x is new: 
If all PLC outputs are switched off (e.g., during PLC program compilation or 
due to a PLC run-time error), the outputs defined in MP4060.x are switched 
off delayed by the time defined in MP4061.x. The delay only affects outputs 
that cannot be switched off by emergency stop, since for the outputs that 
can be shut off by an emergency stop, the 24-V supply is shut off 
immediately. 
Input: 0 to 30 
–1: Do not switch off output with delay
� MP4061.x is new: 
Time period is defined by which the switch-off of the outputs defined in 
MP4060.x is to be delayed. 
Input: 0 to 5.000 [s]
� MP7230.x has been expanded: 
In MP7230.0 and MP7230.3, the conversational language of the MC 422B 
(with BF 150) can be set to Chinese by using input value 15.
� MP7621 is new: Reserved, enter 0.
� MP7640.x has been expanded: 
The HR 420 is activated with input value 11.
� MP7641 has been expanded: 
Bit 1 – Stepped rotation of HR 420 
0: Without detent positions 
1: With detent positions 
Bit 2 – Axis direction keys and rapid traverse on the HR 420 
0: Controlled by the NC 
1: Controlled by the PLC 
Bit 3 – NC start / NC stop on the HR 420 
0: Controlled by the NC 
1: Controlled by the PLC
Configuring the 
axes and spindle
� During the automatic test of the motor brakes the sum of MP1110.x and 
MP2232.x applies to standstill monitoring.
� Non-linear axis-error compensation has been improved:
• Dependencies between the axes 1 to 14 can be defined.
• The maximum possible number of lines is 360.
• The spacing of the compensation points can be defined as desired 
(±999.9999).
• If another *.COM file is to be used for the negative direction of traverse, 
the file name must end with the character "–". 
Example: Entry in the *.CMA file: Axis_X. The compensation value table 
Axis_X.COM is used. If the compensation value table Axis_X–.COM 
exists, it will be used for the negative traverse direction.
1 – 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Machine interfacing � The diagnostic functions are no longer optional and can thus be used at any 
time.
� The diagnostic functions have been expanded:
• After pressing the (Motor) I soft key, general information on control 
hardware and drive hardware appears. Use the ↑ and ↑ soft keys to 
select a control loop and to display detailed information.
• The EnDat SPEED soft key is used to display the information of absolute 
speed encoders with EnDat interface.
• The EnDat POSITION soft key is used to display the information of 
absolute position encoders with EnDat interface.
• The MOTOR DATA soft key is used to display the motor data from the 
motor table.
• The (Motor) ID LABEL soft key is used to display the electronic ID label 
of HEIDENHAIN QSY synchronous motors with absolute speed 
encoder.
• The (Power module) ID LABEL soft key is used to display the electronic 
ID label of HEIDENHAIN UM 1xxD power modules.
• The (Motor) TEST soft key is available after you have entered the code 
number 688379 and before you have acknowledged the Power 
interrupted message. After pressing the soft key, the Power 
interrupted message can be acknowledged and the drives can be 
switched on. The START TEST soft key is used to start an automatic test 
of the motor and inverter functions.
� The acknowledgment of an error message is recorded in the log with the 
entry INFO: MAIN ERRCLEARED <Date> <Time> as well as the error number 
and error message.
� The following markers were introduced for the HR 420:
• M4660: HR 420 assumes control
• M4661: NC start on HR 420
• M4662:NC stop on HR 420
• M4663: Rapid traverse key on HR 420
• M4664: Spindle start on HR 420
• M4665: Spindle stop on HR 420
• M4666: + key on HR 420
• M4667: – key on HR 420
• M4668: Ctrl key on HR 420
� The marker M4057 is set during a touch probe cycle and reset when the 
touch probe cycle is canceled. To support the marker, FN17: SYSWRITE ID990 
NR2 was expanded:
• 0.0: Touch probe monitoring off. M4057 is not used.
• 1.0: Touch probe monitoring on. M4057 is not used.
• 2.0: Touch probe monitoring off. M4057 is used.
• 3.0: Touch probe monitoring on. M4057 is used.
December 2003 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx 1 – 3
PLC programming � The number of strings was increased from 16 to 100 (S0 to S99).
� FN17: SYSWRITE ID503 NR<line> IDX<column> is used to enter a value in the 
preset table.
� If M4753 is set, errors from PLC modules will be entered in the PLC log 
PLCDEBUG.LOG.
� There is a separate log for PLC events under PLC:\PLCDEBUG.LOG. The 
following events are entered:
• Start of the PLC after switch-on.
• Start and stop of the PLC.
• Errors from PLC modules (only if M4753 = 1).
• Run-time errors
� Symbolic operands can be used in the mask files for PLC windows.
� The Config. file for conditional compilation can be selected with the SELECT 
+ COMPILE and SELECT COMPILER CONFIG. soft keys. PLCCOMPCFG = is 
automatically entered in OEM.SYS.
� For newly supplied MC 422B, new partition sizes of the hard disk are 
supported:
Partition MC 422 B MC 422 B (with Windows 2000)
C: – 12.97 GB
TNC: 25.87 GB 12.97 GB
PLC: 948.86 MB 957.00 MB
SYS: 956.70 MB 957.00 MB
1 – 4 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
PLC modules � Module 9007 for determining the number of connected PLs (diagnostic 
information of PL 4xxB) now also supports the PL 510.
� Module 9137 (diagnostic information of the PL 510) was extended by 
information 12 (number of connected PL 510).
� Module 9221 (start PLC positioning) was extended by error code 6 (PLC 
positioning of axis already started).
Module 9084 Display PLC error messages with additional data
With Module 9084 you can display PLC error messages with additional data. 
You can insert place holders (%s, %d, %f) at any position of the error 
messages. The place holders are assigned the data from the module at run 
time. Only those place holders that are defined in the PLC error message will 
be replaced. %s is replaced by the string or the string content. The first 
occurrence of %d or %f in the PLC error message is replaced by the content 
of variable 1, and the second occurrence of %d or %f is replaced by the 
content of variable 2. %d is an integer, %f is a floating point number with three 
decimal places. Alternately, you can define the number of decimal places with 
%.1f to %.6f. If the module is called several times with the same line number 
of the *.PET table, the error message is entered only once in the queue. A 
maximum of 32 PLC error messages can be entered in the queue. If 
necessary, the error marker assigned is set. If the *.PET table or the line 
number is not found, the error message PLC ERROR <line number> appears.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Line number of the *.PET table>
0 to 999: Line number
PS B/W/D/K/S<Data for %s>
PS B/W/D/K <Data for %d or %f; variable 1>
PS B/W/D/K <Data for %d or %f; variable 2>
CM 9084
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 PLC error message with additional data displayed
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Line number not available
8 Incorrect operating mode, compatibility error marker 
set
23 Overflow of PLC error message queue
December 2003 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx 1 – 5
Module 9277 Writing data into the OEM log
With Module 9277 the PLC can write data into a specific OEM log. Up to eight 
OEM logs can be used at the same time. The module can be called from a 
cyclic PLC program or from a spawn job or submit job. The string for the log 
entry may contain two place holders (data1 and data2). Only specified place 
holders will be replaced. The output format is controlled through the entry %d 
for integers or the entry %f for floating point numbers with three decimal 
places. Alternately, you can define the number of decimal places with %.1f to 
%.6f. Example of a string for the log entry: S“data1: %.2f data2: %d“ 
If the maximum log size of 1 MB is exceeded, the log is copied to 
<name>.LOG.OLD and a new log with the same name is created. Once the 
logs have been called, they remain open until the control is shut down.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K/S<Path with file name (without extension *.LOG)>
PS B/W/D/K/S<String with place holder for log entry>
PS B/W/D/K <Value for data1>
PS B/W/D/K <Value for data2>
PS B/W/D/K <Switch for additional entries>
Bit 0 = 0/1: Entry without/with time stamp
Bit 1 = 0/1: Entry without/with PLC cycle counter
CM 9277
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Data written into OEM log
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 2 Invalid string number or invalid string
22 Message cannot be transmitted
1 – 6 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Module 9322 Information of the current NC program
With Module 9322, you can determine the current block number of the active 
NC program. If the module is called from the cyclic PLC program, only the 
block number of the NC main program is determined. If the module is called 
from a spawn job or submit job, the path of the current NC program is 
determined in addition to the block number (from the block scan).
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
Call from a cyclic PLC program: Without effect. 
Call from a spawn job or submit job:
0: String and block number refer only to the active NC main 
program. Block number from block scan.
1: String and block number refer to the active NC program 
(also subprogram, cycle or macro). Block number from block 
scan.
PS B/W/D/K <String number for path of the NC program or cycle>
Call from a cyclic PLC program: Without effect.
CM 9322
PL B/W/D <Block number of current NC program or cycle>
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Information of current NC program has been read
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid mode
2 Invalid string number
December 2003 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx 1 – 7
Other functions � With the MC 422B, improved graphic display is available.
� Four soft keys are available for setting the speed for graphic simulation in 
the Test Run mode.
� With the projection in three planes in Test Run mode, the horizontal plane 
of a section starts at the top edge of the workpiece.
� After you have pressed the MOD key in the Programming and Editing mode 
of operation, the soft key for installing the service pack will be displayed.
� If more than one PLC error message occurs, you can display a list of them 
with the ERR key.
� With Cycle 8 (MIRROR IMAGE), you can now also program rotary axes as mirror 
axes. Old TNC 4xx programs were executed correctly before, but up to now 
it was not possible to program rotary axes as mirror axes.
� If you want to copy an externally prepared tool table, you now have the 
additional possibility of overwriting only those lines in TOOL.T that do not 
contain any data. For this purpose the REPLACE ONLY EMPTY LINES soft key 
has been introduced.
� Pressing the GOTO key in a DIN/ISO program no longer results in the control 
displaying the message GOTO line xxx jumped yyy.
1.4 Hardware
1.4.1 TS 640
TS 640 touch probe
Touch-trigger probe with infrared 
transmission, for workpiece setup and 
measurement during machining.
TS 640 SE 640
 
Id. Nr. 359 575-xx 
 
Id. Nr. 377 686-xx
 
TS 640 
 
SE 640 transmitter-
receiver unit
1 – 8 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1.4.2 HR 410
There are new variants of the HR 410:
1.4.3 HR 420
As of software version 340 422-09 or 340 480-09, the following functions are 
provided:
� Switching between the HR 420 and the control operating panel. Operation 
through the control operating panel is disabled.
� Spindle-speed and feed-rate override potentiometer on the HR 420.
� Status displays onthe HR 420:
• Axis selection and display of the axis with position.
• Display of control-in-operation symbol, errors, symbol for tilted working plane.
• Display of spindle speed and feed rate.
• Display and change of infeed per rotation step.
• Setting of jog increment.
• NC start, NC stop, rapid traverse, axis movements in the positive and 
negative direction.
• Spindle start and spindle stop.
• Actual position capture in MDI mode.
• Entry and execution of M/S/F.
• Datum setting.
• Switching of operating modes.
• During an NC stop: Internal stop or manual traverse and return to positions.
HR 410 Changes
296 469-54 Revision
296 549-55 Revision
HR 420 handwheel
Portable handwheel with display 
and stepped rotation
Id. Nr. 375 239-xx HR 420 
handwheel
December 2003 Hardware 1 – 9
1 – 10 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1 Update Information No. 10
1.1 Releases
The following versions of the NC software were released:
� NC software 340 422-10 and 340 423-10 May 2004
� NC software 340 480-10 and 340 481-10 May 2004
 
The following service packs for 340 422-09 and 340 423-09 were released:
� Service pack 1: 340 500-01 and 340 501-01 December 2003
� Service pack 2: 340 500-02 and 340 501-02 March 2004
The following service packs for 340 480-09 and 340 481-09 were released:
� Service pack 1: 340 502-01 and 340 503-01 December 2003
� Service pack 2: 340 502-02 and 340 503-02 March 2004
1.2 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx
� Error messages entered more than once in the log are identified with 
Info: MAIN ERR_RECURRED.
� PLC error messages triggering an Emergency Stop are entered with the 
highest priority (independent of the priority from the *.PET table) in the error 
list. Therefore, these error messages always appear in the first position. The 
error message External EMERGENCY STOP has a lower priority, but still a 
higher priority than the top PLC priority. This means that PLC error 
messages triggering an Emergency Stop always appear in the first position 
in the error list. They are followed by External EMERGENY STOP and then by 
further PLC error messages.
� Cycle 32 (TOLERANCE) is reset depending on MP7300 (status display).
Service pack NC software Export version Release
340 500-01 340 422-09 340 423-09 December 2003
340 502-01 340 480-09 340 481-09 December 2003
Service pack NC software Export version Release
340 500-02 340 422-09 340 423-09 March 2004
340 502-02 340 480-09 340 481-09 March 2004
NC software Export version Release
340 422-10 340 423-10 May 2004
340 480-10 340 481-10 May 2004
May 2004 Releases 1 – 1
Machine 
parameters
� The PLC can change MP10 even while an NC program is running (PLC, 
RUN).
� The maximum input value for MP331.x and MP332.x has been increased to 
1.797693135E+308. Large input values cannot be read by the PLC!
� MP1096 has been expanded: 
MP1096.0 specifies the tolerance at corners at machining feed rate. This 
value can be overwritten by the machine user with Cycle 32. MP1096.1 
specifies the tolerance at corners at rapid traverse. This value cannot be 
influenced by the machine user.
� MP1522 is new: 
In addition to the nominal position value filters, MP1522 allows you to 
activate feed-rate smoothing. This smoothes jerks caused by a change in 
the feed rate. This reduces the machine’s tendency to vibrate, without 
significantly increasing the machining time. MP1522 should be approx. 
0.5 ... 1 ⋅ TMachine (TMachine = Period of resonant frequency of machine). 
Example: fMachine = 50 Hz; TMachine = (1 / 50 Hz) = 20 ms; MP1522 = 20. 
Since feed-rate smoothing results in an increase in speed at corners, the jerk 
must be adjusted (if necessary) to prevent damage to the contour. 
Input: 0 to 60 [ms]
� MP2195 has been expanded: 
Bit 0 – Handling of status signals from HEIDENHAIN power supply units 
that are already inactive during control start-up. (Signals that change 
their status during operation are always identified as errors.) 
0: Missing signals cannot be detected with Module 9066 and do not result 
in an error message when the drive is switched on. 
1: After the PLC program has been compiled, missing signals can be 
detected with Module 9066 and trigger an error message when the drive is 
switched on. Signals that are not provided by the power supply unit must be 
suppressed with MP2195 (bit 1 to bit 6), because non-existent signals are 
always identified as errors.
� The input range for MP2542.x to MP2546.x was increased to 0 to 99.0 [dB].
� The input range for MP2552.x to MP2556.x was increased to 0 to 
30000.0 [Hz].
� MP2562.x to MP2566.x were expanded: 
The filters can be used in the position or speed controller. The kV factor can 
be increased by using the filters in the position controller. After the kV factor 
has been increased up to the oscillation limit, a band-rejection filter can be 
defined for the oscillation frequency so that the kV factor can be further 
increased. 
Input: 1 = PT2 low-pass filter (speed controller) 
2 = Band-rejection filter (speed controller) 
11 = PT2 low-pass filter (position controller) 
12 = Band-rejection filter (position controller)
� The input range for MP2572.x to MP2576.x was increased to 0 to 
30000.0 [Hz].
� MP5000 was expanded: 
Input value 3 allows you to disable the serial interfaces RS-232-C/V.24 and 
RS-422/V.11.
� MP5020.3 and MP5030.3 expanded for EXT4 (PLC) operating mode.
� MP5040 was expanded: 
MP5040.0 Data transfer rate in operating mode EXT3 
MP5040.1 Data transfer rate for operating mode EXT4
� MP7230.x was expanded: 
14: Russian (with Cyrillic character set) 
15: Chinese (simplified) 
16: Chinese (traditional) 
These languages are available only with the MC 422B with BF 150.
1 – 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
� MP7363.5 is new: 
Rapid traverse movements in the programming graphics are displayed with 
the color from MP7363.5.
� MP7460.x and MP7461.x are new: Reserved, input value: 0
� MP7680 was expanded: 
Bit 15 - Suppress NC Start if the program is aborted A corresponding 
message window appears. NC Start is available after you have pressed the 
YES soft key, after program selection or after GOTO. 
0: Function inactive 
1: Function active
Configuring the 
axes and spindle
� Axes for which master-slave torque control is active can be switched to 
single-axis operation during operation by overwriting MP850.x.
� Cycle 32 (TOLERANCE) is reset depending on MP7300 (status display).
� PLC positioning is done without nominal position value filter.
� The maximum braking power from MP2390.x may be greater than the 
power limit from MP2392.x. Up until now, the maximum braking power was 
limited to the value of the power limit.
� During a powerfail the braking time before switch-off of the drives has been 
extended to 10 s.
� The motor table has been expanded for a new 2nd order I2t monitoring. 2nd 
order I2t monitoring is not needed for most of the motors. For these motors, 
the entry from the T-AC column can be transferred to the Tth2 column. In 
this case, 1st order I2t monitoring is used. 
New columns in the motor table:
• Tth1: Thermal time constant for winding [s]
• Rth1: Thermal resistance between winding and lamination [K/W]
• Tth2: Thermal time constant for lamination [s]
• Rth2: Thermal resistance between lamination and cooling system [K/W]
� A step can be output in the integrated oscilloscope only after the code 
number 688379 or 807667 has been entered.
� The integrated oscilloscope has been expanded with the following signals:
• F TCPM: Feed rate for the tool point with M128 (feed rate without 
compensation motions)
• int. diagn.: Reserved for internal purposes
� In the integrated oscilloscope, the cursor is located on the trigger point only 
if it has not been moved after the measurement. If the cursor has been 
moved, it will remain at the point of the time axis to which it has been 
moved. The cursor does not return to the trigger point until a trigger 
parameter has been changed.
� The CC 424 supports backlashcompensation via MP750.x and MP752.x.
Machine interfacing � A PLC soft key that is disabled in the soft-key project file with 
ENABLE:<Marker> appears dimmed (inactive).
� In the soft-key project file, conditional compilation with #if ... #endif and 
#ifdef ... #endif is possible.
� For test purposes, all LSV-2 telegrams can be entered in the log. After 
entering the code word LOGBOOK, this function must be enabled with the 
LSV-2 TELEGRAM OFF/ON soft key.
� Error messages entered more than once in the log are identified with 
Info: MAIN ERR_RECURRED.
May 2004 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx 1 – 3
� If M4754 is set, internal diagnostic information is entered in the log 
MYDEBUG.LOG. The marker should be set only for debugging purposes. 
Otherwise, unnecessary access to the hard disk will put a strain on the 
system.
� The speed-encoder test has been added to the diagnostic functions. This 
soft key is available after you have entered the code number 688379 and 
before you have acknowledged the Power interrupted message. After 
pressing the soft key, the Power interrupted message can be 
acknowledged and the drives can be switched on. The START TEST soft key 
is used to start an automatic test of the speed encoder.
� The display of analog signals contained in the diagnostic functions for the 
drive also shows the motor temperatures with the designation of the control 
loop.
� The following commands can be used in the print masks for the 
measurement log in the manual touch probe cycles:
• mm_display: The following values are displayed only if under MOD 
Change MM/INCH is set to MM.
• inch_display: The following values are displayed only if under MOD 
Change MM/INCH is set to INCH.
• all_display: The following values are displayed regardless of the 
setting in MM/INCH under MOD.
� If M4622 is set during the first run of the PLC program, the message 
window Waiting for M4622 appears after the reference marks have been 
traversed. The window does not disappear until you have reset M4622. In 
this way, you can delay the execution of the NC macro defined through 
RESETINIT = in the NCMACRO.SYS.
� The source of error is displayed in the new column Group of the error list (to 
be called with the ERR key).
• GENERAL
• OPERATING
• PROGRAMMING
• PLC
� PLC error messages triggering an Emergency Stop are entered with the 
highest priority (independent of the priority from the *.PET table) in the error 
list. Therefore, these error messages always appear in the first position. The 
error message External EMERGENCY STOP has a lower priority, but still a 
higher priority than the top PLC priority. This means that PLC error 
messages triggering an Emergency Stop always appear in the first position 
in the error list. They are followed by External EMERGENY STOP and then by 
further PLC error messages.
� New PLC operands:
Set Reset
M4223 Error from PET table with NC Cancel 
active
NC NC
M4227 PLC error message with priority 0 
(error)
NC NC
M4228 PLC error message with priority 1 
(warning)
NC NC
M4229 PLC error message with priority 2 
(info)
NC NC
1 – 4 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
PLC programming � The function TRACE IN-CODE will also be available on an external PC with 
PLCdesignNT.
� The search function of the TRACE function has been improved.
� In the TRACE and TABLE functions, you can use the ADD TO WATCH LIST soft 
key to transfer the selected operand into the WATCH LIST.
� In the TABLE function the symbolic name of an operand can be entered with 
GOTO.
� The WATCH LIST function has been expanded:
• The ADD TO LOGIC DIAGRAM soft key allows you to transfer the selected 
operand into the logic diagram.
• A search function is available. First the SYMBOL column and then the ADDR 
column is searched for the search string.
• The HEX ↔ DECIMAL soft key allows you to change the number 
representation.
� The following information has been added to FN18: SYSREAD ID51:
• NR6: Type of tool (PTYP)
• NR7 to NR11: Value 1 (P1) to value 5 (P5)
• NR12: Pocket reserved (RSV)
• NR13: Pocket above locked (LOCKED_ABOVE)
• NR14: Pocket below locked (LOCKED_BELOW)
• NR15: Pocket at left locked (LOCKED_LEFT)
• NR16: Pocket at right locked (LOCKED_RIGHT)
May 2004 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx 1 – 5
PLC modules � Module 9217 (pop-up window for messages) supplies error code 36 in 
W1022 if there is no ASCII file with the message text.
� A window shown with Module 9217 (pop-up window for messages) can be 
closed with Module 9261 (sending of events) through event $010000.
� Transfer parameter 2 (from MP50x0.3) has been added to Module 9100 
(assign the data interface).
Module 9179 Status information about spindle(s)
Status information about the spindles can be ascertained with Module 9179.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Number of spindle>
PS B/W/D/K <Code for status information>
0: Active spindle ("Number of spindle" is not evaluated)
CM 9179
PL B/W/D <Status information>
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Status information has been ascertained
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid code for status information
2 Invalid spindle number
1 – 6 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Module 9282 Tool usage test for pallet table
Module 9282 allows you to check the tools used in a pallet table. The pallet file 
must be selected in the Program Run, Single Block or Program Run, Full 
Sequence operating mode. The tool usage file for the pallet table and the test 
result file in ASCII format are created. The test result file contains the results 
from the comparison of the tool usage file with the tool table. 
If a pallet call is given as the line number, all subordinate machining operations 
are checked. If a program call is given, only the tool usage file of the NC 
program is checked.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Line number of the pallet table>
PS B/W/D/K/S<Name of the test result file (*.P.T.DEP)>
PS B/W/D/K/S<Name of the tool usage file (*.T.DEP)>
CM 9282
PL B/W/D <Result>
0: No error
1: Tool usage file of an NC program of the pallet table not 
available or no longer up-to-date
2: Tool life not sufficient
3: Required tool not available
4: Radius of required tool is incorrect
5: Tool is not in magazine
6: Tool usage file of an NC program of pallet table cannot be 
opened
7: Test result file could not be created
8: Test result file cannot be written to
9: Tool usage file of an NC program of pallet table cannot be 
read
10: No memory for creating the tool usage file
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Tool usage test has been performed
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 11 Invalid string programmed
20 Module was not called in a spawn job or submit job
May 2004 NC Software 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx 1 – 7
Module 9343 Compilation and activation of magazine rules
Module 9343 is used to compile and activate magazine rules (*.TCR), 
independent of the entry TCHRULES = in OEM.SYS. If the entry exists in 
OEM.SYS, the magazine rules are overwritten when Module 9343 is called. If 
an error occurs during compilation, the PLC program is stopped. The magazine 
rules must be activated during the first run of the PLC program or before the 
first call of Module 934x. 
Call:
PS B/W/D/K/S<Path and file name of the magazine rules>
CM 9343
Error recognition: 
Other functions � The TOOL USAGE TEST soft key is also available for pallet tables. If a line with 
an NC program is active, the test is performed only for the NC program in 
question. If a line with a pallet entry is active, the test is performed for the 
complete pallet table.
� If the time programmed in AUTOSTART is in the past, the error message 
Starting time has passed appears.
� The Czech conversational language has been added to the measuring logs 
of the touch probe cycles.
� Several IP addresses for the control can be defined in a table. The active IP 
address is selected with the ACTIVATE LINE soft key.
� When you insert new lines in a table, a display of progress appears if 
required.
� In the programminggraphics, the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NO. soft key allows you 
to show or hide the block numbers.
� The soft keys of the search function have been improved.
� The last defined speed for graphic simulation in the Test Run mode also 
remains in effect if the control is restarted.
� With some input functions (e.g. tool selection lists with Module 9216), the 
RETURN key can be used instead of the ENT key.
� A list of PLC operands with brief description in English and German 
(GLB_NC_de.DEF, GLB_NC_en.DEF) is contained in the control under 
PLC:\JH\.
� In the freely definable tables (e.g. *.P, *.CDT, *.TAB), English dialogs are 
shown instead of the Russian dialogs.
� M114 is effective locally in cycles, i.e. the function is canceled before the 
return to the main program. If you want M114 to also be effective in the 
main program, you must use FN17: SYSWRITE ID420 NR0 IDX0 = 0 (globally 
effective coordinate transformation).
� Rotary axes can be programmed within an “M120 sequence.”
� A maximum of eight datum shifts and six scaling factors can be shown in 
the status display. Mirrored axes are displayed in sequence one after 
another. This means that six axes can be displayed.
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Magazine rules have been compiled and activated
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 11 Invalid string programmed
20 Module was not called in a spawn job or submit job
38 Error during compilation
1 – 8 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
� When entering data in screen forms (e.g. axis selection in the oscilloscope), 
you can use the ENT key to scroll forward and the NO ENT key to scroll 
backward.
� When a touch probe cycle is called in the Manual Operation and El. 
Handwheel operating modes, and the current angles of the swivel axes do 
not coincide with those in the Tilt working plane function, the error 
message Axis angle not equal tilt angle appears. With the PROBING ROT 
cycle, this warning can be acknowledged and the cycle can be executed.
� Enter information into the log with FN38: SEND. The function is available 
after you have entered the code number 555343. 
Example:
• NC program: FN38: SEND /“Q parameter Q1: %f Q2: %f“ /+Q1 /+Q2
• Entry in the log from the Program Run, Single Block or Program Run, 
Full Sequence operating mode: 
INFO: MAIN NCEVENT <Date and time> 
Q parameter Q1: <Value Q1> Q2: <Value Q2>
• Entry in the log from the Test Run operating mode: 
INFO: MAIN NCTEVENT <Date and time> 
Q parameter Q1: <Value Q1> Q2: <Value Q2>
� A maximum of three axes can be entered in Cycle 8 (MIRRORING).
� Parameter Q208 (FEED RATE FOR RETRACTION) has been added to Cycle 22 
(ROUGH-OUT).
� Parameter Q21 (TOLERANCE) has been added to Cycle 28 (CYLINDER 
SURFACE) so that a slot with approximately parallel walls can be produced 
with a tool whose diameter must be smaller than the width of the slot. 
Traverse after machining depends on MP7420 bit 4.
� Cycle 29 (CYL. SURFACE RIDGE) allows you to machine a ridge on a cylinder 
surface.
� Cycle 39 (CYL. SURFACE CONTOUR) allows you to machine an open outside 
contour on a cylinder surface.
1.3 Additional Enhancements to NC Software 340 480-xx
� Hard disks with NC software 340 480-10 supplied by HEIDENHAIN include 
Microsoft Service Pack 4 for Windows 2000 and Microsoft Patch KB835732. 
If you already have a hard disk, you can install these expansions at any time.
� Soft keys can be selected and soft-key rows can be switched by clicking the 
mouse.
� The Log Files button has been added to the iTNC Control Panel. This button 
is reserved for HEIDENHAIN diagnostic purposes.
� The start and shut-down of the control software is recorded in a log for 
internal diagnostic purposes.
May 2004 Additional Enhancements to NC Software 340 480-xx 1 – 9
1.4 Hardware
There is the new, more powerful hardware MC 420 for the basic versions of 
the iTNC 530. With this hardware, the housing with the main computer, the 
hard disk and the SIK are all supplied separately.
Properties of the MC 420:
� Celeron with 400 MHz
� 128 MB RAM
� 100 MHz bus frequency
� HDR removable hard disk
� SIK with NC software license
� One USB interface
� Only PL 510 connectable (and not PL 410B / PL 405B)
� Maximum of 6 control loops with the CC 422
Housing with 
main computer
Main computer 
(basic version)
Signal inputs Id. Nr. of MC for 
BF 120 display unit
Id. Nr. of MC for 
BF 150 display unit
5 position encoder 
inputs
Position: 1 VPP/EnDat – 515 929-01
1 – 10 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
HDR hard disk
SIK with NC 
software license
Options
HDR hard disk for iTNC 530 Id. Nr.
Export version 387 546-51
Standard version 387 546-01
SIK with NC software license Id. Nr.
Export version with 4 control loops without software options 1 + 2 510 085-51
Standard version with 4 control loops without software options 1 + 2 510 085-01
Export version with 5 control loops without software options 1 + 2 510 085-52
Standard version with 5 control loops without software options 1 + 2 510 085-02
Export version with 6 control loops without software options 1 + 2 510 085-53
Standard version with 6 control loops without software options 1 + 2 510 085-03
Option Id. Nr.
1st additional control loop 354 540-01
2nd additional control loop 353 904-01
Software option 1 367 591-01
Software option 2 367 590-01
May 2004 Hardware 1 – 11
1 – 12 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1 Update Information No. 11
1.1 Releases
The following service pack for 340 422-10 and 340 423-10 was released:
� Service pack 1: 531 482-01 and 531 483-01 September 2004
The following service pack for 340 480-10 and 340 481-10 was released:
� Service pack 1: 531 484-01 and 531 485-01 September 2004
The following versions of the NC software were released:
� NC software 340 422-11 and 340 423-11 August 2004
� NC software 340 480-11 and 340 481-11 August 2004
� Service pack 1: 340 422-11 and 340 423-11 September 2004
� Service pack 1: 340 480-11 and 340 481-11 September 2004
� Service pack 2: 340 422-11 and 340 423-11 September 2004
� Service pack 2: 340 480-11 and 340 481-11 September 2004
1.2 NC Software 340 422-xx/340 423-xx and 340 480-xx/340 481-xx
� Under certain conditions, at the end of the cycle the machine moves to the 
center of the cylinder during execution of Cycle 28 (CYLINDER SURFACE). This 
applies to machines with rotary table and the entry PRESETTABLE = OFF in the 
OEM.SYS.
This is the first NC software to support the MC 420.
Service pack NC software Release
531 482-01 340 422-10 September 2004
531 483-01 340 423-10 September 2004
531 484-01 340 480-10 September 2004
531 485-01 340 481-10 September 2004
NC software Export version Release
340 422-11 340 423-11 August 2004
340 480-11 340 481-11 August 2004
October 2004 Releases 1 – 1
Machine 
parameters
� MP2210.x is new (only CC 424): 
Some of the asynchronous spindle motors require a high magnetizing 
current at low speeds (n < nfield weakening). This magnetizing current can, 
however, lead to thermal motor problems at the rpm for field weakening. 
MP2210.x enables you to reduce the nominal voltage (and, as a result, the 
nominal magnetizing current) at the rpm for field weakening during idle 
running. The maximum nominal voltage is reached when 
n = 3 · nfield weakening. The nominal voltage can be reduced by max. 60 % 
(MP2210.x = 60). 
Input: 0 to 99 [%] 
0: Function inactive
� MP2211.x is new (only CC 424): 
Reserved, enter 0
� MP7310 was expanded: 
Bit 5—The 3-D graphics (with representation of 5-axis machining) can also 
be deactivated with the MC 422B and MC 420. 
0: Permit 2.5-D and 3-D graphics (also depends on hardware) 
1: Permit only 2.5-D graphics (independent of hardware)
� MP7610.x is new (only CC 424): 
Reserved, enter 0
� MP7691 was expanded: 
Diagnosis functions for the HeROS operating system. Can only be evaluated 
by HEIDENHAIN. Set MP7691.x = 0.
PLC programming � If the highlight is located in the WATCH LIST in the SYMBOL column or ADDR 
column, the ORDER soft key canbe used to sort the WATCH LIST by the 
respective column. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
n
3 · nfield weakeningnfield weakening
MP2210.x
Unominal
1 – 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
PLC modules Module 9149 Set/Read commutation angle
Module 9149 enables you to determine and set the commutation angle of a 
synchronous, torque or linear motor. 
For axes that cannot be moved when switched off (e.g. due to Hirth coupling), 
Module 9149 can be used to read out the commutation angle of the position 
at shutdown. The PLC can then store it in nonvolatile memory. After restarting 
the control, you can use the module to again set the commutation angle—
which is stored in nonvolatile memory—for the axis concerned. This means 
that it is not necessary to determine the commutation angle again.
Safety precautions:
� The commutation angle may be set only after you have ensured that the 
stored commutation angle corresponds to the current position (e.g. due to 
Hirth coupling).
� The module is suitable only for synchronous, torque, or linear motors in 
conjunction with nonaligned encoders without EnDat interface.
� The module responds with a value only if the reference mark has been 
traversed.
� The commutation angle for an axis can be set only once after the control is 
switched on and before the drives are first switched on.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Axis>
PS B/W/D/K <Commutation angle in 0.001°>
1 to 720000
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
0: Read commutation angle
1: Set commutation angle
CM 9149
PL B/W/D <Error code>
0: Commutation angle set/read
1: Module was not called in a spawn job or submit job
2: Invalid mode
3: Invalid axis number
4: Invalid commutation angle
Error code from controller when mode 0 is active (read 
commutation angle):
100: Unknown reference position
Error code from controller when mode 1 is active (set 
commutation angle):
200: Invalid motor type (no synchronous or linear motor)
201: Invalid encoder type (not “non-aligned”)
202: Invalid commutation angle
203: Commutation angle already set
PL B/W/D <Commutation angle>
Danger
After the axis has moved away from the position at shutdown, the 
commutation angle is no longer valid and must no longer be used. When 
the control is shut down the next time, the commutation angle of the 
position at shutdown must be read out and stored again.
October 2004 NC Software 340 422-xx/340 423-xx and 340 480-xx/340 481-xx 1 – 3
Error recognition: 
Other functions � Cycle 247 (SET DATUM), FN25: PRESET and FN17: SYSWRITE ID530 can also be 
used during a block scan.
� The conversational language Russian with Cyrillic characters can also be set 
when the BF 120 visual display unit and the MC 422 are used.
� Two text files are stored in the directories PLC:\LANGUAGE\GERMAN\ and 
PLC:\LANGUAGE\ENGLISH\. The file jh_error.txt contains all possible error 
messages and the file jh_error_help.txt contains the corresponding help 
texts.
� The speed for graphic simulation is displayed each time a simulation is 
started in the Test Run mode.
� When touch probe cycle 0 (REFERENCE PLANE) is used in conjunction with a 
rotary axis with modulo display, the maximum length of the probing path is 
limited to the modulo value from MP810.x and the measuring point is 
always approached in the probing direction (the probe retracts in the 
direction opposite to the probing direction).
� If the HR 420 is used, the smaller of the values set for the TE or HR 420 is 
used for the spindle or feed-rate override in all modes of operation, except 
the Manual mode.
� An old value may be read when a customized FN function is used for reading 
data from the tool table. As a result, in customized measuring cycles, the 
measurement values determined were not taken into account in the 
geometry. 
1.3 Additional Enhancements to NC Software 340 480-xx/340 481-xx
� Hard disks with NC software 340 480-11 supplied by HEIDENHAIN include 
the following Microsoft Patches: KB823559, KB824105, KB823182, 
KB826232, KB828035, KB825119, KB828749, KB828741, KB837001, 
KB842526, KB841872, KB841873, KB840315, KB839645. 
If you already have a hard disk, you can install these expansions at any time.
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Commutation angle set/read
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid mode
2 Invalid axis number
20 Module was not called in a spawn job or submit job
45 Error code from controller
NC software Release
Service pack 1 for 340 422-11and 340 423-11 September 2004
Service pack 1 for 340 480-11and 340 481-11 September 2004
NC software Release
Service pack 2 for 340 422-11and 340 423-11 September 2004
Service pack 2 for 340 480-11and 340 481-11 September 2004
1 – 4 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1 Update Information No. 12
1.1 Releases
The following service packs for 340 422-11 and 340 423-11 were released:
� Service pack 3: 340 422-11 SP3 and 340 423-11 SP3 October 2004
� Service pack 5: 340 422-11 SP5 and 340 423-11 SP5 November 2004
The following service packs for 340 480-11 and 340 481-11 were released:
� Service pack 3: 340 480-11 SP3 and 340 481-11 SP3 October 2004
� Service pack 5: 340 480-11 SP5 and 340 481-11 SP5 November 2004
The following versions of the NC software were released:
� NC software 340 490-01 and 340 491-01 November 2004
� NC software 340 492-01 and 340 493-01 November 2004
1.2 NC Software 340 422-xx/340 423-xx and 340 480-xx/340 481-xx
Service pack NC software Release
340 422-11 SP3 340 422-11 October 2004
340 423-11 SP3 340 423-11 October 2004
340 480-11 SP3 340 480-11 October 2004
340 481-11 SP3 340 481-11 October 2004
Service pack NC software Release
340 422-11 SP5 340 422-11 November 2004
340 423-11 SP5 340 423-11 November 2004
340 480-11 SP5 340 480-11 November 2004
340 481-11 SP5 340 481-11 November 2004
November 2004 Releases 1 – 1
1.3 NC Software 340 490-xx/340 491-xx and 340 492-xx/340 493-xx
New options The following options are enabled by entering a code number. HEIDENHAIN 
can give you the code number after having been informed of the SIK number.
Warning
This NC software is executable only on the MC 422B and the MC 420, 
each with 128 MB of RAM. 
The BF 120 (resolution: 640 x 480 pixels) is no longer supported.
Option Description ID number
#18 Access to control functions via the COM component 
(HEIDENHAIN DNC)
526 451-01
#41 Enabling of additional dialog languages (please 
contact HEIDENHAIN if you require additional dialog 
languages)
530 184-01
#53 Feature Content Level, see page – 20 529 969-01
1 – 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Notes on the 
software exchange
When updating the NC software from 340 422-xx to 340 490-01, keep the 
following points in mind (the same applies to the dual-processor control and to 
export versions):
� The machine parameters of the nominal position value filters (MP1094 to 
MP1099.x) were restructured and shifted to MP12xx. See page 1–3. If you 
overwrite the PLC values of the nominal position value filters, the PLC 
program must be adapted to the new machine parameters. The old nominal 
position value filters (MP1094 to MP1099) can be reactivated by entering 
MPMODE = 340422 in the OEM.SYS file. MP12xx then have no effect. 
� The kinematics can now be configured only via kinematics tables. Machine 
parameters MP7500, MP7510.x, MP7520.x, MP7530.x and MP7550.x were 
removed.
� No special adaptations to the PLC program are required for working with the 
new smarT.NC operating mode. If smarT.NC is active, marker M4163 
(smarT.NC active) is set.
� For NC software versions up to 340 422-xx there is an internal connection 
between the feed-rate and rapid-traverse overrides. For example, if the 
value of the feed-rate override was manipulated via the PLC, this also had 
an effect on the rapid traverse. This connection was removed starting with 
NC software 340 490-01. 
In contrast to NC software 340 422-xx, a manipulation of W766 (% factor for 
feed-rate override) does not affect rapid traverse movements. Word W752 
(rapid traverse potentiometer) is also effective ifbit 5 is not set in MP7620.
� If you want to keep an existing OEM cycle project during software 
exchange, you must first adapt the project. The reason is that because it is 
now possible to freely assign file names of parameters, new file names 
were defined for some standard parameters. Proceed as follows:
• Download and install the current CycleDesign software version 4.0.260 
from the HEIDENHAIN FileBase
• Open the existing CycleDesign project with the current CycleDesign 
version 4.0.260
• Menu item File > Change variant... 
• In the New variant pull-down menu, select the entry 34049001 and 
confirm with OK
• Confirm also the subsequent Update Information with OK
• Menu item File > Save
• Then transfer the file to the control or generate an installation and check 
its functions.
Note
You might have to make changes to your PLC program.
Warning
Without this procedure, after a software update to the version 340 49x the 
error message “Key nonfunctional” will appear when you press the CYCL 
DEF key
November 2004 NC Software 340 490-xx/340 491-xx and 340 492-xx/340 493-xx 1 – 3
Machine 
parameters
� MP12 is new: 
NC axes can be switched axis-specifically into demo mode with MP12. The 
demo mode enables the simulation of axis motors that are not present on 
the machine. This permits you to put into operation and test axes that have 
not yet been mounted on the machine. The PLC program of the machine 
might need to be adapted. 
Input: Bits 0 to 13 represent axes 1 to 14 
0: Demo mode not active 
1: Demo mode active
� The control is not restarted if MP210 (direction of the encoder signals of the 
position encoder) is changed. The axis must be moved over the reference 
mark again after this change.
� MP709.x is new: 
MP709.x is used to influence the output of the backlash compensation 
(MP710.x). 
Input: 0: Previous behavior of MP710.x 
1 to 1000: Time constant [ms]
� MP1094 to MP1099 were shifted: 
The machine parameters of the nominal position value filters were 
restructured, expanded and set to MP12xx. The filters are now selected 
with MP1200 / MP1201. 
The limit frequencies are set for each filter separately via MP1210 to 
MP1213. The previous nominal position value filters MP1094 to MP1099.xx 
can be reactivated with the MPMODE = 340422 entry in the OEM.SYS file. 
MP12xx then have no effect. 
Other improvements / changes:
• New “advanced HSC filter” introduced.
• An optimum limit frequency is automatically calculated for roughing (can 
be only programmed with Cycle 32) for both HSC filters. MP1212 
functions as a maximum limit frequency.
• For single and double filters the minimum filter orders (previously 
MP1099.x) were replaced by maximum limit frequencies (now MP1210 
and MP1211).
Nominal value
MP710.x
Reversal point
Nominal value
MP709.x: Large input value
MP709.x: Small input value
MP709.x = 0
1 – 4 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
� MP1391 was changed: 
MP1391.0 Velocity feedforward control in the Manual and Handwheel modes 
of operation 
Input: Bits 0 to 13 represent axes 1 to 14 
0: Operation with following error (lag) 
1: Operation with velocity feedforward control 
MP1391.1 Acceleration feedforward control in the Manual and Handwheel 
modes of operation 
Input: Bits 0 to 13 represent axes 1 to 14 
0: Acceleration feedforward control inactive 
1: Acceleration feedforward control active 
New 
MP
Old 
MP
Function Possible input value
1200 Selection of the filter type 0 = Single filter 
1 = Double filter 
2 = HSC filter 
3 = Advanced HSC filter
1201 1095.1 Nominal position value filter in manual 
operation
0 = Single filter 
1 = Double filter
 
1202.0 
1202.1
 
1096.0 
1096.1
Tolerance for contour transitions at corners 
With machining feed rate 
With rapid traverse
 
0.0000 to 3.0000 [mm] 
0.0000 to 3.0000 [mm]
1210 1099.0 Limit frequency for single filter 0.0 to 166.0 [Hz]
1211 1099.1 Limit frequency for double filter 0.0 to 166.0 [Hz]
1212 1094 Limit frequency for HSC filter 0.0 to 166.0 [Hz]
1213 Limit frequency for advanced HSC filter 0.0 to 166.0 [Hz]
1222 HSC filter: Tolerance for curvature changes 0 = Do not include the tolerance 
1 = Include the tolerance
1223 Advanced HSC filter: Tolerance for curvature 
changes
0 = Do not include the tolerance 
1 = Include the tolerance
1230.x 1097.x Max. permissible axis-specific jerk for single 
filter
0.1 to 1000.0 [m/s3]
1231.x 1098.x Max. permissible axis-specific jerk for double 
filter
0.1 to 1000.0 [m/s3]
1232.x 1098.x Max. permissible axis-specific jerk for HSC 
filter
0.1 to 1000.0 [m/s3]
1233.x Max. permissible axis-specific jerk for 
advanced HSC filter
0.1 to 1000.0 [m/s3]
1240.x 1097.x Max. permissible axis-specific jerk at curvature 
changes for single filter
0.1 to 1000.0 [m/s3]
1241.x 1098.x Max. permissible axis-specific jerk at curvature 
changes for double filter
0.1 to 1000.0 [m/s3]
1242.x 1097.x Max. permissible axis-specific jerk at curvature 
changes for HSC filter
0.1 to 1000.0 [m/s3]
1243.x Max. permissible axis-specific jerk at curvature 
changes for advanced HSC filter
0.1 to 1000.0 [m/s3]
November 2004 NC Software 340 490-xx/340 491-xx and 340 492-xx/340 493-xx 1 – 5
� MP2210.x is new (only CC 424): 
Some of the asynchronous spindle motors require a high magnetizing 
current at low speeds (n < nfield weakening). This magnetizing current can, 
however, lead to thermal motor problems at the rpm for field weakening. 
MP2210.x enables you to reduce the nominal voltage (and, as a result, the 
nominal magnetizing current) at the rpm for field weakening during idle 
running. The maximum nominal voltage is reached when 
n = 3 · nfield weakening. The nominal voltage can be reduced by max. 60 % 
(MP2210.x = 60). 
Input: 0 to 99 [%] 
0: Function inactive
� MP2254.x was expanded (only CC 424): 
A new mode (MP2254.x = 3) for determining the field angle was introduced 
for the CC 424. The new mode behaves like MP2254.x = 2, but the drive 
must no longer be switched on by the PLC. The drive moves immediately 
after the FIELD ORIENT soft key is pressed. This mode can be used if:
• There are no brakes, or
• The brakes are always open in the Commissioning Current Controller 
mode of operation, or
• The user ensures that the brakes can be opened manually or with the 
PLC.
n
3 · nfield weakeningnfield weakening
MP2210.x
Unominal
Danger
Hanging axes require a 100% compensation for weight. Please contact 
HEIDENHAIN if this is not the case.
Warning
The drive begins turning immediately after the FIELD ORIENT soft key is 
pressed. 
The traverse path of the drive is approximately two pole pairs. 
Limit switches are ignored! 
If axes move into an illegal area, press the emergency stop button!
1 – 6 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
� MP2260.x is new (only CC 424): Reserved, do not make any entries.
� MP7266.x was expanded: 
MP7266.34 to 
MP7266.36 Value for PLC (P1 to P3) 
MP7266.37 Reserved 
MP7266.38 Point angle (T-ANGLE) 
MP7266.39 Thread pitch (PITCH)
� MP7310 was expanded: 
Bit 5—The 3-D graphics (with representation of 5-axis machining) can also 
be deactivated with the MC 422B and MC 420. 
0: Permit 2.5-D and 3-D graphics (also depends on hardware) 
1: Permit only 2.5-D graphics (independent of hardware) 
Bit 6: Reserved
� MP7312 is new: 
MP7312 is used to speed up the graphic simulation of the 3-D graphics (with 
display of 5-axis machining) in the Test Run mode. If no value is entered for 
the tool tooth length in the LCUTS column of the tool table, an infinitely long 
tooth length is assumed. 
MP7312 limits the tooth length if no value was given for the tooth length in 
the tool table, or if the tool was defined in the NC program. 
Input: = 0: No limitation, infinitely long tooth length 
> 0: Tooth length = 2 · tool radius · MP7312 
The smaller the entered factor is, the faster the graphic simulation of the 3-D 
graphics runs. Useful values range from 10 to 20.
� MP7356.x was removed, MP7371.x is new: 
Color setting forstatus window and PLC window: 
MP7371.0: $0ECECEC Background 
MP7371.1: $0FFFFFFF Background elements 
MP7371.2: $00000FF Color elements 
MP7371.3: $00000FF Color positions
� MP7360.x was expanded: 
Color settings for 3-D graphics (with display of 5-axis machining) 
The first tool shown in the 3-D graphics is assigned the color defined in 
MP7360.8; the second tool receives the color defined in MP7360.9, etc. The 
ninth tool starts at MP7360.8 again 
MP7360.7 $0CC1919 Cutting plane 
MP7360.8: $06666CC Tool 1 
MP7360.9: $066CC66 Tool 2 
MP7360.10: $06666CC Tool 3 
MP7360.11: $066CC66 Tool 4 
MP7360.12: $0CC6666 Tool 5 
MP7360.13: $0CC66CC Tool 6 
MP7360.14: $066CCCC Tool 7 
MP7360.15: $066CC19 Tool 8
November 2004 NC Software 340 490-xx/340 491-xx and 340 492-xx/340 493-xx 1 – 7
� MP7375.x is new: 
Color settings for the new smarT.NC operating mode: 
MP7375.0: $0E8E8E8 Background: Forms 
MP7375.1: $0C0C0C0 Background: Unselected tabs 
MP7375.2: $0FFFFFF Background: Treeview and input fields 
MP7375.3: $0D0D0D0 Background: Inactive input field 
MP7375.4: $0D2D2D2 Background: Help graphics 
MP7375.5: $00022FF Cursor: Treeview and background of 
current field 
MP7375.6: $0A0E0FF Cursor: Treeview if the form is the focus 
MP7375.7: $0000000 Text color: Inactive input field 
MP7375.8: $0FFFFFF Text color: Active input field 
MP7375.9: $00000FF Text color: Radio buttons 
MP7375.10:$0A0A0A0 Text color: Inactive label 
MP7375.11:$0FF0000 Background: Radio and check buttons, 
mouseover 
MP7375.12:$000FF00 Global data PREDEF: Background 
MP7375.13:$0000000 Global data PREDEF: Text 
MP7375.14:$0FF0000 Global data changed: Background 
MP7375.15:$0000000 Global data changed: Text 
MP7375.16:$0FFFFC0 Tooltip: Background 
MP7365.17:$0000000 Tooltip: Text 
MP7375.18:$0FF0000 Dialog box title: Background 
MP7365.19:$0000000 Dialog box title: Text 
MP7375.20:$000FA00 Pattern generator: Points of the same 
height 
MP7375.21:$00000C8 Pattern generator: Currently active points 
MP7375.22:$0800000 Pattern generator: Deleted points 
MP7375.23:$0FF6432 Pattern generator: Hidden points 
MP7375.24:$07B342D Pattern generator: Rectangle for zoom
� MP7411 was changed: 
Only the values 0 and 1 can be entered in MP7411 (tool data in touch probe 
block). Bit 1 was removed. This simplifies the touch probe management for 
the machine user. 
0: Use the calibrated data of the touch probe 
1: Use the current tool data from the last TOOL CALL
� MP7500, MP7510.x, MP7520.x, MP7530.x and MP7550.x were removed. 
The kinematics can now only be configured with kinematics tables.
1 – 8 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
� MP7610.x is new (only CC 424): 
MP7610.x defines control loops as single-speed or double-speed with the 
bit codes: 
MP7610.0 first drive control board 
MP7610.1 second drive control board 
In order to remain compatible to older, permanently assigned settings, the 
two machine parameters have the following preassigned settings: 
MP7610.0: %1100 
MP7610.1: %1111 
This results in limitations for the usability of the PWM outputs. 
For the first controller PCB:
For the second controller PCB:
� MP7684 was changed: 
Bit 4 – Now only functions with M114. 
Bit 5, bit 6 – No function: All compensating motions are taken into 
consideration for the advance speed reduction at corners with M128. 
MP7610.0 Control-loop speed: Active PWM outputs
Bit 0 0 = Single-speed X51 / X53
1 = Double-speed X51 / X53 not active
Bit 1 0 = Single-speed X52 / X54
1 = Double-speed X52 / X54 not active
Bit 2 0 = Single-speed X55
1 = Double-speed X55
Bit 3 0 = Single-speed X56
1 = Double-speed X56
MP7610.1 Control-loop speed: Active PWM outputs
Bit 0 0 = Single-speed X57
1 = Double-speed X57
Bit 1 0 = Single-speed X58
1 = Double-speed X58
Bit 2 0 = Single-speed X59
1 = Double-speed X59
Bit 3 0 = Single-speed X60
1 = Double-speed X60
November 2004 NC Software 340 490-xx/340 491-xx and 340 492-xx/340 493-xx 1 – 9
Configuring the 
axes and spindle
� A kinematics description can consist of up to 25 transformations (lines in the 
kinematics table).
� Using the TNCscopeNT computer software it is possible to capture online 
the oscilloscope data for up to 16 channels.
� New table of power stages introduced (INVERTER.INV): 
The column S (switch position of current sensor) does not yet have a 
function. The function of the Switch pos. of the current sensor column 
will be available starting with the release of NC software 340 490-02. 
Columns in the power stages table:
• NAME: Designation of the power stage
• PWM: PWM frequency [Hz]
• S: Switch position of the current sensor
• I-MAX: Peak current [A]
• I-N: Rated current [A]
• U-IMAX:Voltage of the current sensor [V]
• U-N-DC:Rated current for DC [A]
• T-DC: Thermal time constant DC [s]
• F-DC: Transition frequency to T-DC [Hz]
• T-AC: Thermal time constant AC [s]
• F-AC: Transition frequency to T-AC [Hz]
• T-IGBT:Protection time of the IGBTs [µs]
Machine interfacing � The ID number of the controller software is entered in the log.
� In the Editing machine parameters operating mode, system files (*.SYS) 
can be opened and changed. For example, in OEM.SYS the number of axes 
present (PWMPARAMETER = , AXISNUMBER = ) can be changed, and adapted to 
the existing machine parameter file.
� If the new smarT.NC operating mode is active, marker M4163 is set. In this 
case, the value 8 is in W272 (operating mode).
� For freely definable tables, the predefined column type Time / Date is 
possible. The column type is specified with X and the WIDTH field determines 
how many characters of the current time are automatically transferred into 
the file. The field is updated each time the table is write-accessed, and has 
the following format: “hh:mm:ss dd.mm.yyyy” 
At present, this feature for write access is realized from the PLC. Write 
access from NC programs (FN function) is available as of the NC software 
340 490-02.
� If marker M4056 is set, the control tries to keep the TS 640 touch probe at 
ready notice. If this is not possible, positioning motions in the Manual and 
Handwheel modes of operation are interrupted with the 
Probe system not ready error message. After acknowledging the error 
message with CE, the touch probe can be freely traversed for 60 seconds 
in the Manual mode of operation. Then the error message is displayed again. 
� Machine parameters MP2420.x and MP2430.x can be changed through the 
PLC.
Warning
Touch-probe monitoring for the TS 640 is not active as long as the 
touch probe does not report that it is ready.
1 – 10 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
PLC programming � If the PLC Programming mode of operation is activated with write-protection 
with code number 807667 (and if a different code number was defined in 
OEM.SYS via PLCPASSWORD =), then the WATCH LIST soft key is available.
� If the highlight is located in the WATCH LIST in the SYMBOL or ADDR column, the 
ORDER soft key can be used to sort the WATCH LIST by the respective column.
� New function: I/O-FORCE LIST 
Independently of the currently running PLC program and the status of the 
hardware, the PLC inputs and outputs can be influenced via the I/O-FORCE 
LIST. The inputs and outputs can be selected in the TABLE and in the 
WATCH LIST with the ADD TO I/O-FORCE LIST soft key. A message confirms 
the addition to the I/O-FORCE LIST. Added inputs and outputs can no longer 
be changed in the TABLE with the SET and RESET soft keys. The green error 
message I/O-Force is active is output in the PLC Programming mode of 
operation if the FORCE LIST is active. Also, the affected inputs and outputs 
are color-coded in the TABLE.
� If the control is being operated as a programming station (MP7210 = 1 or 2), 
this status is displayed in the PLC Programming mode of operation.
� The available memory in the PLC partition (PLC:\) is shown in kilobytes in the 
PLC programming mode of operation. The PLC partition is also checked to 
see if there are at least 10 MB of memory available. If theavailable memory 
is less than 10 MB, the PLC partition: Not enough memory error message 
is output.
� In the cycles for tool measurement, the PLC program may command a gear 
shift during output of the spindle speed without interrupting the cycle.
� Marker M4186 is new: 
M4186 is set if an NC program is started in the Test Run operating mode.
� PLC modules 9158, 9164, 9165 and 9166 now support 14 axes. The number 
of axes had been limited to 12.
� Before the PLC program is converted, the symbols of the PLC soft-key 
project are converted automatically. No conflicts arise, because the PLC 
program and the soft-key project use the same symbol information.
PLC modules � Module 9035 (Reading the status information) expanded: 
If the code 100 is given in the call of Module 9035, the number of the tool 
axis can be determined. The tool axis can also be determined with markers 
M4526 to M4534, but only up to the 9th axis. Tool axes with greater 
numbers can be determined only via Module 9035.
� Module 9171(Oriented spindle stop) expanded: 
Incremental spindle positioning movements can be processed with Module 
9171 (direction of rotation: 5).
� Module 9221 (Starting a PLC positioning movement) expanded: 
The PLC positioning of NC axes with Module 9221 is now also possible for 
the 10th to 14th axes. Active PLC positioning movements can be stopped 
with the new Module 9224, see page – 16.
Danger
The I/O-FORCE LIST can overrule safety-relevant monitoring 
operations in the PLC program! 
Make sure that hanging axes are supported!
November 2004 NC Software 340 490-xx/340 491-xx and 340 492-xx/340 493-xx 1 – 11
Module 9045 Reading the 3-D ROT data
Module 9045 reads the 3-D ROT data (swivel angle, axes, and operating mode) 
and saves them in words and double words. 
The swivel angles are saved in three successive double words beginning with 
the specified target address (format: 0.0001°). The swivel axes are saved in 
bit-encoded format in the next word. The operating mode active for swiveling 
is saved in bit-encoded format in the word after that. 
� The given target address must be a double-word address.
� You must be able to write to four sequential double words at the given 
target address.
The following data are output as words and double words:
� D[n+0]: Swivel angle A
� D[n+4]: Swivel angle B
� D[n+8]: Swivel angle C
� W[n+12]: Bit-encoded swiveled axes: 
Bits 0 to 2 correspond to axes A to C
� W[n+14]: Bit-encoded: 
Bit 0 = Swiveling active in Program Run operating mode 
Bit 1 = Swiveling active in Manual operating mode
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Target address double-word number [n]>
CM 9045
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 3-D ROT data read
1 3-D ROT data not read
1 – 12 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Module 9149 Set/Read commutation angle
Module 9149 enables you to determine and set the commutation angle of a 
synchronous, torque or linear motor. 
For axes that cannot be moved when switched off (e.g. due to Hirth coupling), 
Module 9149 can be used to read out the commutation angle of the position 
at shutdown. The PLC can then store it in nonvolatile memory. After restarting 
the control, you can use the module to again set the commutation angle—
which is stored in nonvolatile memory—for the axis concerned. This means 
that it is not necessary to determine the commutation angle again.
Safety precautions:
� The commutation angle may be set only after you have ensured that the 
stored commutation angle corresponds to the current position (e.g. due to 
Hirth coupling).
� The module is suitable only for synchronous, torque, or linear motors in 
conjunction with nonaligned encoders without EnDat interface.
� The module responds with a value only if the reference mark has been 
traversed.
� The commutation angle for an axis can be set only once after the control is 
switched on and before the drives are first switched on.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Axis>
PS B/W/D/K <Commutation angle in 0.001°>
1 to 720000
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
0: Read commutation angle
1: Set commutation angle
CM 9149
PL B/W/D <Error code>
0: Commutation angle set/read
1: Module was not called in a spawn job or submit job
2: Invalid mode
3: Invalid axis number
4: Invalid commutation angle
Error code from controller when mode 0 is active (read 
commutation angle):
100: Unknown reference position
Error code from controller when mode 1 is active (set 
commutation angle):
200: Invalid motor type (no synchronous or linear motor)
201: Invalid encoder type (not “non-aligned”)
202: Invalid commutation angle
203: Commutation angle already set
PL B/W/D <Commutation angle>
Danger
After the axis has moved away from the position at shutdown, the 
commutation angle is no longer valid and must no longer be used. When 
the control is shut down the next time, the commutation angle of the 
position at shutdown must be read out and stored again.
November 2004 NC Software 340 490-xx/340 491-xx and 340 492-xx/340 493-xx 1 – 13
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Commutation angle set/read
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid mode
2 Invalid axis number
20 Module was not called in a spawn job or submit job
45 Error code from controller
1 – 14 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Module 9170 Finding the current torque
With Module 9170 you can determine the averaged, maximum and minimum 
torque of a drive. The determined torque value depends on the PLC cycle 
time.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Axis>
0 to 13 and 15: Axes 1 to 14 and the spindle
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
0: Torque value in tenths of per cent of the nominal torque
CM 9170
PL B/W/D <Determined torque value>
PL B/W/D <Maximum torque value>
PL B/W/D <Minimum torque value>
Error recognition: 
Module 9222 Status request of PLC positioning movement (module 
expanded)
With Module 9222 you can interrogate the status of a PLC positioning 
movement. 
The status of an axis, or now also bit-encoded for all axes, can be interrogated. 
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Axis>
Interrogation of an axis:
0 to 13 represent axes 1 to 14 
Interrogation of all axes: 
–1: Target position reached 
–2: PLC positioning was started 
–3: Cancel PLC positioning 
–4: Limit switch 
–5: PLC positioning not possible
CM 9222
PL B/W/D <Status>
Interrogation of an axis: 
1: Target position reached 
2: PLC positioning was started 
3: Cancel PLC positioning 
4: Limit switch 
5: PLC positioning not possible 
Interrogation of all axes: 
Status request of PLC positioning movement bit-encoded 
Marker Value Meaning
M4230 0 Torque value determined
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid mode
2 Invalid axis number
November 2004 NC Software 340 490-xx/340 491-xx and 340 492-xx/340 493-xx 1 – 15
Module 9224 Stop PLC positioning movements
Individual PLC positioning movements can be stopped with Module 9224.
� If M4120 to M4128 are already set, they are reset.
� It is still possible to stop PLC positioning movements by resetting markers 
M4120 to M4128.
� Positioning movements of axes 10 to 14 can be stopped only with this 
module.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Axis>
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
Reserved: 0 transferred
CM 9224
PL B/W/D <Error>
0: Positioning is canceled
1: Invalid axis was programmed
2: This axis is not positioned by the PLC
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 PLC positioning was stopped
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 2 Invalid axis (invalid axis number, auxiliary axis, or 
uncontrolled axis)
9 Axis is not positioned by the PLC
1 – 16 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Other functions � New alternate mode of operation introduced: smarT.NC
� Cycle 240 (CENTERING) is used to create center bore holes.
� Number of Q parameters increased to 2000:
• Q200 to Q1399, reserved for HEIDENHAIN cycles
• Q1400 to Q1499, reserved for OEM cycles (CALL-active)
• Q1500 to Q1599, reserved for OEM cycles (DEF-active)
• Q1600 to Q1999 can be freely used by the machinist
� Mid-program startup of NC programs is possible with M128. The 
compensating motions of the axes are activated, ifnecessary, after the 
machine status has been restored, so that the compensating motions are 
superimposed over traverse motions of the axes.
� The “SYS:\” partition of the iTNC 530 was increased from 1 GB to 2 GB. This 
makes it possible to store multiple NC software versions in compressed 
form on the control. This results in the following new partition sizes, 
available on newly delivered iTNC hard drives, see page – 23:
� New dialog language: Slovenian 
The language can be activated with MP7230.x = 17, but must first be 
enabled via option #41.
� M150 is used to suppress the error message for the current positioning block.
� The maximum number of tool types in the magazine rules (tooltype) was 
increased from 9 to 20.
� The input range for the LBL, CALL LBL, FN9, FN10, FN11 and FN12 commands 
was expanded. 
The number of available label numbers was increased to 1000 (LBL 0 to LBL 
999). In addition, you can now also assign names as labels (e.g. 
LBL “Contour”). The number of label names that can be used is unlimited. 
They are in addition to the 1000 available label numbers.
� New fields in the status display: The current time and the active spindle (S1 
or S2) are displayed.
� The graphic simulation in the Test Run can be stopped with the STOP soft 
key even within a cycle or a contour pocket. If the current line in the program 
is not changed, press the START soft key to continue working from the point 
of interruption.
� The touchpad of the TE 530 / TE 530B can be connected to the USB port on 
the MC 42x(B). The touchpad can be used for soft keys and smarT.NC dialog 
fields.
� PLANE function expanded:
• PLANE EULER: 
Rot. angle of main coord. plane expanded from 0° to 180° to –180° 
to +180°.
• The normal vector for PLANE VECTOR does not need to be entered in 
standardized form. The iTNC calculates the standardization itself. 
Input range: –99.9999999 to +99.9999999
Partition iTNC 530 iTNC 530 with Windows 2000
C: – 13 GB
TNC: 25 GB 13 GB
PLC: 1 GB 1 GB
SYS: 2 GB 1 GB
November 2004 NC Software 340 490-xx/340 491-xx and 340 492-xx/340 493-xx 1 – 17
� Enter points in the FADE column of the point tables (*.PNT) to hide them from 
machining (the “hide block” function in Program Run must be activated).
� The SPEC FCT key on the TE 530B is supported: 
The new SPEC FCT (special function) key makes it easier to access special 
functions (e.g. PLANE or FUNCTION TCPM).
� A progress bar is shown when searching through longer NC programs. In 
addition, the user is presented with a soft key for interrupting the search.
� In CYCL CALL PATTERN either the coordinate of the highest pattern point or 
the defined 2nd set-up clearance is traversed to (whichever of the two is 
higher).
� If the IP addresses for the network settings are entered in the ADDRESS 
column separated by commas, the commas are replaced by periods when 
the field is exited.
� If no tool table is selected, the file TNC:\TOOL.T is automatically loaded 
when starting a simulation in the Test Run operating mode. A tool table must 
be available during a test run with the new smarT.NC operating mode.
� If a soft key that is defined in a soft-key resource is pressed, the entry is 
made under the keyword SOFTKEY-IDENT: in the log.
� The following new columns were added to the tool table:
• P1, P2, P3: Freely definable 
Input: –99999.9999 to +99999.9999
• T-ANGLE: Point angle for centering and drilling tools
• PITCH: Reserved
• KINEMATIK: Reserved
� The TYPE column of the tool table was increased to 10 input possibilities, and 
expanded by the following elements:
• BOR: Boring tool
• BCKBOR: Back-boring tool
• CENT: NC spot drill / center drill
• CSINK: Countersinking tool
• DRILL: Drilling tool
• MILL_R: Rough cutter
• MILL_F: Finishing cutter
• MILL_RF: Rough and finishing cutter
• MILL_FD: Floor finishing cutter
• MILL_FS: Side finishing cutter
• MILL_FACE: Face-milling cutter
• REAM: Reamer
• TAP: Tapping tool
• GF: Thread miller
• GSF: Thread miller with chamfer
• EP: Thread miller for single threads
• WSP: Thread miller with indexable insert
• BGF: Thriller
• ZBGF: Circular thread miller
• TSINK: Piloted counterbore 
1 – 18 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
� The following possibilities exist for entering the feed rate:
• Milling tools: Feed rate per tooth (Fz) in millimeters or inches. The iTNC 
calculates the value for the feed rate F as follows: 
F = Fz · “number of teeth” · rpm
• Drilling tools: Feed rate per revolution (Fu) in millimeters per revolution 
or inches per revolution. The iTNC calculates the value for the feed rate 
F as follows: 
F = Fu · rpm
November 2004 NC Software 340 490-xx/340 491-xx and 340 492-xx/340 493-xx 1 – 19
1.3.1 Feature Content Level
Until now, each new NC software version contained error fixes as well as 
expanded functions. Users who wanted only the NC software update to 
eliminate the errors often felt bothered by the expanded functions. For this 
reason, error fixes and expanded functions will now be managed separately. 
If a new NC software is later loaded onto a machine with NC software 
340 490-01, then as the default setting only the error fixes contained will be 
effective. The expanded functions will at first remain inactive. The expanded 
functions can then be enabled by entering a code number. HEIDENHAIN can 
give you the code number after having been informed of the SIK number and 
NC software version.
� The “feature content level” is defined in the SIK under option #53. 
� The first time a control is switched on with the new NC software, if no 
feature content level is set in the SIK, a note appears asking to confirm the 
installed NC software as the initial version, or if another software version is 
to be installed.
� After pressing the MOD key, the feature content level is displayed in 
addition to the software versions.
� The feature content level is incremented with each new version of the NC 
software.
The feature content level is set 
in the SIK:
� Automatically after 100 
restarts 
� By entering the code number 
“0” under option #53
1 – 20 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1.4 Additional Enhancements to NC Software 340 492-xx and 340 493-xx
PLC modules Module 9315 Bringing a Windows window to the front or minimizing it
Module 9315 is used on the iTNC 530 with Windows 2000 and on the 
programming station to bring the window of a Windows application from the 
PLC to the foreground and make it active, or to minimize it. In the module call 
you enter the title of the window that is to be brought to the foreground. 
Uppercase and lowercase are ignored in the given window title, as well as any 
leading or trailing blank spaces. 
In order to bring a Windows application to the foreground, the user-specific 
Windows system parameter “ForegroundLockTimeout” must be set to 0 
(default: 200000). Otherwise the activation of the window is signaled only by 
a blinking of its icon in the task bar. The system parameter is automatically set 
by a program in the Startup folder for the iTNC 530 with Windows 2000. The 
system parameter is not automatically changed on the programming station. 
Here there are two shortcuts in the Start menu, with which the parameter can 
be set to 0 (ON) or the default value 200000 (OFF).
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
0: Bring window to the foreground 
1: Minimize window
PS B/W/D/K/S<Window title>
CM 9315
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Windows window activated / minimized
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid mode programmed
2 Window with this title does not exist
3 Invalid PLC string address was programmed
11 Invalid string programmed for window title
20 Call was not in a submit or spawn job
52 Single-processor control, switch-over not possible
November 2004Additional Enhancements to NC Software 340 492-xx and 340 493-xx 1 – 21
Module 9316 Status interrogation of a Windows window
The current status of a Windows window can be interrogated with Module 
9316. 
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
0:Window status
PS B/W/D/K/S<Window title>
CM 9316
PL B/W/D <Window status>
Bit 0: Window in foreground
Bit 1: Window minimized
Error recognition: 
Module 9317 Determining a Windows window title
Module 9317 is used to determine the title of the Windows window in the 
foreground at the time of the request.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
0: Title of the Windows window in the foreground
PS B/W/D/K <PLC string address for window title>
CM 9317
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Windows window status determined
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid mode programmed
2 Window with this title does not exist
3 Invalid PLC string address was programmed
11 Invalid string programmed for window title
20 Call was not in a submit or spawn job
52 Single-processor control, status interrogation not 
possible
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Windows window title determined
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid mode programmed
3 Invalid PLC string address was programmed
20 Call was not in a submit or spawn job
52 Single-processor control, title interrogation not 
possible
1 – 22 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1.5 Hardware 
1.5.1 TE 530B
1.5.2 HDR Hard Disk
TE 530B TNC operating panel with 
touchpad 
 
With function keys for the new smarT.NC 
operating mode, as well as the new 
SPEC FCT key for calling special TNC 
functions. 
 
The IV and V keys are snap-ons, and can be 
switched.
 
Id. Nr. 519 441-11
 
TE 530B
HDR hard disk for iTNC 530 Id. Nr.
340 490-xx: Standard version 524 571-01
340 491-xx: Export version 524 571-51
340 492-xx: Standard version with Windows 
2000
524 572-01
340 493-xx: Export version with Windows 2000 524 572-51
November 2004 Hardware 1 – 23
1 – 24 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1 Update Information No. 13
1.1 Releases
The following versions of the NC software were released:
� NC software 340 422-12 and 340 423-12 December 2004
� NC software 340 480-12 and 340 481-12 December 2004
1.2 NC Software 340 422-xx/340 423-xx and 340 480-xx/340 481-xx
Machine 
parameters
� MP709.x is new: 
MP709.x is used to influence the output of the backlash compensation 
(MP710.x). 
Input: 0: Previous behavior of MP710.x 
1 to 1000: Time constant [ms]
Nominal value
MP710.x
Reversal point
Nominal value
MP709.x: Large input value
MP709.x: Small input value
MP709.x = 0
December 2004 Releases 1 – 1
� MP2172 is new: 
If the control triggers an EMERGENCY STOP (i.e. via PLC or movement 
monitoring), the presently assigned delay time of 3 seconds for the SH1 
signal (inverter enabling) may not be sufficient for decelerating the spindle. 
On controls with CC 42x, MP2172 now enables you to set any time 
between 1 second and 6 seconds as the delay time. 
Input: 0: Previous delay time of 3 seconds 
1 to 6: Delay time in seconds (whole numbers)
PLC modules � The PLC modules 9158, 9164, 9165 and 9166 now support 14 axes. The 
number of axes had been limited to 12.
Other functions � PLANE functions expanded: 
PLANE EULER: 
Rot. angle of main coord. plane expanded from 0° to 180° to –180° to 
+180°. This enables you to program all directions in space.
1.3 Additional Enhancements to NC Software 340 480-xx/340 481-xx
� Hard disks with Microsoft Windows 2000 and NC software 340 480-12 or 
340 481-12 supplied by HEIDENHAIN include Microsoft Patches KB841533, 
KB840987, KB841356, KB834707, KB819696, KB839643, KB814078.
� The following changes were made to the Microsoft Windows 2000 
installation: 
- Automatic Windows updates were deactivated. 
- The energy saver for the screen was deactivated. 
- The Microsoft Java Virtual Machine (MSJVM) was removed.
� If you already have a hard disk, you can install these expansions and settings 
at any time.
1 – 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1.4 New Hardware 
1.4.1 New Versions of the CC 424
The configurable double-speed control loops of the CC 424 controller unit 
allow you to increase the controller performance. This enables you, for 
example, to achieve an excellent workpiece surface quality.
Double-speed control loops are needed particularly for linear drives in order to 
achieve proper speed/position control factors required by high-efficiency 
mechanical systems.
High-speed spindle motors requiring PWM frequencies greater than 5 kHz 
with short current controller cycle times can be operated only with double-
speed control loops.
A maximum of 4 double-speed control loops can be configured on the CC 424 
with 8 control loops, and a maximum of 8 double-speed control loops on the 
CC 424 with 12 control loops. 
Please note that the maximum number of available control loops may be 
reduced through the configuration of double-speed control loops. See 
“Setting the Controller Performance in MP 7610.x” on page 10.
1.4.2 CC 424 with 8 Control Loops
CC 424 controller unit with 8 control loops 
 
The product program now also includes a 
CC 424 controller unit for up to 8 control 
loops.
It is equipped with: 
- 8 PWM outputs 
- 8 speed encoder inputs 
- 8 position encoder inputs
This CC can be used as of NC software: 
- 340 490-01 
- 340 491-01 
- 340 492-01 
- 340 493-01
 
Id. Nr. 521 755-01
 
CC 424 
8 control loops
December 2004 New Hardware 1 – 3
1.4.3 CC 424 with 12 Control Loops
CC 424 controller unit with 12 control loops 
 
The product program now also includes a 
CC 424 controller unit for up to 12 control 
loops.
It is equipped with: 
- 12 PWM outputs 
- 12 speed encoder inputs 
- 12 position encoder inputs
This CC can be used as of NC software: 
- 340 490-01 
- 340 491-01 
- 340 492-01 
- 340 493-01
 
Id. Nr. 533 569-01
 
CC 424 
12 control loops
1 – 4 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1.4.4 Connection Overview
MC 422B and CC 424 with max. 8 control loops
Warning
Do not engage or disengage any connecting elements while the unit is 
under power!
X201 to X208 Position encoders 
 
X15 to X20 Speed encoders 
X80, X81 Speed encoders 
 
X51 to X58 PWM output 
 
X8, X9 Nominal value output, analog 
X12 TS touch trigger probe 
X13 TT 130 touch trigger probe 
 
X23 Handwheel 
X26 Ethernet data interface 
X27 RS-232-C/V.24 data interface 
X28 RS-422/V.11 data interface 
X127 RS-232-C/V.24 (only for Windows 2000) 
X128 RS-422/V.11 (only for Windows 2000) 
X141, X142 USB interface 
 
X30 24 V reference signal for spindle 
X34 24 V for "control-is-ready" 
output 
X41 PLC output 
X42 PLC input 
X44 24 V PLC supply voltage 
 
X45 Keyboard unit 
X46 Machine operating panel 
X47 PLC expansion 
X48 PLC analog input 
X149 BF 150 monitor
 
X131 Reserved 
 
X69 Power supply 
 
X121, X125, X165 Reserved 
 
X74 5-V power supply 
X150 Axis-specific drive release 
 
B Signal ground 
 
Equipment ground (YL/GN)
X150 at bottom of housing
���������
�������	
���������
��� ���
���
�	
��	
�
�	
	�	
�
��
���
���
���
��	 ���
���
�	
�
�	
�
�	
�
�	
�
December 2004 New Hardware 1 – 5
MC 422B and CC 424 with max. 12 control loops
Warning
Do not engage or disengage any connecting elements while the unit is 
under power!
X201 to X206 Position encoders 
X209 to X214 Position encoders 
 
X15 to X20 Speed encoders 
X82 to X87 Speed encoders 
 
X51 to X56 PWM output 
X59 to X64 PWM output 
 
X8, X9 Nominal value output, analog 
X12 TS touch trigger probe 
X13 TT 130 touch trigger probe 
 
X23 Handwheel 
X26 Ethernet data interface 
X27 RS-232-C/V.24 data interface 
X28 RS-422/V.11 data interface 
X127 RS-232-C/V.24 (only for Windows 2000) 
X128 RS-422/V.11 (only for Windows 2000) 
X141, X142 USB interface 
 
X30 24 V reference signal for spindle 
X34 24 V for "control-is-ready" 
output 
X41 PLC output 
X42 PLC input 
X44 24 V PLC supply voltage 
 
X45 Keyboard unit 
X46 Machine operating panel 
X47 PLC expansion 
X48 PLC analog input 
X149 BF 150 monitor
 
X131 Reserved 
 
X69, X169 Power supply 
 
X121, X125, X165 Reserved 
 
X74 5-V power supply 
X150, X151 Axis-specific drive release 
 
B Signal ground 
 
Equipment ground (YL/GN)
X150, X151 at bottom of 
housing
����������������	
���������
��� ���
���
�	
��	
�
�	
	�	
�
��	
���
���
��� ���
����
��	
���
�	
�
�	
�
�	
�
�	�
�	��
�	��
��� ���
������
������
��	���
��
�	��
�	�	
1 – 6 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1.4.5 Dimensions
CC 424 for max. 8 control loops
December 2004 New Hardware 1 – 7
CC 424 for max. 12 control loops
1 – 8 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1.4.6 Prerequisites for Operation
The CC 424 with 8 or 12 control loops is only supported as of software 
versions 
� 340 490-xx
� 340 491-xx
� 340 492-xx
� 340 493-xx
 
This NC software is, however, only executable on the MC 422B and the MC 
420, each with at least 128 MB of RAM.
1.4.7 Machine Parameters
Since the hardware program has been expanded from 6 or 10 control loops to 
8 or 12 control loops for the CC 424, please keep the following settings of 
MP7610.x in mind:
� MP7610.x was expanded (only CC 424): 
MP7610.x defines control loops as single-speed or double-speed with the 
bit codes: 
MP7610.0 first drive control board 
MP7610.1 second drive control board 
In order to remain compatible to older, permanently assigned settings, the 
two machine parameters have the following preassigned settings: 
MP7610.0: %1100 
MP7610.1: %1111
December 2004 New Hardware 1 – 9
1.4.8 Setting the Controller Performance in MP 7610.x
Configuration of MP 7610.x for the CC 424 versions
Bit 6 ctrl. loops 8 ctrl. loops 10 ctrl. 
loops
12 ctrl. 
loops
 Value 
No.
0 
(SS)
1 
(DS)
0 
(SS)
1 
(DS)
0 
(SS)
1 
(DS)
0 
(SS)
1 
(DS)
Bits of MP 7610.0 for 1st drive control board (= number of DSP)
0 X51 
X53
X51 X51 
X53
X51 X51 
X53
X51 X51 
X53
X51
1 X52 
X54
X52 X52 
X54
X52 X52 
X54
X52 X52 
X54
X52
2 X55 X55 X55 
X57
X55 X55 X55 X55 X55
3 X56 X56 X56 
X58
X56 X56 X56 X56 X56
Bits of MP 7610.1 for 2nd drive control board (= number of DSP)
0 X57 X57 X59 
X61
X59
1 X58 X58 X60 
X62
X60
2 X59 X59 X63 X63
3 X60 X60 X64 X64
No. of 
axes 
(standard)
6 6 10 10
No. of 
axes 
(maximum)
6 8 10 12
1 – 10 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1 Update Information No. 14
1.1 Overview
1.1.1 Released Service Packs
The following service packs were released for 340 422-12 and 340 423-12:
� Service pack 1: 340 422-12 SP1 and 340 423-12 SP1 January 2005
� Service pack 2: 340 422-12 SP2 and 340 423-12 SP2 March 2005
� Service pack 3: 340 422-12 SP3 and 340 423-12 SP3 April 2005
The following service packs were released for 340 480-12 and 340 481-12:
� Service pack 1: 340 480-12 SP1 and 340 481-12 SP1 January 2005
� Service pack 2: 340 480-12 SP2 and 340 481-12 SP2 March 2005
� Service pack 3: 340 480-12 SP3 and 340 481-12 SP3 April 2005
The following service packs were released for 340 490-01 and 340 491-01:
� Service pack 1: 340 490-01 SP1 and 340 491-01 SP1 March 2005
� Service pack 2: 340 490-01 SP2 and 340 491-01 SP2 June 2005
The following service packs were released for 340 492-01 and 340 493-01:
� Service pack 1: 340 492-01 SP1 and 340 493-01 SP1 March 2005
� Service pack 2: 340 490-01 SP2 and 340 491-01 SP2 June 2005
1.1.2 Released NC Software
The following versions of the NC software were released:
� NC software 340 490-02 and 340 491-02 July 2005
� NC software 340 492-02 and 340 493-02 July 2005
September 2005 Overview 1 – 1
1.2 NC Software 340 422-xx/340 423-xx and 340 480-xx/340 481-xx
Important notes With the introduction of the diagnosable UM 1xxD power modules, the rated 
current and maximum current of some power modules were increased. The 
MOTOR.AMP table for power modules was therefore expanded by the new 
types of power modules. The increased currents were unfortunately not 
considered. This means that the current NC software versions contain a 
MOTOR.AMP to which the new types, but not the correct currents, were 
added. This applies to the power modules listed below: 
� UM 112D (Id. Nr. 519 971-xx)
� UM 122D (Id. Nr. 519 972-xx)
� UM 113D (Id. Nr. 518 703-xx)
� UM 114D (Id. Nr. 510 509-xx)
If such a power module is operated with the “old” MOTOR.AMP, this may 
result in reduced surface quality of the workpiece.
Starting with service pack 3, the NC software already includes the updated 
MOTOR.AMP. This software, as well as the updated MOTOR.AMP, can be 
downloaded from the HEIDENHAIN Filebase (NC-INFO). 
After updating, check the settings of the affected control loops.
Please also check any user-defined MOTOR.AMP on the PLC partition, which 
is preferably used by the control, but cannot be updated during installation of 
a service pack. 
Service packs The following service packs have been released:
Service pack 1 NC software Release
340 422-12 SP1 340 422-12 January 2005
340 423-12 SP1 340 423-12 January 2005
340 480-12 SP1 340 480-12 January 2005
340 481-12 SP1 340 481-12 January 2005
Service pack 2 NC software Release
340 422-12 SP2 340 422-12 March 2005
340 423-12 SP2 340 423-12 March 2005
340 480-12 SP2 340 480-12 March 2005
340 481-12 SP2 340 481-12 March 2005
Service pack 3 NC software Release
340 422-12 SP3 340 422-12 April 2005
340 423-12 SP3 340 423-12 April 2005
340 480-12 SP3 340 480-12 April 2005
340 481-12 SP3 340 481-12 April 2005
1 – 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1.3 NC Software 340 490-01/340 491-01 and 340 492-01/340 493-01
1.3.1 Important Notes
With the introduction of the diagnosable UM 1xxD power modules, the rated 
current and maximum current of some power modules were increased. The 
MOTOR.AMP table for power modules was therefore expanded by the new 
types of power modules. The increased currents were unfortunately not 
considered. This means that the current NC software versions contain a 
MOTOR.AMP to which the new types, but not the correct currents, were 
added. This applies to the power modules listed below: 
� UM 112D (Id. Nr. 519 971-xx)
� UM 122D (Id. Nr. 519 972-xx)
� UM 113D (Id. Nr. 518 703-xx)
� UM 114D (Id. Nr. 510 509-xx)
If such a power module is operated with the “old” MOTOR.AMP, this may 
result in reduced surface quality of the workpiece.
Starting with service pack 1, the NC software already includes the updated 
MOTOR.AMP. This software, as well as the updated MOTOR.AMP, can be 
downloaded from the HEIDENHAIN Filebase (NC-INFO). 
After updating, check the settings of the affected control loops.
Please also check any user-defined MOTOR.AMP on the PLC partition, which 
is preferably used by the control, but cannot be updated during installation of 
a service pack. 
1.3.2 Service Packs
The following service packs have been released:
Warning
This NC software is executable only on the MC 422B and the MC 420, 
each with 128 MB of RAM. 
The BF 120 (resolution: 640 x 480 pixels) is no longer supported.
Service pack NC software Release
340 490-01 SP1 340 490-01 March 2005
340 491-01 SP1 340 491-01 March 2005
340 492-01 SP1 340 492-01 March 2005
340 493-01 SP1 340 493-01 March 2005
Service pack NC software Release
340 490-01 SP2 340 490-01 June 2005
340 491-01 SP2 340 491-01 June 2005
340 492-01 SP2 340 492-01 June 2005
340 493-01 SP2 340 493-01 June 2005
September 2005 NC Software 340 490-01/340 491-01 and 340 492-01/340 493-01 1 – 3
1.4 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02
1.4.1 Important Notes
Upgrade functions 
(Feature Content 
Level)
Until now, each new NC software version contained error fixes as well as 
expanded functions. Users who wanted only the NC software update to 
eliminate the errors often felt bothered by the expanded functions. For this 
reason, error fixes and expanded functions will now be handled separately 
within the software.
If a new NC software is later loaded as an update onto a machine with 
NC software 340 490-01, then as the default setting only the error fixes 
contained will be effective. The upgrade functions will at first remain inactive 
(see “New options and upgrade functions” on page 1 – 6). The upgrade 
functions can then be enabled by entering a code number. HEIDENHAIN can 
give youthe code number after having been informed of the SIK number and 
NC software version.
� The upgrade functions are defined as “feature content level” (FCL) in the 
SIK under option #53. 
� The first time an NC software with upgrade functionality is installed on a 
control (i.e. no FCL has been set in the SIK), then the entire scope of 
functions can be used (including the upgrade functions.). 
The FCL is then automatically set after 100 restarts, or by entry of the code 
number 0 under option #53, and all upgrade functions belonging to this 
software version are enabled as well. 
A note appears asking to confirm the installed NC software as the initial 
version, or if another initial software version is to be installed. 
� If the FCL has already been set in the SIK of a control, then after an update 
(e.g. from software 340 490-02 to -03), the new upgrade functions of the 
newer software version can only be used after entry of a code number from 
HEIDENHAIN.
� After pressing the MOD key, the current status of the FCL is displayed in 
addition to the software versions.
� The FCL is incremented with each new version of the NC software.
� If the upgrade functions are enabled via the FCL for a software version, 
then all upgrade functions of this software version and all its predecessors 
are available. For example, if the FCL for version 340 490-03 is set, then all 
upgrade functions from version 340 490-02 are also available immediately.
1 – 4 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
� If a newer software version, e.g. 340 490-06, is simply loaded onto a control, 
then the already existing upgrade functions remain available, but the 
upgrade functions of the newer version cannot be used. They must be 
enabled by entering a new code number.
Executability of 
SW 340 49x-02
Warning
This NC software is executable only on the MC 422B and the MC 420, 
each with 128 MB of RAM. 
The BF 120 (resolution: 640 x 480 pixels) is no longer supported.
September 2005 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02 1 – 5
1.4.2 Description of the New Functions
New options and 
upgrade functions
The following options are enabled by entering a code number. HEIDENHAIN 
can give you the code number after having been informed of the SIK number.
Option Description ID number
#40 DCM – Dynamic Collision Monitoring: Collision 
monitoring via definitions of collision bodies within 
the kinematics description.
526 452-01
#41 Additional Languages 
Slovenian is now available as an additional dialog 
language.
530 184-01
#42 DXF Converter: Conversion of DXF files generated 
using CAD software for inclusion in plain-language 
NC programs.
526 450-01
#53 Upgrade functions as Feature Content Level (FCL), 
see page – 4
529 969-01
Plain-language programming functions:
� Cycle 441: Global touch-probe parameters: 
Cycle for global setting of touch-probe parameters
� CAD point filter (offline): Point filter for smoothing 
NC programs externally created from CAD data
� 3-D line graphics: Display of the traverse motions 
as three-dimensional line graphics
� Virtual tool axis: Manual traverse in the active tool 
axis system (at program interruption)
smarT.NC functions:
� Coordinate transformation: Units 7, 8, 10 and 11 
for coordinate transformation
� PLANE function: Unit 140, Tilting the Working 
Plane
� Contour-pocket depth: A separate depth can be 
assigned to each subcontour
� Graphic block scan: Block-scan with graphic 
support and re-entry at any location within a hole 
pattern
Miscellaneous:
� Expanded USB functionality (USB 1.1): USB 
devices which use the VFAT or ISO 9660 file 
system are detected and connected automatically
� DHCP and DNS: Network connection of the iTNC 
via DHCP and DNS
1 – 6 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Update to 
SW 340 490-02
Update of 340 422-xx and 340 480-xx
Please note that there were already significant changes in the update from the 
software versions named above to version 340 490-01 (e.g., machine 
parameters, kinematics, etc.) This is also of importance for a successful 
update to version 340 490-02. Therefore, before updating to version 
340 490-02, please also read Update Information No. 12.
Updating from 340 422-12 and 340 490-01 (iTNC 530 without Windows)
The set-up files for the software update to 340 490-02 are no longer available 
in the previous format. Rather, the update is performed with the setup.omf 
and setup.zip files mentioned above. Therefore, please pay attention to the 
new procedure for updates. 
The NC software versions 340 422-12 and 340 490-01 already support 
updating with the new file format and the new dialog-guided process. To 
install version 340 490-02, proceed as follows:
� Either on a network drive connected to the control, or on the TNC partition, 
create a directory with the name “340490_002” (e.g. TNC:\340490_002\...). 
Please pay attention to the naming convention of <Id.Nr.>_<Ver> with a 
6-digit ID number and a 3-digit version number.
� Copy the update files (setup.omf and setup.zip) into this directory.
� Open the dialog box for file selection with Programming and Editing > MOD 
> Code Number 95148 > MOD > UPDATE DATA > iTNC <- NCV (new: LOAD ZIP) 
� Select the directory or drive in which the created update directory is located 
(in the example above your must select “TNC:\”)
� The iTNC recognizes directories containing setup files, and offers them in 
the Files window. For example, 340490.002 (DIR).
� Select the software version and follow the instructions on the screen.
Updating from 340 480-xx and 340 492-01 (iTNC 530 with Windows)
Follow the normal procedure for installation on the iTNC 530 with Windows.
Machine 
parameters
� Form entry of MPs expanded 
The following functions are possible for entry in forms (e.g., for MP1054):
• Exponential calculation with the ‘^’ character 
Example: MP1054.1:REF*0.1e^6+15 
(REF in 0.0001 [mm])
• Entry of ‘x’ instead of ‘REF’ (shorter)
Note
Please note that when using the TNCremoNT computer software from 
HEIDENHAIN to transfer the software to the iTNC, the files with the 
extensions *.zip and *.omf are transmitted in binary format.
Note
If you want to update to version 340 490-02 from a version earlier than 
340 422-12, you must first update the control to at least version 340 422-12 
and then follow the procedure described above.
September 2005 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02 1 – 7
� New CC424: MP1160 – LIFTOFF during power failure 
With MP1160 you can specify how far the tool is to retract from the contour 
using the LIFTOFF function in case of a power failure (DSP error). 
(MP1160 also exists on the CC422, but has no function) 
Input: 0.0000 to 1.0000 [mm] 
Default: 0.0000 [mm]
� New: MP1250.x – Axis-specific jerk at corners during rapid traverse 
In the Machine Parameters 1250.x you can axis-specifically enter a factor for 
the jerk at corners (MP 123x.x) for rapid traverse. 
At transitions between rapid traverse motions, the jerk set in MP123x.x 
multiplied by this factor is active. 
Useful settings for this factor can be determined as follows. 
MP1250.x = MP1202.1 / MP1202.0 
Input: 0.0000 to +30.0000 
1: Previous behavior
� New: MP1262 and MP1263 – Minimum filter order 
In order to optimize the LIFTOFF function when the machine is operating 
with the HSC filter, it has been made possible to shorten the reaction time 
for this. 
A high filter order has the advantage of good filtering. The disadvantage is a 
longer reaction time. This is very important for the LIFTOFF function, since 
if the power fails, for example, then the milling procedure must be 
concluded as quickly as possible by retracting the tool. If the time required 
for this is too long, the filter order can be reduced. 
As a rule, the default setting of 31 in Machine Parameters 1262 and 1263 is 
sufficient, and the previous behavior is maintained. In addition, values less 
than 15 are automatically considered to be 15. 
If the filterorder is changed, the filter characteristics change, meaning that 
this reduction of the filter order makes it necessary to check the settings for 
the filter limit frequency (MP 121x): 
- MP1262 (filter order for HSC filter) >= 1.1 / (MP1212 * interpolator cycle 
time) 
- MP1263 (filter order for “advanced HSC filter” ) >= 0.67 / (MP1213 * 
interpolator cycle time) 
Input: 0 to 31 [filter order] 
31: Previous behavior
� New: MP1290 – Maximum angle tolerance for DCM 
(in combination with option #40) 
In connection with DCM (Dynamic Collision Monitoring), the machine 
manufacturer must enter a default maximum permissible angle tolerance via 
MP1290 (usually 0.1°). This MP is considered with active collision 
monitoring in combination with active M128 and rotary axis filter (Cycle 32 
with Angle Tolerance). An angle tolerance programmed with Cycle 32 is 
then limited to this value, i.e. the maximum effective angle tolerance is the 
value from MP1290. If DCM is switched off (via soft key or by switching to 
kinematics without collision-object definitions), the value programmed in 
Cycle 32 is in effect again. 
This is necessary, since DCM cannot yet take into account active angle 
tolerances when the machine is in motion. 
The angle entered in MP1290, in combination with the machine kinematics, 
is the basis for the allowance defined in MP1292 for collision-object 
calculations by the control. 
Input: 0.0000 to 3.0000 [°] 
Default: 3 [°]
1 – 8 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
� New: MP1292 – Manual allowance for DCM 
(in combination with option #40) 
For the DCM collision monitoring you enter here the necessary oversizes for 
the collision bodies with active DCM and active separate rotary axis filter 
(M128 or TCPM function and Cycle 32 with angle tolerance). 
Input: 0 to 1000 [mm] 
Default: 0 [mm] 
The following should be considered for the oversizes:
• For the rotary axes, such as a rotary table, assume the largest possible 
radius during rotation (usually the table radius), or for a swivel head the 
distance from the tool tip (longest tool) to the most distant point of the 
swivel head.
• Use this information to calculate the non-considered offset of the rotary 
axis. Do so by using the maximum angle tolerance entered in MP1290 
to calculate the offset in the following manner: 
Example: Swivel head 
With maximum tool length: 200 mm, head length: 480 mm, 
angle tolerance: MP1290: 0.1 [°] 
soffset = r · sin (MP1290) 
soffset = 680 mm · sin (0.1°) 
soffset = 1.19 mm 
Since the oversize entered in MP1292 is added to each length of the 
bodies in the calculation, the oversize to be entered in MP1292 must be 
halved: 
MP1292 = soffset / 2 
MP1292 = 1.19 / 2 
MP1292 = 1 mm (rounded up from 0.595 mm) 
 
Since the resolution in MP1292 must be entered as an integer value in 
millimeters, the values input must be rounded up.
� New: MP2172 
MP2712 can be used to delay the switch-off of the SH1 signal (inverter 
release) by one to six seconds after an internal emergency stop has been 
triggered (DSP error). It makes additional braking time available in 
exceptional cases. 
Input: 0 to 6 [s] as an integer 
0: Previous default of 3 s
Note
Please note that when operating with multiple rotary axes, the offsets can 
summate, and so you must add the oversizes together. 
Example: 
OversizeTilting table = 0.595 [mm] 
OversizeRotary table = 0.396 [mm] 
MP1292 = 1 mm (rounded up from 0.991 mm)
September 2005 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02 1 – 9
� New CC 424: MP2260.x – TRC (Torque Ripple Compensation) 
Certain motors with permanent magnets (linear, torque and some 
synchronous motors) have an increased, position-dependent variation of the 
motor torque (not QSY motors from HEIDENHAIN). This can be the result of 
two things: 
- During idle running, the cogging due to attractive forces of the permanent 
magnets 
- When under load, the torque ripple from higher harmonics, resulting from 
the opposing electromotive forces (generator effect) 
In practice, both causes always occur together, i.e. the torque of the motor 
is subject to periodic oscillations. This can have a negative effect on the 
controllability of the motor, which can result in a greater following error, and 
under circumstances, lower surface quality of the workpiece. 
To compensate for the cogging, a compensation current ascertained 
specifically for each motor can now be added. 
The parameters for calculating this compensation are stored in a special TRC 
file on the iTNC (PLC:\MP\TRC – xx_<motor name>.trc; xx = index of the 
motor axis; motor name = Name of the motor from the motor table (up to 
29 characters). The iTNC is informed of the file name via MP2260.x. If 
MP2260.x is followed by a blank line, no compensation is ascertained for 
this axis. 
Example: 
MP2260.0: 00_MotNameFromMotTab ;Motor of 1st axis 
MP2260.1: ;Motor of 2nd axis, no compensation 
Due to the complexity of the parameters required, they can only be 
determined by the TNCopt commissioning software tool from 
HEIDENHAIN. Please refer to the TNCopt documentation. 
Note
� The TRC function can only be used with PWM frequencies up to 5 kHz.
� A TRC file can only be used on the control on which the adjustment has 
been made.
� A TRC file must be re-created if the motor or even the encoder is 
exchanged.
� A TRC file can only be generated for synchronous motors or for linear or 
torque motors.
1 – 10 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
� New: MP4020 bit 13 – Monitoring of housing fan 
The correct operation of the MC’s or CC’s housing fan is now monitored 
(speed > 1500 rpm). This monitoring can be switched off with MP4020 
bit 13. 
Input: 0: Monitoring not active 
1: Inactive
� New: MP6151 
With MP6151 you can perform the pre-positioning of the probe cycle at the 
machine’s rapid traverse speed. 
Input: 0: Pre-position with speed from MP6150 
1: Pre-position at rapid traverse
� New: MP6166 
If MP6166 “Probing direction of the touch probe in consideration of an 
active basic rotation” is activated, the probing directions in the manual 
measuring cycles and with an active basic rotation are transformed in the 
rotated plane. 
Input: 0: Inactive 
1: Active 
� New: MP7400 – Look-ahead 
((with software option 2) 
Number of NC blocks that the interpolator uses to calculate the path in 
advance. The greater the number of blocks for advance calculation, the 
higher the possible feed rate. However, this improved effect is only 
noticeable with many short traverse blocks in the micron range. The default 
setting is almost always sufficient, and requires less computing time. 
Input: 0: 256 blocks (previous configuration and default setting) 
1: 512 blocks 
2: 1024 blocks
� New: MP7493 
Tolerance when setting a reference point with M114 (automatic 
compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes). The 
maximum deviation of the current tool orientation relative to the tool axis (of 
the tilted coordinate system) during reference-point setting is entered here. 
For example, this machine parameter is needed for setting a reference point 
when the PLANE function is active with Hirth-coupled PLC axes (, see page 
– 28). 
Input: 0 to 30.0000 [degrees] 
Default: 0.005
Note
This behavior is not in effect for the calibration cycles and the cycles for 
determining the basic rotation.
September 2005 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02 1 – 11
� New: MP7503 – Virtual tool axis 
((upgrade function) 
When moving the axes in the manual operating modes, and when re-
approaching the contour after a program interruption, you can now select via 
soft key the coordinate system of the tool. The axes can be moved in the 
current tool axis direction even before traversing the reference marks. To 
accomplish this, the last position of the rotary axes before power-off is 
stored remanently for incremental encoders. These remanently stored axis 
values are shown in an info window, and must be acknowledged by themachine operator. 
Input: 0: Inactive 
1: Active 
� New: MP7683 bit 8 
In MP7683 bit 8 you specify whether during tool-oriented machining in the 
Program Run, Full Sequence operating mode the workpieces should be 
machined until a tool change, or whether the program is only interrupted 
after the entire pallet has been machined (behavior previously depended on 
bit 1). 
Input: 0: Program interruption at tool change 
1: Machine pallet completely
� New: MP7684 bit 9 – Rapid five-axis machining with many rotary-axis 
motions 
During five-axis NC machining with many rotary axis motions and in 
combination with M128, a new method for calculation is used if bit 9 is set. 
This permits a significantly greater amount of motion by rotary axes (up to 
factor 4). However, if per positioning block this value is greater than 2 
degrees, or handwheel superpositioning is active (M118), the previous 
procedure is used. 
Input: 0: Inactive 
1: Rapid rotary milling active
1 – 12 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
� New: MP7691.3 
MP7691.3 is used to record all messages from the NC kernel. They are 
saved in the following directory: TNC:\klog\0.log - 9.log 
These diagnostics are only possible together with a technician from 
HEIDENHAIN. 
Input: 1 to 10 (= 10 files of 10*[MP7691.3] kB each) 
0: inactive (default - recommended)
� Changed: MP2302.x 
MP2302 can now also be changed by the PLC and via LSV.
� Changed: MP2304.x 
MP2304 can now also be changed by the PLC and via LSV.
� Changed: MP4310.x 
You can now also enter the general parameters for the PLC in binary format. 
Input: $0000 [hexadecimal] 
%0000 0000 0000 0000 [binary]
Configuring the 
axes and spindle
� Maximum currents with UM/UR xxx D 
It is now possible to take advantage of the higher maximum currents listed 
for the PWM frequencies 3.333 kHz and 4 kHz in the “Inverter Systems and 
Motors” Technical Manual. The iTNC takes all necessary data and settings 
from the new power module table called inverter.inv, which replaces the 
old power module table motor.amp. If the higher currents are not needed, 
you can continue to use the motor.amp table. 
The iTNC follows a specific sequence when looking for the power module 
table: 
1. PLC:\mp\inverter.inv 
2. PLC:\mp\motor.amp 
3. SYS:\mp\inverter.inv 
4. SYS:\mp\motor.amp 
The new inverter.inv power module table is structured as follows:
• NAME: Designation of the power module
• PWM: PWM frequency in [Hz] at which the power module is driven
• S: Switch position of the current sensor. Is required for HEIDENHAIN 
inverters whose name ends in “D” in order to use the higher currents 
named above. 
Input 0 or 1
• I-MAX: Maximum current of the inverter output in [A]
• I-Nom: Rated current of the inverter output in [A]
• U-Imax: Current sensor voltage in [V] at I-MAX
• I-N-DC: Permissible continuous current in stationary rotating field or 
until F-DC is reached in [A]
• T-DC: Time constant, how long maximum current can be applied to a 
stationary synchronous motor in [s]
• F-DC: Lower motor base frequency down to which the motor can be 
loaded with I-N-DC in [Hz]
• T-AC: Cycle duration for the duty cycle S6-40% in [s]
• F-AC: Motor frequency from which I-MAX is permissible in [s]
• T-IGBT: Protection time of the IGBTs in [s]
September 2005 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02 1 – 13
� Inclined milling with counting axes 
In order to make inclined milling possible on machines whose rotary axes 
are only counting axes (non-controlled axes), the following technique has 
been introduced:
• With M128 inactive (TCPM: the position of the tool tip remains constant 
when positioning tilting axes), the machine operator sets the rotary axes 
to the required nominal values.
• When M128 is activated, the control assumes the actual values of the 
non-controlled rotary axes, and uses them to calculate the changed 
position of the tool center point.
• The display of axes X/Y/Z is updated with the newly calculated values, 
and the compensating movement is performed with the next 
positioning.
• As long as M128 is active, the positions of the non-controlled rotary 
axes are monitored. If the positions of these axes deviate by more than 
the values defined in MP1110.x (standstill monitoring), then an error 
message is displayed and the momentary machining is interrupted.
• This function is even permitted after a program interruption with the 
MANUAL TRAVERSE soft key. In this case the new compensating 
movement is determined after switching with the APPROACH POSITION 
soft key.
Machine interfacing � Autorepeat function for PLC soft keys 
An autorepeat function can be activated for certain soft keys (ACTION and 
PULSE) by entering the following keywords: 
Example: 
ACTION Act_Softkey STATUS:M1100 REPEATINTERVAL:100 REPEATDELAY:200
• REPEATDELAY: <delay time in ms>. Defines the length of time the soft 
key must be pressed for the autorepeat function to activate. 
• REPEATINTERVAL: <interval in ms>. Defines the interval at which the 
function assigned to the soft key is triggered (e.g. for setting a marker).
� New STATE soft key 
Using the keyword STATES: <number of states>, you can manage multiple 
states for a soft key (STATE). In order to display these states, the BMX file 
of the soft key must include the corresponding number of possible states, 
and a PLC word memory must be assigned. 
If a PLC bit memory is assigned, only two states can be managed. 
In the following example, a value is assigned to the PLC word W1000 via a 
BMX soft key with five possible states. Values from 0 to 4 are assigned 
here: 
SOFTKEY spindle_attr.bmx State_Softkey 
STATE State_Softkey STATUS:W1000 STATES:5
� New HIDE soft key keyword 
The keyword HIDE assigns a marker to a soft key (all types). If this marker 
receives the value 1, then that soft key is hidden, or exchanged for an 
“empty” soft key.
PLC programming � New functions for PLC in the LOGIC DIAGRAM 
The recording time for the LOGIC DIAGRAM function was doubled, in order 
to make recording times of at least 20 seconds possible. The duration of the 
recording after a trigger event can be set in the window for operand 
selection in 4 steps [2.7 s, 5.4 s, 10.8 s, 21.5 s]. In addition, the gating logic 
of the operands [AND, OR] must be set. 
If present, the symbolic names of the selected operands are displayed.
1 – 14 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
� Freely-definable soft-key menu for HR 420 
Via the PLC, the iTNC can now also manage freely-definable soft keys on the 
HR 420. The corresponding entries are made in the soft-key resource file 
(*.spj). The soft keys for the vertical and horizontal soft-key rows of the iTNC 
can also be defined here. 
It is now possible to switch from the basic menu of the HR 420, via the FCT 
(Function) soft key, to a freely-definable submenu structure, whose 
description and functions are specified in the soft-key resource file. This 
menu is displayed in the fourth row of the HR 420. Four ASCII characters 
are available for each soft key. However, if each soft key uses all four 
characters, then there is no empty space between the soft-key 
designations. 
In addition, you can optionally have a menu title with 20 characters displayed 
in the third row of the HR 420 display for each menu. 
The scope of function of the soft keys on the handwheel is restricted 
somewhat compared to the vertical and horizontal soft keys of the iTNC 
screen. The following definitions are possible:
Entries for the menu definition and type of soft key in the HR 420 menu:
Entry Parameters Description
; Comment
SKMENU 
ENDSKMENU
Beginning or end of the definition of a soft-key 
menu. The name of the menu must be 
specified. The soft keys are automatically 
assigned to the correct menu rows. Also note 
the additional parameters for this keyword.
HRROOT Freely-definable root menu when called from 
the basic handwheel menu via the FCT 
(Function) soft key
HRMENU Freely-definable submenu, called via the 
keyword NODE...
TITLE:<name> Menu title: Freely definable text in the third 
line of the HR 420 
The parameter TITLE: can also be surrounded 
by quotation marks. This permits blank spaces 
in the menu title.
NODE Soft key jumps to a submenu. Is confirmed via W306 to the PLC. 
The soft-key name and the name of the submenu must be 
indicated.
BACK Soft key jumps to a submenu. Is confirmed via W306 to the PLC. 
The soft-key name and the name of the submenu must be 
indicated.
BLANK Vacant soft key, is shown as “..”. You can also specify a soft-
key name.
ACTION Function soft key. Is confirmed via W306 to 
the PLC. The soft-key name must be 
indicated.
STATUS:<marker 
or word>
An operand is assigned to the soft key (in 
addition to W306). If a marker is indicated and 
the soft key is pressed, the marker is set. If a 
word is indicated, the soft key number is 
entered (index number in the *.sys file, e.g. 
Softkey.sys).
September 2005 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02 1 – 15
Additional keywords and parameters for the description of soft keys in the 
HR 420 menu:
The following example shows the configuration of a soft-key menu on an 
HR 420.
PULSE The soft key is reported to the PLC via W306 for the duration of 
the PLC cycle. A soft-key name must be indicated.
The soft-key types RADIO, CHECK and STATE may not be used. Other 
parameters, such as ENABLE, HIDE, REPEAT, etc. are not yet available.
Keyword Parameters Description
TX #I<text> Language-neutral text for the description 
of a soft key (up to 4 ASCII characters)
#A<ASCII 
value>
Input of an ASCII value as a possibility for 
displaying special characters. This value 
must be entered in decimal notation as 
three digits. 
Special characters include 
- 128 = Arrow up 
- 129 = Arrow down 
- 133 = Return symbol in the menu
A combination of the parameters named above is possible, 
e.g. #IUp#128 to display Up↑
Entry Parameters Description
PLC SOFT-KEY Project File - Version 1.0
SKPATH ’PLC:\SK\1024x768\’
...
TX #IUp#A128 HR_SK1
TX #IDn#A129 HR_SK2
TX #ISta HR_SK3
TX #IPul HR_SK4
TX #IEND HR_SK5
...
SKMENU HRRootMenu HRROOT “TITLE:Menu: Laser Head”
ACTION HR_SK1 STATUS: MG_LASER_HEAD_UP
ACTION HR_SK2 STATUS: MG_LASER_HEAD_DOWN
NODE HR_SK3 HRSubMenu
ACTION HR_SK4 STATUS: M1122
BACK HR_SK5
ENDSKMENU
SKMENU HRSubMenu HRMENU
ACTION HR_SK6
...
BLANK
ENDSKMENU
Root menu of the 
handwheel menu
Definition of the 
soft keys with their 
description
Submenu of the 
handwheel menu
1 – 16 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
� Rapid navigation in the PLC status tables 
In the (MIOCTBWDS) table view of markers, words, etc., you can quickly 
switch the view to the corresponding operand table with the m, i, o, c, t, b, 
w, d and s shortcut keys. 
The b, c, and d keys are an exception in the B, W, D and HEX views, since 
they are needed for the entry of hexadecimal values.
� Terminating an NC strobe 
PLC messages that would terminate an NC strobe are only released once all 
functions that are only permitted during the strobe have been completed.
� PLC texts in UNICODE 
PLC texts in the operating mode and dialog windows from error fixes and 
the ERROR.A and DIALOG.A files can now be displayed in UNICODE. 
Starting with version 3.1 of PLCtext, it is possible to generate the files in the 
corresponding format. 
� D372 – Maximum spindle speed with potentiometer setting 
The PLC double word D372 makes the maximum spindle speed including 
the spindle potentiometer available to the PLC program. This makes it 
possible to already acknowledge within the ramp the M functions for 
switching on the spindle by comparing the actual and maximum speeds.
� MPFRAGMENTFILE 
By entering MPFRAGMENTFILE = <path\file name> in the OEM.SYS file, you 
specify a file containing the paths to machine-parameter subfiles, which can 
be activated via FN17. 
The value entered in the FN17 SYSWRITE ID 1020 NR1 = <line number> 
function then corresponds to the MP subfile reference in this file. 
This makes it possible to enter any number of MP subfiles (until now only 
10 files MPFRAGMENT0-9 = <path> in OEM.SYS). 
Changes to spindle machine parameters (MP3xxx or MP13xxx) are only 
active after an S output. All other machine parameters are active 
immediately. 
The changes also remain in effect if a new NC program is selected, but not 
if the control is restarted.
� FN18 – ID310 for M116 
You can use the FN 18: SYSREAD Q<no.> = ID310 NR116 function to 
determine whether M116 is active. If the value ascertained does not 
equal 0, M116 is active.
� FN16 – F-PRINT 
31 variables can now be output per line with the FN16: F-PRINT function.
� FN18 – ID630 NR0 
You can use the FN18: SYSREAD Q<no.> = ID630 NR0 IDX <no.> function to 
ascertain whether the SIK option <no.> is set. 
If the SIK option is set, the function returns the value1.0. Otherwise it 
returns 0.0.
� FN18 – ID630 NR1 
You can use the FN18: SYSREAD Q<no.> = ID630 NR1 function to display the 
Feature Content Level (FCL) in order to ascertain the possible upgrade 
functions. 
If no Feature Content Level is set, the function supplies the value –1.0. 
Otherwise, for example, it supplies 2.0 for Feature Content Level 2.
Note
If texts from these files are also used in the PLC window, then they cannot 
be in UNICODE, but must rather use UTF8-coding.
September 2005 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02 1 – 17
�FN17/FN18 – ID2000 Block function 
With the ‘FN17/FN18 ID2000 NR’ functions you can transfer up to eight 
variables in a call between an NC program and the PLC. In addition, using 
FN17 you can now also transfer PLC bytes, words, and double words, not 
just markers. 
Example: 
FN 17: SYSWRITE ID 2000 NR10 IDX1000 = BLOCK Q1620 - Q1627 
Here the contents of parameters Q1620 to Q1627 are written to PLC 
markers M1000 to M1007.
No. Description IDX FN17 FN18
10 PLC markers No. of marker X X
20 PLC inputs No. of input X
30 PLC outputs No. of output X
40 PLC counters No. of counter X
50 PLC timers No. of timers X
60 PLC byte No. of byte X X
70 PLC word No. of word X X
80 PLC double word No. of double word X X
1 – 18 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
PLC modules � Changed: Module 9223 (Free Rotation) 
Module 9223 can now also be used for PLC axes.
� Changed: Module 9038 (Read Axis Information) 
Status information number 9 is used to ascertain whether the axis being 
interrogated is a slave axis. 
Number 9: 0 = No slave axis 
1 = Slave axis
Module 9133 Output of Hardware Information (changed)
PLC Module 9133 is used to ascertain the supply voltages (numbers 4 and 5) 
as well as the shaft speed of the housing fan (number 6).
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
0: Internal temperature sensor in [°C]
1: Temperature CPU1 (basic PCB) in [°C] 
2: Temperature CPU2 (additional PCB) in [°C] 
3: Voltage of buffer battery in [mV]
4: 5-V supply voltage of main board 
5: 3.3-V supply voltage
6: Shaft speed of the housing fan
CM 9133
PL B/W/D <Value>
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Value was determined
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 2 Invalid number given
8 No second CPU present (for number 2)
September 2005 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02 1 – 19
Module 9143 Activating the brake test
The brake test can be activated with PLC Module 9143. It is performed axis-
specifically with the settings from MP2230.x and MP2232.x, or with special 
given values.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Axis>
0 to 13 and 15: Axes 1 to 14 and the spindle
PS B/W/D/K <Factor for rated current>
Value in 1/1000, 0: Value from MP2230.x
PS B/W/D/K <Max. permissible path>
Path in 0.1 μm, 0: Value from MP2232.x
CM 9143
Error recognition: 
Module 9185 Touchpad status
PLC Module 9185 is used to lock or enable the touchpad (X142) on the 
keyboard connected via USB. It is also possible to interrogate the status.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
0: Enable touchpad (UNLOCK)
1: Locktouchpad (LOCK)
2: Status request
CM 9185
PL B/W/D <Status>
-1: Status not defined
0: Touchpad is enabled
1: Touchpad is locked
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Brake test started
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 2 Invalid axis number
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Function was performed
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 2 Invalid mode
1 – 20 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
New smarT.NC 
functions
� DXF converter 
(Option #42) 
Contour programs (*.HC files) can be generated directly by the DXF 
converter.
� Coordinate transformation 
(upgrade function) 
The datum shift, rotation, mirroring, and scaling factor coordinate 
transformations are now available in form view.
� PLANE Function 
(upgrade function) 
The PLANE function is now also available in form view.
� Graphic block scan 
(upgrade function) 
Block scan with graphically-supported possibility for selecting the entry 
point if it is within a point file.
� Contour-pocket depth 
(upgrade function) 
Within the contour pocket you can now assign a separate depth to each 
subcontour (or height for island contours).
� Copy/Paste/Cut 
Copying/Pasting/Cutting of units is now possible via soft keys or the 
keyboard commands CTRL+C/CTRL+V/CTRL+X.
� Switch between alternatives for feed rates 
Switch via soft key between the possible feed rates: F (feed rate in 
mm/min), Fz (feed rate per tooth in mm/tooth) and Fu (feed rate in mm/rev).
� Entry of the cutting velocity – VC 
When entering the spindle shaft speed, it is now possible to enter it as a 
prescribed cutting velocity (at the cutting edge). The iTNC then calculates 
the spindle speed necessary. The VC soft key was introduced for this 
purpose.
� Tool selection window 
Tool data can now be edited in the tool selection window.
� Incremental entry of machining positions 
Machining positions can now be entered incrementally directly in a 
machining unit’s form. 
This is possible as an option starting from the second position in the form. 
You can switch to incremental entry either via soft key or the I key.
� Assumption of workpiece blank 
The workpiece blank is automatically assumed from the unit program into a 
new contour description program.
Note
In order to take full advantage of the DXF converter’s function, you need a 
screen pointing device (such as a UCB mouse or touchpad), in order to 
select the contour elements, for example.
September 2005 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02 1 – 21
� Plain-text dialog keys in forms 
The orange keys (X, Y, Z, P, I) of the standard keyboard now also function 
within contour programming in smarT.NC.
� QuickInfos in forms 
QuickInfo texts are now available for most input fields and option boxes in 
the forms. 
QuickInfo texts contain information about the respective functions, and 
appear on the screen when the mouse remains on the element for more 
than one second.
1 – 22 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
New plain-
language 
programming 
functions
� DXF converter 
Contour programs (*.H files) can be generated directly by the DXF converter 
(software option).
� Entry of the cutting velocity – VC 
When entering the spindle shaft speed, it is now possible to enter it as a 
prescribed cutting velocity (at the cutting edge). The iTNC then calculates 
the spindle speed necessary. The VC soft key was introduced for this 
purpose.
� FK-H conversion 
The functionality of this conversion no longer depends on the setting of the 
Automatic Drawing On/Off soft key. That means that this function is no 
longer restricted to the PROGRAM+GRAPHICS screen layout. The soft-key row 
for converting from NC programs is now available in all screen layouts in the 
Programming and Editing operating mode via the CONVERT PROGRAM soft key. 
Two soft keys are now offered for the conversion of NC programs with free 
contour programs into simple plain-language programs.
• The Convert FK->H Structure soft key maintains the program structure, 
and the NC blocks with free contour programming are replaced by plain-
language blocks. 
Programs with Q parameters cannot be converted with this soft key. 
• The Convert FK->H Linear soft key outputs a linearized program. This 
program follows the actual machining sequence. 
All programs can be converted with this soft key.
� CAD point filter (offline) 
(upgrade function) 
With this new function, externally created NC programs can be filtered. The 
NC programs are read out, and the traverse paths are recalculated and 
smoothed. The result is a new NC program with smoothed contours. It is 
saved with the file name amendment “_FLT” (e.g. “contour_FLT.h”). The 
filter function also generates useful additional path points when the gaps 
between individual contour segments are too large. This can also increase 
the size of the NC program. 
This function is called in the Programming and Editing operating mode, via 
the CONVERT PROGRAM soft key and then the new soft key for the point filter.
� Machining depth of subcontours 
For contours which you connect via the contour formula, you can now 
assign separate machining depths for each subcontour.
New ISO functions � PLANE Function 
The PLANE function is now available in ISO programming for tilting the 
machining plane. The syntax is identical with the plain-language syntax.
Note
In order to take full advantage of the DXF converter’s function, you need a 
screen pointing device (such as a UCB mouse or touchpad), in order to 
select the contour elements, for example.
September 2005 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02 1 – 23
New touch probe 
functions
� Cycle 441 – Rapid Probing 
(upgrade function) 
The new touch probe Cycle 441 is available, with which you can globally set 
different touch probe parameters (e.g. positioning feed rate) for all 
subsequently used touch probe cycles. This makes it easy to optimize the 
programs so that reductions in total machining time are achieved.
� Probing with active basic rotation in manual operating modes 
The TNC now also takes into consideration an active basic rotation (if 
activated via MP6166) for the probing functions in the Manual (El. 
Handwheel) operating modes. Under consideration of the active angle of 
rotation, the touch probe moves at an angle in the direction you 
programmed.
� Measuring log on the TNC screen 
Cycles 420 to 431 for automatic tool measurement can now also display the 
measuring log in a pop-up window on the screen. 
If you set parameter Q281 = 2, then the control interrupts program run and 
displays the measurement result. 
Press the NC Start button to close the pop-up window and continue 
program run.
New handwheel 
functions
� Freely-definable soft-key menu for HR 420 
Via the PLC, the iTNC can now also manage freely-definable soft keys on the 
HR 420. See “PLC programming” on page 14.
� New behavior with the HR 420 
The feed-rate potentiometers of the HR 420 and the keyboard unit are no 
longer switched over automatically when the handwheel is selected or 
deselected. In order to switch the potentiometers, you must press the 
<CTRL> + <Handwheel> keys on the handwheel. A selection menu 
appears on the handwheel display, asking whether the potentiometers on 
the operating panel or the handwheel are to be active. 
F1 = HW: Handwheel 
F2 = KBD: Keyboard 
If the handwheel potentiometers are active, but the handwheel itself is not, 
a message appears on the control screen.
� Small pop-up window for HR 420 
The pop-up window for the active HR 420 was made smaller, in order to 
improve the view of the display beneath it.
Programming 
station 
(Id. Nr. 340 494-02 
and new: 
Id. Nr. 386 753-02)
� Scope of function of the programming station 
All software options (SIK) are now enabled for the programming station 
software.
� Virtual keyboard (programming station with USB dongle) 
A new programming station (Id. Nr. 386 753-02) is being presented with the 
release of NC software 340 49x-02. It is operated via soft keys anda virtual 
keyboard, which is controlled via the mouse. It is enabled with the USB 
dongle included in delivery. This means that no keyboard unit is required. 
A screen resolution of at least 1280 x 1024 pixels is necessary for this.
1 – 24 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
� PLC basic program for programming station 
When installing the programming station, the PLC basic program can now 
also be installed, ready-to-run, from the setup menu. You must select “User-
defined” installation during the setup, and then select the installation of the 
PLC basic program. This permits you to simulate functions in the machine 
operating modes� 
In addition to the horizontal and vertical soft keys, which you click with the 
mouse, various functions (such as the simulation of axis and spindle 
motions) can be performed with key combinations from the keyboard unit. 
When you start the programming station, the error message “98 TNC 
programming station active” appears. This is an opportunity to read a brief 
description of how to perform these functions. Press the Help key to call this 
brief description. 
You can simulate the following machine functions with both the keyboard 
unit and the mouse.
� Public key “PLC” 
The new, additional public key “PLC” was introduced for the PLC 
programming interface (code number 807667). It only functions with the 
programming station software.
� Indication of digital outputs in MP120.x 
In MP120.x, digital outputs can now be entered in the software for the 
programming station (e.g. X51 to X64).
Function Key combination
NC start [CTRL] + S
NC stop [CTRL] + X
Axis plus [CTRL] + Arrow Up
Axis minus [CTRL] + Arrow Down
Emergency stop [ALT] + X
Vertical soft key 1 (top) [SHIFT] + [CTRL] + 
[ALT] + 1
: :
Vertical soft key 6 (bottom) [SHIFT] + [CTRL] + 
[ALT] + 6
September 2005 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02 1 – 25
iTNC – Operation 
and technique
� 3-D line graphics 
(upgrade function) 
The powerful 3-D LINES viewing option has been added to the Programming 
and Editing operating mode. It is activated via the soft key of the same 
name, which is available using the key for the screen layout. The following 
functions are now available in this viewing option:
• Display of the currently selected traverse path in the NC program with 
its own color within the 3-D graphics (see figure)
• 3-D rotation with the mouse, including display of the active coordinate 
system
• Standard zoom functions with very high resolution
• Standard motion and rotation functions via soft keys 
� Table editor in form view 
Tables (with the extension *.TAB) can now be edited in a form view. You 
can switch to it with the LIST FORM soft key after having selected the table. 
1 – 26 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
� Automatic determination of the dynamic load (only CC 424) 
The dynamic load (inertia) of axes can automatically be detected with a 
measuring cycle created by the OEM. The result measured is the maximum 
torque which occurred, in % of the rated torque. It is determined between 
the beginning and end of a measurement, and can be stored in a buffered 
variable. The values can be output at any time. This makes it possible, using 
the measured value and an NC macro, to automatically adapt the machine 
parameters by selecting an appropriate MP subfile.
• FN 17 SYSWRITE ID621 NR 0 IDX <axis> = 0 to start the measurement.
• FN 18 SYSREAD Q<n> = ID621 NR 0 IDX <axis> to read the result and 
stop the measurement.
• FN 17 SYSWRITE ID 590 NR 2 IDX <axis> (is not cleared when a program 
is selected) and FN 17 SYSWRITE ID 590 NR 3 IDX <axis> (secure from 
power failure) for storing the result (IDX = 1..30).
• FN 18 SYSREAD ID 590 NR <2 or 3> IDX <axis> for reading the stored 
value (IDX = 1..10).
• Creation of an NC macro, which is run when a program is concluded 
with M02, M30 or END PGM (keyword RUNENDPGM in 
NCMACRO.SYS). In the Manual operating mode, this macro must also 
be saved in the M-function table under M02 and M30.
• FN 17 SYSWRITE ID 120 IDX 2 to deactivate a machine parameter 
subfile.
� LIFTOFF at powerfail (only CC 424) 
If the power fails and LIFTOFF is enabled (M148 must be active, column 
LIFTOFF in the tool table = Y, PLC: M4620=1), an attempt is made to lift the 
tool from the contour by the distance given in MP1160 with the help of the 
remaining energy of the dc-link. 
Certain conditions must be maintained before and during LIFTOFF.
• The 24-V power supply must be maintained for at least 1 second (USB 
for 24 V, or buffer capacity or capacitor)
• The PLC may not switch off the controller via Module 9161
• AC-Fail may not be evaluated (MP2150 = 3)
• The wye-delta contactor combination may not fail, otherwise the 
spindle could not be controllable during liftoff
Note
LIFTOFF only functions with HEIDENHAIN inverters.
September 2005 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02 1 – 27
� Reference-point setting with the PLANE function, Hirth-coupled axes 
and active M114 
If rotary axes with Hirth coupling are positioned via PLC or NC, angles can 
only be entered according to a certain grid. Machining can be performed in 
any plane by tilting the plane with the PLANE function and programming the 
rotary axis grid coordinates with M114 (automatic compensation of the 
machine geometry when working with tilting axes). 
Starting with software 340-49x-02, it is possible to save and set reference 
points in this state. 
The iTNC uses the nominal positions of the rotary axes programmed in 
M114 to calculate the reference point. With MP7493 the machine 
manufacturer can enter a maximum deviation of the rotary axes based on 
the nominal position resulting from the orientation of the working plane. The 
control accepts this deviation when setting reference points and when 
measuring with M114. The default value for this machine parameter is 
0.005. The iTNC then uses the current ACTUAL/NOMINAL positions 
(MP7682, bit 1) of the rotary axes to calculate the reference point.
Note
Please note that in this procedure the tool might not be perpendicular to the 
tilted working plane.
1 – 28 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
� Network: IP address via DHCP 
(upgrade function) 
Using the code number NET123 and the DEFINE NET soft key, “DHCP” can 
now be entered as the network address in the ADRESS column. 
In this case the control automatically retrieves the network address 
(IP address), the subnet mask (MASK column) and any necessary broadcast 
address (BROADCAST column) from a DHCP server on the network (Dynamic 
Host Configuration Protocol). 
If necessary, “DHCP” can also be entered in the ROUTER column, so that the 
IP address of a default router can automatically be retrieved by the DHCP 
server. 
If necessary, the IP address of the control can be determined by the network 
from the network name. This name can be found on the control under 
DEFINE NET in the HOST column. On the network the IP address can be 
ascertained via command line (DOS window) with the “ping 
<HOSTNAME>” command (e.g. ping TNC_123). 
Below is the example for the configuration of a table which is accessed via 
Programming and Editing, MOD, code number NET123 and the DEFINE NET 
soft key: 
 
ADRESS MASK BROADCAST ROUTER HOST DOMAIN NAMESERVER 
DHCP TNC_123 DHCP 
� Network: Name resolution via DNS 
(upgrade function) 
Via code number NET123 and the DEFINE NET soft key, the name of a domain 
can be entered in the DOMAIN column, and the IP address of a Domain Name 
Server (DNS) in the NAMESERVER column. This resolves the symbolic 
computer names in this domain, and the entry of IP addresses in the mount 
table (via the DEFINE MOUNT soft key) is no longer needed. 
If “DHCP” is entered in the DOMAIN column, entering a domain name and an 
IP address of the name server is not necessary. These are then 
automatically assigned by the network.
Note
In order to maintain the simple procedure for establishing a network 
connection between thecontrol and the computer software from 
HEIDENHAIN, such as TNCremoNT, TNCopt or PLCdesignNT, the newest 
versions of the software also support the entry of host names or network 
names instead of the IP address. 
For example, if the name “TNC_123” is entered via code number NET123 
and the DEFINE NET soft key in the HOST column, it can be entered in 
TNCremoNT in the IP address field for configuring the connection.
September 2005 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02 1 – 29
� Expanded USB functionality (USB 1.1) 
(upgrade function) 
When attached, USB devices that use the VFAT or ISO 9660 file systems 
(not NTFS or other systems) are detected and connected automatically. The 
file manager features soft keys for removing and reconnecting these 
devices to the directory tree. These appear when the More Functions soft 
key is pressed, if the USB memory device was selected in the file manager. 
If this is not the case, only the soft key for reconnection is shown.
HEIDENHAIN has successfully tested the following USB memory devices:
Other devices are also supported, but the customer must test them on a case-
by-case basis.
� New software update guidance, starting with NC software 340 490-02 
The update functionality of the iTNC was revised. 
See “New Update Procedures Once Software 340 49x-02 Has Been 
Installed” on page 32.
� Access to PRESET table 
The preset table can now be accessed from the first soft-key row. The SET 
DATUM and INCREMENT soft keys were moved to the second soft-key row. 
Now the line of the currently active preset is also the active line when the 
preset table is accessed.
Note
In order to remove a USB memory device, you must always press the 
More Functions and 
soft keys. Otherwise data on the data carrier could be lost.
Type Manufactu
rer
Device VendorID ProductID Revision
Floppy TEAC TEAC FD-05PUW 0644 0000 0.00
Floppy TEAC TEAC FD-05PUB 0644 0000 0.00
CDROM TEAC USB CD-ROM 
210PU
0644 1000 1.33
CDROM FREECOM USB2-IDE 
Controller
07ab fc02 11.10
HD UNKNOWN USB TO IDE 05e3 0702 0.02
Stick QDI UNKNOWN 0c76 0007 1.00
Stick TrekStor USB MiniStick 0c76 0005 1.00
Stick Transcend TS512MJFLASH 058f 9380 1.00
Stick Transcend Flash Disk 0ea0 2168 2.00
Stick Generic Mass Storage 058f 9384 1.05
1 – 30 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
� New functions in the PRESET table 
Two new functions are available in the preset table. You can now
• incrementally correct a preset already saved for an axis
• set a preset in an axis
• set a preset in an axis to 0
• directly enter a value in the PRESET table
� Cycle dialogs in UTF8 
The dialogs of parameters for OEM cycles can now be displayed as UTF8-
encoded texts (e.g. for Asian languages). 
In order to create these OEM cycle projects, you need at least version 4.2 
of CycleDesign and version 3.1 of PLCtext.
� Axis traverse limits for PLC auxiliary axes 
For rotary and PLC auxiliary axes for which axis traverse limits were entered 
in MP810, you can now enter axis traverse limits in the Manual and Program 
Run operating modes via the MOD key. The limit-switch monitoring for these 
axes must have been activated in MP812.
� New design for soft keys 
All soft keys were redesigned.
� Switch-off during “power interruption” 
The control can now already be switched off in the “power interrupt” state 
with the Shutdown soft key.
� Editing system files 
The function introduced in software 340 49x-01 for editing system files 
(*.SYS) in the editor for machine parameters was disabled.
� Czech texts with special characters 
The texts in Czech (e.g. dialogs, DSP error messages and their help texts) 
are now displayed with the appropriate special characters.
September 2005 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02 1 – 31
1.4.3 New Update Procedures Once Software 340 49x-02 Has Been Installed
Previous The previous procedure for software updates can continue to be used. In 
addition, service packs can be selected and deleted in the selection dialog box.
What’s new? � The following files are now necessary for an update, and must be located in 
the same directory: 
- setup.zip 
- setup.omf (setup.exe in Windows) 
- setup.ini (this is to be created by the OEM, and is only necessary if the 
update is to occur according to a specific sequence) 
Please note that this currently means that the version of the software to be 
installed is not displayed in advance.
� Software updates and service packs are loaded in the same manner.
� Automatic update possible. If your directories are structured appropriately, 
this method makes it possible to update the control automatically when it is 
booted. If there is an “install” directory on your iTNC containing a setup.ini 
control file, an update is performed automatically according to the 
instructions in this control file (see “Control file for automatic update 
(setup.ini)” on page 1 – 34). 
The following directories are checked during booting for the presence of a 
control file:
• iTNC without Windows 
- TNC:\install\ 
or, if a USB memory device is connected 
- USB0:\install\ (USB0: first partition of the first USB memory device)
• iTNC with Windows 
- D:\install\ 
or, if a USB memory device is connected 
- G:\install\ (G: corresponds to the drive letter of the USB memory 
device – network drives are not permitted!)
� Start the update via the keyword SETUP
� No naming convention according to the usual format is necessary
� Copying of the update files (setup.omf/exe and setup.zip) to the system 
partition occurs automatically as part of the update program in directories 
with the following naming convention:
• iTNC without Windows 
- Software update: SYS:\zip\<Id.Nr.>_<ver> 
- Service pack: SYS:\zip\<Id.Nr.>_<ver>_SP<n>
• iTNC with Windows 
- Software update: C:\Program Files\install\<Id.Nr.>_<ver> 
- Service pack: C:\Program Files\install\<Id.Nr.>_<ver>_SP<n>
Note
You can download the two files necessary for the update (setup.zip and 
setup.omf) from the HEIDENHAIN FileBase under “NC Milling iTNC530 > 
Software” as a single ZIP file, e.g. 340490_002.zip, and unzip them in your 
Update directory.
1 – 32 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
� A query appears, asking whether the necessary binary to ASCII conversions 
should be performed. If yes, then a procedure in case there is not enough 
memory is requested: 
- Cancel if not enough memory 
- Delete largest or oldest files first 
This can be automated in the control file mentioned above.
� Only files whose binary version has changed are converted.
� The NC software has been prepared in such a manner that when an update 
is performed or a service pack loaded, the PLC program and PLC partition 
can be updated as well, according to the requirements of the OEM. When 
the NC software is updated, the OEM uses the HEIDENHAIN PC software 
PLCdesignNT to add all necessary files to the setup.zip archive. These files 
are copied to the appropriate locations during an update.
� If the PLC:\_mpupdate directory is created during the automatic update by 
the OEM, then files that automatically update or expand the active and 
selected MP or OEM.SYS files when the control is started can be saved 
here. 
Files containing the name merge.* (merge.mp and merge.oem.sys) expand 
the MP and OEM.SYS files by the entries contained in them. Files 
containing the name overwrite.* (overwrite.mp and overwrite.oem.sys) 
contain updated entries for the corresponding files, and overwrite entries 
with the same names in the MP and OEM.SYS files. 
MP subfiles are ignored here.
� After successful installation, these ASCII files are automatically reconverted 
to binary format.
Warning
No manual changes may be made to these directories, since they might be 
required for restoring earlier software versions. 
Note
The support necessary for this from PLCdesignNT will be available starting 
in the next release (version 2.3). It is not possible to update only the PLC 
data but not the NC software.
September 2005 NCSoftware 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02 1 – 33
Control file for 
automatic update 
(setup.ini)
In order to automate an update as much as possible, a control file with the 
name setup.ini is necessary. This file can be created with a simple text 
editor.
An example of a setup.ini file:
Interactive=1 
Confirm=1 
Language=GERMAN 
SavePlc=TNC:\backup\340422_012.zip
The following settings are selectable:
Parameters Description
Interactive=[0,1] Deletion of the NC software archive (old software 
versions) and binary to ASCII conversion must be 
confirmed by the user. 
0: No 
1: Yes [default]
Confirm=[0,1] Start of update and reboot process must be 
confirmed by the user 
0: No 
1: Yes [default]
ServiceRequest=[0,1] A service request is triggered after an update 
(only if remote diagnosis is active) 
0: No [default] 
1: Yes
ConvertToAscii=[0,1] 
(only if Interactive=0)
Binary to ASCII conversion with automated 
update process (not with service pack) 
0: No 
1: Yes [default]
CopyToSys=[0,1] The setup archive to be installed is copied to the 
directory SYS:\zip (iTNC with Windows: 
C:\Program Files\install). This makes it possible to 
return to this software version later. 
0: No 
1: Yes [default]
DeleteFiles= 
[DATE,SIZE,CANCEL] 
(only if Interactive=0)
Procedure during binary to ASCII conversion 
during automated update if there is not enough 
memory available on the TNC or PLC partition 
DATE: Delete oldest files first 
SIZE: Delete largest files first 
CANCEL: Cancel the update [default]
DeleteArchives= 
[DATE,SIZE,CANCEL] 
(only if Interactive=0)
Procedure is there is not enough room on the SYS 
partition for the update 
DATE: Delete oldest archive first 
SIZE: Delete largest archive first 
CANCEL: Cancel the update [default]
1 – 34 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Language=[ENGLISH, 
GERMAN] 
(only if Confirm=0)
Language for the dialog guidance during the 
update if no user activities are required for 
starting the update and rebooting (Confirm=0) 
GERMAN: German dialog text 
ENGLISH: English dialog text [default]
DelSource=[0,1] Delete the source files (setup.zip, setup.ini, 
setup.omf/exe) once the update has completed 
successfully 
0: No [default] 
1: Yes
DeleteIni=[0,1] Delete the setup.ini file after a successful update. 
0: No [default] 
1: Yes
SavePlc=<name> If the software is updated from 340 49x-02 or 
higher to a newer version, then the entire PLC 
partition can be stored as a ZIP file in binary 
format. This makes it possible to restore this 
software state including the PLC files. 
Here you enter the path and file name for the ZIP 
file in which the entire PLC partition is saved in 
binary format. Please consider the software 
version when assigning the file name.
RestorePlc=<name> The “Restore” function is used to restore the 
PLC data to a certain software state. 
Here you enter the path and file name for the ZIP 
file containing the PLC data state (in binary 
format) appropriate to the NC software version to 
be installed. This should be the ZIP file which was 
saved with the “SavePlc” function, containing 
the corresponding PLC state and saved on the 
PLC partition.
Parameters Description
September 2005 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02 1 – 35
New update for 
iTNC without 
Windows
Manual update 
The following procedure is used to perform a manual update (without a 
setup.ini file in the setup directory) or an installation of a service pack:
� HEIDENHAIN recommends making a backup for the control
� Connect the drive or USB device containing the files necessary for the 
update (setup.zip, setup.omf)
� In the Programming and Editing mode, press the MOD key 
� Enter the keyword Setup
� In the browser, select the directory and the corresponding Setup.omf file
� Select the desired language for the update guidance
� Choose the desired action for the event that there is not enough memory 
available on the TNC or PLC partition for the binary to ASCII conversion: 
- Cancel if not enough space: The update procedure is cancelled if there 
is not enough space available, and a message to this effect appears. In this 
case you must save the files (*.h, *.i, and tables) externally, if they are 
needed, and then remove them manually in order to make space for the 
conversion. 
- Delete largest files first: The largest files (*.h, *.i, and tables) are 
deleted until there is enough space for the conversion. 
- Delete oldest files first: The oldest files (*.h, *.i, and tables on the 
PLC and TNC partitions) are deleted until there is enough space for the 
conversion.
� If there is not enough space on the SYS partition, select deletion of the 
oldest setup files. This procedure is repeated until there is enough memory 
space available.
� Confirm the update actions listed and that are to be performed.
� After the update has finished successfully, confirm the restart of the control.
Automated update
If one of the following directories exists when an iTNC without Windows is 
booted, 
- TNC:\install\ 
or, if a USB memory device is connected 
- USB0:\install\ (USB0: first partition of the first USB memory device) 
and if a setup.ini control file is saved in this directory, then an automated 
update is performed according to the instructions in this control file (see 
“Control file for automatic update (setup.ini)” on page 1 – 34).
An automated update is usually a part of a manual update. This means that you 
can use the control file to reduce the number of user actions necessary for the 
update to a minimum, and at the same time make a backup of the PLC 
partition.
Note
If a setup.ini file exists in the setup directory when you update manually, 
then the update is performed according to the instructions in this file. See 
“Control file for automatic update (setup.ini)” on page 34.
1 – 36 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Update via remote operation
How to perform an update via remote operation:
� In the Programming and Editing mode of the iTNC, press the MOD key 
� On the iTNC, activate remote maintenance by pressing the Service ON soft 
key. 
A “service request” is triggered and a connection is established.
� Transmit the setup.omf and setup.zip files to a suitable directory on the 
control (e.g. TNC:\update)
� Continue the update via remote operation as described under “Manual 
update”
Notes on updating via remote operation
� If remote maintenance is active when the update is started, the remote 
maintenance is deactivated (this does not affect the current remote 
operation).
� After the reboot or after the update was cancelled due to an error, a service 
request is triggered. The service request information indicates whether the 
update was successful.
� If the control does not boot due to missing or incorrect machine parameters, 
a service request is triggered until the “power interrupt” stage of the boot 
process is reached.
New update for 
iTNC with Windows
Manual update
The following notes apply to software updates and installations of service 
packs for the iTNC with Windows:
� The actual update process is started as previously in Windows. 
� Service packs are now installed according to this method. The soft keys on 
the control for installing service packs have been omitted.
� Since the update procedure itself is now capable of stopping the 
NC software in order to perform an update, the procedure for stopping the 
NC software via the Control Panel has been omitted.
� In addition, analogous to the iTNC without Windows, manual binary to ASCII 
conversion is no longer necessary. This can now also be performed during 
the update procedure. A warning appears if no automatic conversion is 
possible.
Automated update
If one of the following directories exists when an iTNC with Windows is 
booted, 
- D:\install\ (D: corresponds to the TNC partition) or, if a USB memory 
device is connected 
- G:\install\ (G: corresponds to the drive letter of the USB memory device – 
network drivesare not permitted!) 
and if a setup.ini control file is saved in this directory, then an automated 
update is performed according to the instructions in this control file (see 
“Control file for automatic update (setup.ini)” on page 1 – 34). If this file does 
not exist, the update must be started manually via the SETUP keyword.
An automated update is usually a part of a manual update. 
September 2005 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02 1 – 37
1.5 Additional Enhancements to NC Software 340 492-xx and 340 493-xx
Installation � The following changes were made to the Windows 2000 installation for 
newly delivered removable hard drives (HDR):
• Automatic Windows updates were deactivated
• The energy saver for the screen was deactivated
• Microsoft Hotfix KB814078 was loaded
• The Microsoft Java Virtual Machine (MSJVM) was removed
Note
HEIDENHAIN recommends deactivating the screen’s energy saver for 
existing installations.
1 – 38 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1.6 Hardware 
1.6.1 TE 520B
General 
information
The TE 520B is the same as the TE 530B, with a SPEC FCT key and keys for 
smarT.NC, but without a touchpad.
In some cases the TE 530B cannot be used because of its touchpad.
� The USB cable is longer than 36 m
� When using two operating panels, which are switched with the BTS 1xx, 
only one touchpad can be active (touchpad at X142).
The new TE 520B keyboard unit should be used in these cases.
TE 520B TNC operating panel without 
touchpad 
 
With function keys for the new smarT.NC 
operating mode, as well as the new 
SPEC FCT key for calling special TNC 
functions. 
 
The IV and V keys are snap-ons, and can be 
switched.
 
Id. Nr. 535 835-01
 
TE 520B
September 2005 Hardware 1 – 39
Dimensions
�
�
���
�	 �	
�����
	�
�
�
	
	�
�
�
��
	�������������
�
������������
�
�
�
��
��
�
���
���
�����
�����
��
	�
�
�
	
��
�
���
�	
�������������������
�
�
�
	�
��
�
�
���
���
���
�
��
������
1 – 40 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1.6.2 iTNC 530 Programming Station
iTNC 530 
programming 
station
The iTNC 530 programming station was revised:
� Keyboard adapted to the TE 520B: with SPEC FCT key and keys for 
smarT.NC, without touchpad
� No potentiometers
� New housing design
Included in delivery:
� Programming station software on CD
� TE 520B keyboard in new housing design with additional keys for smarT.NC 
and the soft keys
iTNC 530 programming station
TE 520B TNC operating panel without 
touchpad 
 
With function keys for the new smarT.NC 
operating mode, as well as the new 
SPEC FCT key for calling special TNC 
functions. 
 
The IV and V keys are snap-ons, and can be 
switched.
Id. Nr. 532 524-01 Programming station
September 2005 Hardware 1 – 41
Programming 
station with virtual 
keyboard
The programming station is now available just as software with an integral 
keyboard. The TNC-specific functions are called via a virtual keyboard using 
the mouse. All necessary keys are included, and so even without the separate 
TE 520B keyboard unit, you have a fully-functional programming station.
It is enabled with the USB dongle included in delivery. 
Id. Nr.: 386 753-02
Included in delivery:CD-ROM, USB dongle
Availability: Series (with release of NC software 340 49x-02)
Note
Your screen resolution must be at least 1280x 1024 pixels in order to use 
the virtual keyboard of the programming station.
1 – 42 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1.6.3 UV 106B
General 
information
Specifications
UV 106B power supply unit for analog 
HEIDENHAIN contouring controls 
 
The UV 106B power supply unit was 
designed so that the iTNC 530 could be 
used with a compact, coordinated system 
for analog nominal shaft-speed interfaces 
(+/– 10 V).
It supplies the iTNC 530 with the supply 
voltages necessary for operation.
The UV 106B (Id. Nr. 546 581-01) is being 
introduced as a replacement for the 
UV 106 (Id. Nr. 366 572-11).
UV 106B
Id. Nr. 546 581-01 UV 106B
Specifications UV 106B
Power supply 
(at X31)
400 Vac ± 10 %
50 Hz
Protection 6.3 A / gRL
Load capacity (5 V) 20 A
Power consumption Max. 400 W
Degree of protection IP 20
Module width 159 mm
Weight 4 kg
ID number 546 581-xx
September 2005 Hardware 1 – 43
Dimensions of 
UV 106B
����	��
���
	����
�	
��
1 – 44 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1.6.4 UV 105B (Non-HEIDENHAIN Inverter Systems)
General 
information
The UV 105B (Id. Nr. 532 556-01) was designed solely for the use of 
HEIDENHAIN controls in connection with non-HEIDENHAIN inverter systems. 
It is essential for the supply voltages of the HEIDENHAIN control units.
Specifications
UV 105B power supply unit for the 
operation of HEIDENHAIN controls with 
non-HEIDENHAIN inverter systems
UV 105B
Id. Nr. 532 556-01 UV 105B
Specifications UV 105B
Power supply 
(at X31)
400 Vac ± 10 %
50 Hz
Protection 6.3 A / gRL
Load capacity (5 V) 20 A
Power consumption Max. 400 W
Degree of protection IP 20
Module width 159 mm
Weight 3 kg
ID number 532 556-01
Warning
The UV 105B is not compatible with the UV 105 (Id. Nr. 344 980-xx), and 
no HEIDENHAIN inverter components can be operated with this supply 
voltage.
September 2005 Hardware 1 – 45
Status signals via 
ribbon cable
Connection:
X74: 5-V connection 
of the UV 105B
Connection:
Note
For the control to be able to evaluate the status signals of the power supply 
unit, the ribbon cable of the UV 105 must be connected with X69 of the 
control. 
50-pin ribbon 
connector
Assignment 50-pin ribbon 
connector
Assignment
1a to 5b +5 V 16b GND
6a to 7b +12 V 17a RDY.PS
8a +5 V (low-voltage 
separation)
17b GND
8b 0 V (low-voltage 
separation)
18a ERR.ILEAK
9a +15 V 18b GND
9b –15 V 19a PF.PS.AC (only 
UV 120, UV 140, 
UV 150, UR 2xx)
10a UZAN 19b GND
10b 0 V 20a Do not assign
11a IZAN 20b GND
11b 0 V 21a Do not assign
12a RES.PS 21b GND
12b 0 V 22a Do not assign
13a PF.PS.ZK 22b GND
13b GND 23a Reserved (SDA)
14a ERR.UZ.GR 23b GND
14b GND 24a Reserved (SLC)
15a ERR.IZ.GR 24b GND
15b GND 25a RES.LE
16a ERR.TMP 25b GND
Wire color of 5-V connection 5-V terminal on CC 42x
BK 0 V
RD +5 V
1 – 46 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
X31: Supply voltage 
for UV 105B
Supply voltage: 400 V ± 10 %
Connection:
Connecting terminal Assignment
U Phase 1 / 400 Vac ±10 % / 50 Hz to 60 Hz
V Phase 2 / 400 Vac ±10 % / 50 Hz to 60 Hz
 Equipment ground (YL/GY), 
≥ 10 mm2
Cable: 
Wire cross section: 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16) 
Line fuse: 
6.3 A (gRL) Siemens Sitor type
+Uz Positive dc-link voltage of the non-
HEIDENHAIN inverter system
–Uz Negative or reference potential of the dc-link 
voltage of the non-HEIDENHAIN inverter 
system
Cable: 
Wire cross section: 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16) 
The dc-link connection of the UV 105B is 
protected by the additional PCB on the 
non-HEIDENHAIN inverter system (4 A)
Tightening torque: 
for the connecting terminals 
0.7 Nm (6.5 - 7 lbs/in) 
Grounding terminal: 
≥ 10 mm2 (AWG 6) 
Strain relief: 
Ensure that the connecting cables are not subject to excessive strain
Note
� If you are using non-HEIDENHAIN inverter systems, you must connect 
the supply voltage to the terminals U and V via an isolating transformer 
(300 VA, basic insulation as per EN 50 178 and VDE 0550).
Warning
When using an isolating transformer, do not ground this isolating 
transformer on the secondary side!
The isolating transformer decouples the line voltage from ground. 
Grounding the isolating transformer on the secondary side leads to an 
addition of the dc-link voltage and the supply voltage. This could destroy the 
UV 105B!
Please keep this in mind in your circuit diagrams.
September 2005 Hardware 1 – 47
UZ: Supply of the 
UV 105B with UZ
Since the power to the UV 105B is supplied through the dc-link, the voltage 
fed into the dc-link by the motors that are still running can be used during line 
voltage failures. The UV 105B uses this voltage to maintain the power supply 
to the control until the non-HEIDENHAINinverter system has been shut down 
properly by the control.
Connecting 
terminals
Assignment
–UZ (–UDC) DC-link voltage –
+UZ (+UDC) DC-link voltage +
1 – 48 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
Dimensions for 
UV 105B
�
���
��
��
September 2005 Hardware 1 – 49
✎
1 – 50 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1 Update Information No. 15
1.1 Service Packs
The following service packs have been released:
Service pack NC software Release
340 490-02 SP1 340 490-02 October 2005
340 491-02 SP1 340 491-02 October 2005
340 492-02 SP1 340 492-02 October 2005
340 493-02 SP1 340 493-02 October 2005
Service pack NC software Release
340 490-02 SP2 340 490-02 November 2005
340 491-02 SP2 340 491-02 November 2005
340 492-02 SP2 340 492-02 November 2005
340 493-02 SP2 340 493-02 November 2005
Service pack NC software Release
340 490-02 SP3 340 490-02 December 2005
340 491-02 SP3 340 491-02 December 2005
340 492-02 SP3 340 492-02 December 2005
340 493-02 SP3 340 493-02 December 2005
Service pack NC software Release
340 490-02 SP4 340 490-02 February 2006
340 491-02 SP4 340 491-02 February 2006
340 492-02 SP4 340 492-02 February 2006
340 493-02 SP4 340 493-02 February 2006
April 2006 Service Packs 1 – 1
1.2 Hardware
There is a new, more powerful MC 422C for the standard versions of the 
iTNC 530. As of May 2006, this hardware replaces the single-processor 
version of the MC 422B.
The MC 422C will at first only be available in a single-processor version. Dual-
processor versions will continue to be delivered as MC 422B for the time 
being.
Properties of the MC 422C:
� Pentium III with 800 MHz
� 256 MB RAM
All accessories (e.g. SIK, HDR, etc.) for the new MC 422C hardware are 
identical to the hardware for the MC 422B.
Please note that the iTNC 530 software can only run on the MC 422C if the 
following software versions are installed:
� Id. Nr. 340 490/491-02: Service pack 05 available starting the middle of April 
2006
� Id. Nr. 340 422/423-13: New software version 340 42x-14 is planned
The main differences between the MC 422C and the MC 422B are:
� Instead of a two-row connector (X47), the connection of the PL 51x features 
a three-row connector (X147). 
HEIDENHAIN supplies an adapter cable for X147 (Id. Nr. 587 789-A5) with 
every MC 422C. This makes it possible to connect the PL 51x with the 
previous connection cable (371 045-xx). However, HEIDENHAIN does not 
recommend connecting the PL 51x with the 371 045-xx connection cable 
for a longer period of time. Instead you should use the 371 046-xx 
connection cable for the connection to X147.
� Connector X9 for additional analog outputs is missing. Only connector X8 
with six analog outputs is present. If this presents you with difficulties, 
please contact HEIDENHAIN.
� A second USB connection (X142) is located on the bottom of the housing of 
the MC 422C.
Main computer 
(standard version)
Signal inputs Id. Nr. of MC for 
BF 150 display unit
Replaces Id. Nr.
MC 422C
Without position encoder 
inputs (for CC 424)
– 587 929-01 387 173-01
5 position encoder inputs Position: 1 VPP/EnDat 587 932-01 387 181-01
10 position encoder 
inputs
587 934-01 387 189-01
1 – 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1.2.1 Important Notes about the MC 422C
Proceed as follows when replacing an MC 422B with an MC 422C:
� Use the MC 422B to install the 340 490/491-02 SP5 or 340 422/423-14 
software on the hard disk.
� Completely switch off your machine after you have finished the installation.
� Remove the MC 422B hardware. Remove the HDR on which the new 
software was installed. 
Please refer to the notes in the Technical Manual.
� Install the HDR in the new MC 422C hardware.
� Install the MC 422C and reconnect all connecting elements. Please refer to 
the connection overview of the MC 422C.
Warning
Regarding the MC 422C hardware, please note:
� The new MC 422C hardware only runs as of software 340 490/491-02 
service pack 5 or software 340 422/423-14 or higher.
� If you accidentally install a lower software version in connection with the 
MC 422C, then a corresponding error message appears when the control 
is booted. The boot procedure is aborted.
� If you have difficulties with this remodeling, your control doesn’t boot, or 
you want to exchange a defective MC 422B for an MC 422C, please 
contact the HEIDENHAIN service department.
Warning
Do not engage or disengage any connecting elements while the unit is 
under power!
April 2006 Hardware 1 – 3
1.2.2 Comparison of the Connections: MC422C and MC422B
MC 422C MC 422 B Connector Function
X1-X5
X6, X35-X38
Actual position value
X8 Nominal value output 1
X9 Nominal value output 2 
(only MC 422B)
X12 Touch trigger probe 1
X13 Touch trigger probe 2
X14 Measuring touch probe
X23 Handwheel
X26 Ethernet
X27 COM 1
X28 COM 2
X30 Spindle ref.
X34 24 V (UE)
X41 PLC output
X42 PLC input
X43 CRT display unit VGA/XGA
X44 24 V (PLC)
X45 Keyboard unit
X46 Machine operating panel
X47, X147 PL 51x
X48 Analog input
X49 TFT display unit VGA 
(640x480)
X121 Profibus
X125 Reserved
X131 Reserved
X141 USB
X142 USB
X149 TFT display unit XGA 
(1024x768)
X165 Reserved
����
����
���
��	�
��	�
1 – 4 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1.2.3 Connection Overview of MC 422C / 5 Position Encoder Inputs and CC 422 with 6 Control 
Loops
Warning
Do not engage or disengage any connecting elements while the unit is 
under power!
X1 to X5 Encoder for position 
X35 to X38 Vacant 
 
X15 to X20 Encoder for speed 
 
X51 to X60 PWM output 
 
X8 Nominal value output, analog 
X12 TS touch trigger probe 
X13 TT 130 touch trigger probe 
 
X23 Handwheel 
X26 Ethernet data interface 
X27 RS-232-C/V.24 data interface 
X28 RS-422/V.11 data interface 
 
 
X141, X142 USB interface 
 
X30 24 V reference signal for spindle 
X34 24 V for “control-is-ready” output 
X41 PLC output 
X42 PLC input 
X44 24 V PLC supply voltage 
 
X45 Keyboard unit 
X46 Machine operating panel 
X147 PLC expansion 
X48 PLC analog input 
X149 BF 150 monitor 
X131 Reserved 
 
X69 Power supply 
 
X121 Reserved 
X165, X166 Reserved 
 
 
X74 5-V power supply 
X150 Axis-specific drive release 
 
B Signal ground 
 
Equipment ground (YL/GN)
X150, X142 at bottom of 
housing
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
����
����
���
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
April 2006 Hardware 1 – 5
1.2.4 Dimensions of MC 422C / 5 Position Encoder Inputs and CC 422 with 6 Control Loops
Note
All dimensions are in millimeters [mm].
1 – 6 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual iTNC 530
1 Update Information No. 16
1.1 Overview
1.1.1 Released Service Packs
The following service packs were released for 340 422-12 and 340 423-12:
Service pack 4: December 2005
The following service packs were released for 340 480-12 and 340 481-12:
Service pack 4: December 2005
The following service packs were released for 340 490-02 and 340 491-02:
Service pack 1: October 2005
Service pack 2: November 2005
Service pack 3: December 2005
Service pack 4: February 2006
Service pack 5: April 2006
Service pack 6: May 2006
Service pack 7: July 2006 (SP 7 available as full version) 
The following service packs were released for 340 492-02 and 340 493-02:
Service pack 1: October 2005
Service pack 2: November 2005
Service pack 3: December 2005
Service pack 4: February 2006
Service pack 5: April 2006
Service pack 6: May 2006
Service pack 7: July 2006 (SP 7 available as full version) 
1.1.2 Released NC Software
The following versions of the NC software were released:
NC software 340 490-03 and 340 491-03 June 2006
NC software 340 492-03 and 340 493-03 June 2006
NC software 340 422-13 and 340 423-13 March 2006
NC software 340 480-13 and 340 481-13 March 2006
NC software 340 422-14 and 340 423-14 May 2006
NC software 340 480-14 and 340 481-14 May 2006
September 2006 Overview 1 – 1
1.2 NC Software 340 422-13/340 423-13 and 340 480-13/340 481-13
1.2.1 Description of the New Functions
Machine 
parametersFormula input for MPs expanded 
The following functions are possible for entering formulas (e.g., for Machine 
Parameter 1054):
• Exponential calculation with the ‘^’ character 
Example: MP1054.1:REF*0.1e^6+15 
(REF in 0.0001 [mm])
• Entry of ‘x’ instead of ‘REF’ (shorter)
New: MP7691.3 – Kernel-Trace 
Size of the log file with messages from the NC kernel. 10 files are created 
that are 10·[MP7691.3] kilobytes large. 
TNC:\KLOG\ 0.log – 9.log 
Input: Each file with 1 to 10 [KB] 
 0: Inactive (default)
Changed: MP7420 bit 4 – Cycles for milling pockets with combined 
contours 
Position after completion of the cycle. 
Input: 0: Tool moves to the same position as before the cycle was 
called 
 1: iTNC moves in the tool axis to the “clearance height”
Changed: MP2630.x 
The input range was extended. 
Input: –100.000 to +100.000 [A]
PLC programming New: Marker 4186 
The PLC marker 4186 is set at the start of an NC program in the Test Run 
mode of operation.
New: Marker 4187 
The PLC marker 4187 is set when the Power interrupted message is 
displayed. It is deleted after the compilation of the PLC program.
iTNC – Operation 
and technique
SHUTDOWN soft key 
During control start-up, the SHUTDOWN soft key is now already available in 
the Power interrupted state.
Test current for switch-off test 
Before the switch-off test, the current is measured in order to determine the 
test current. This function can be deactivated with MP560 bit 5 = 1.
Profibus diagnosis 
The current Profibus cycle time is displayed on the basic screen in PLC 
mode, provided that a Profibus is connected.
HR 420 pop-up window 
The size of the pop-up window that appears when the HR 420 handwheel 
is activated was reduced so that it takes up only a small portion of the 
control screen.
1 – 2 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
Other functions Executing cycles with two spindles 
Up to now, it was not possible to program certain cycles with an open-loop 
first spindle and a closed-looped second spindle (Cycles 13, 17, 18, 202, 
204, 207, 209). These cycles can now be programmed if one of the two 
spindles is a closed-loop spindle. 
Languages 
The Czech texts are now displayed with language-specific special 
characters.
Character set for Unicode 
The character set for Unicode was expanded.
The help texts were expanded and improved.
Entries into the log were expanded and improved.
September 2006 NC Software 340 422-13/340 423-13 and 340 480-13/340 481-13 1 – 3
1.3 NC Software 340 422-14/340 423-14 and 340 480-14/340 481-14
1.3.1 Description of the New Functions
Machine 
parameters
New: MP7392 – Time after which the screen saver becomes active 
Input: 1 to 99 [min] 
0: No screen saver
iTNC – Operation 
and technique
Support of the new MC 422C hardware
1 – 4 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
1.4 NC Software 340 490-01/340 491-01 and 340 492-01/340 493-01
1.4.1 Important Notes
With the introduction of the diagnosable UM 1xxD power modules, the rated 
current and maximum current of some power modules were increased. The 
MOTOR.AMP table for power modules was therefore expanded by the new 
types of power modules. The increased currents were unfortunately not 
considered. This means that the current NC software versions contain a 
MOTOR.AMP to which the new types, but not the correct currents, were 
added. This applies to the power modules listed below: 
UM 112D (ID 519 971-xx)
UM 122D (ID 519 972-xx)
UM 113D (ID 518 703-xx)
UM 114D (ID 510 509-xx)
If such a power module is operated with the “old” MOTOR.AMP, this may 
result in reduced surface quality of the workpiece.
Starting with service pack 1, the NC software already includes the updated 
MOTOR.AMP. This software, as well as the updated MOTOR.AMP, can be 
downloaded from the HEIDENHAIN Filebase (NC-INFO). 
After updating, check the settings of the affected control loops.
Please also check any user-defined MOTOR.AMP on the PLC partition, which 
is preferably used by the control, but cannot be updated during installation of 
a service pack. 
1.4.2 Service Packs
The following service packs have been released:
Warning
This NC software is executable only on the MC 422B and the MC 420, 
each with 128 MB of RAM. 
The BF 120 (resolution: 640 x 480 pixels) is no longer supported.
Service pack NC software Release
340 490-01 SP1 340 490-01 March 2005
340 491-01 SP1 340 491-01 March 2005
340 492-01 SP1 340 492-01 March 2005
340 493-01 SP1 340 493-01 March 2005
Service pack NC software Release
340 490-01 SP2 340 490-01 June 2005
340 491-01 SP2 340 491-01 June 2005
340 492-01 SP2 340 492-01 June 2005
340 493-01 SP2 340 493-01 June 2005
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-01/340 491-01 and 340 492-01/340 493-01 1 – 5
1.5 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02
1.5.1 Important Notes
Upgrade functions 
(Feature Content 
Level)
Until now, each new NC software version contained error fixes as well as 
expanded functions. Users who wanted only the NC software update to 
eliminate the errors often felt bothered by the expanded functions. For this 
reason, error fixes and expanded functions will now be handled separately 
within the software.
If a new NC software is later loaded as an update onto a machine with 
NC software 340 490-01, then as the default setting only the error fixes 
contained will be effective. The upgrade functions will at first remain 
inactive. The upgrade functions can then be enabled by entering a code 
number. HEIDENHAIN can give you the code number after having been 
informed of the SIK number and NC software version.
The upgrade functions are defined as “feature content level” (FCL) in the 
SIK under option #53. 
The first time an NC software with upgrade functionality is installed on a 
control (i.e. no FCL has been set in the SIK), then the entire scope of 
functions can be used (including the upgrade functions.). 
The FCL is then automatically set after 100 restarts, or by entry of the code 
number 0 under option #53, and all upgrade functions belonging to this 
software version are enabled as well. 
A note appears asking to confirm the installed NC software as the initial 
version, or if another initial software version is to be installed. 
If the FCL has already been set in the SIK of a control, then after an update 
(e.g. from software 340 490-02 to -03), the new upgrade functions of the 
newer software version can only be used after entry of a code number from 
HEIDENHAIN.
After pressing the MOD key, the current status of the FCL is displayed in 
addition to the software versions.
The FCL is incremented with each new version of the NC software.
If the upgrade functions are enabled via the FCL for a software version, 
then all upgrade functions of this software version and all its predecessors 
are available. For example, if the FCL for version 340 490-03 is set, then all 
upgrade functions from version 340 490-02 are also available immediately.
1 – 6 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
If a newer software version, e.g. 340 490-06, is simply loaded onto a control, 
then the already existing upgrade functions remain available, but the 
upgrade functions of the newer version cannot be used. They must be 
enabled by entering a new code number. 
Executability of 
SW 340 49x-02
Warning
This NC software is executable only on the MC 422B and the MC 420, 
each with 128 MB of RAM. 
The BF 120 (resolution: 640 x 480 pixels) is no longer supported.
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-02/340 491-02 and 340 492-02/340 493-02 1 – 7
1.6 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03
1.6.1 Important Notes
Memory expansion for Feature Content Level 03 
The increase of the Feature Content Level to 03 leads to problems with 
some of the new features if the MC does not have enough main memory. 
If the MC being used has no more than 128 MB of main memory, then it is 
not possible to activate the context-sensitive help system or the Asian 
languages. 
The first timethat you activate Feature Content Level 03, a dialog window 
appears after the control has been booted stating that the main memory of 
the MC does not suffice for the context-sensitive help or the Asian 
languages. You can acknowledge this message with the OK soft key. If you 
try to call these functions in the future, the Not enough main memory error 
message appears. Acknowledge this error message by pressing the CE key. 
In order to use all features without any limitations, you must increase the 
main memory of your control to at least 256 MB. Please contact the 
HEIDENHAIN service department for this. You do not need to increase the 
main memory if you do not want to use the help system or the Asian 
languages. This does not impair any of the other features. 
Since February 2006, all MC 420 (index A), MC 422B (index A) and 
MC 422C main computers are shipped with a main memory of 256 MB. 
The RAM of the MC can be checked in the herosdiagnose.txt file. The RAM 
of the MC is listed in [kB] under the Total Memory heading. 
Proceed as follows to create the herosdiagnose.txt file:
While in the Programming and Editing operating mode, press the MOD key.
Press the DIAGNOSIS soft key, and then the HEROS DIAGNOSIS soft key.
Going back to 340 49x-02 
Software 340 49x-02 service pack 07 is available as a full version in order to 
go back to software 340 49x-02 from software 340 49x-03 on an MC 422C. 
This way you do not have to first install the 340 49x-02 basic version and 
then install the appropriate service pack. This would lead to a control using 
an MC 422C no longer being operable, since the basic version of software 
340 49x-02 does not support the MC 422C.
Note
When going back to 340 49x-02 from 340 49x-03, install the 
340 49x-02 SP7 software immediately in order to avoid problems!
1 – 8 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
1.6.2 Service Packs
The following service packs have been released:
Service pack NC software Release
340 490-02 SP1 340 490-02 October 2005
340 491-02 SP1 340 491-02 October 2005
340 492-02 SP1 340 492-02 October 2005
340 493-02 SP1 340 493-02 October 2005
Service pack NC software Release
340 490-02 SP2 340 490-02 November 2005
340 491-02 SP2 340 491-02 November 2005
340 492-02 SP2 340 492-02 November 2005
340 493-02 SP2 340 493-02 November 2005
Service pack NC software Release
340 490-02 SP3 340 490-02 December 2005
340 491-02 SP3 340 491-02 December 2005
340 492-02 SP3 340 492-02 December 2005
340 493-02 SP3 340 493-02 December 2005
Service pack NC software Release
340 490-02 SP4 340 490-02 February 2006
340 491-02 SP4 340 491-02 February 2006
340 492-02 SP4 340 492-02 February 2006
340 493-02 SP4 340 493-02 February 2006
Service pack NC software Release
340 490-02 SP5 340 490-02 April 2006
340 491-02 SP5 340 491-02 April 2006
340 492-02 SP5 340 492-02 April 2006
340 493-02 SP5 340 493-02 April 2006
Service pack NC software Release
340 490-02 SP6 340 490-02 May 2006
340 491-02 SP6 340 491-02 May 2006
340 492-02 SP6 340 492-02 May 2006
340 493-02 SP6 340 493-02 May 2006
Service pack NC software Release
340 490-02 SP7 340 490-02 July 2006
340 491-02 SP7 340 491-02 July 2006
340 492-02 SP7 340 492-02 July 2006
340 493-02 SP7 340 493-02 July 2006
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 9
1.6.3 Description of the New Functions
New options and 
upgrade functions
The following options are enabled by entering a code number. HEIDENHAIN 
can give you the code number after having been informed of the SIK number.
Option Description ID
#41 Additional Languages 
The following languages are now available as 
additional dialog languages:
Slovak 530 184-02
Latvian 530 184-03
Norwegian 530 184-04
Korean 530 184-06
Estonian 530 184-07
#44 Global PGM Settings: Possibility of 
superimposing various coordinate 
transformations and settings in the program-run 
modes of operation.
576 057-01
#45 AFC Adaptive Feed Control: With adaptive feed 
control the TNC automatically regulates the 
contouring feed rate after a teach-in cut 
depending on the respective spindle power in 
percent.
579 648-01
1 – 10 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
#53 Upgrade functions as Feature Content Level 03 
(FCL), see page 1 – 6
529 969-01
TNCguide, context-sensitive help system 
(user documentation)
smarT.NC functions:
Feed-rate reduction during machining of 
contour pockets 
When clearing out a contour pocket, traverse 
paths where the tool is in full engagement 
result, such as in narrow channels or when 
shifting to the next clearance path. Now you can 
define a percent value by which the TNC 
reduces the feed rate in such situations.
New UNITs for presetting 
The new UNITs 408 and 409 are available for 
presetting in the center of a slot or a ridge.
Contour pocket on point pattern 
The new UNIT 130 was introduced with which 
any contour pocket can be machined on any 
point pattern.
Parallel programming 
In the Programming and Editing mode of 
operation you can now also use the smarT.NC 
user interface. If an .HU program is selected, 
the TNC automatically starts smarT.NC. If you 
want to open an .HU program with the plain 
language dialog editor, use the OPEN WITH 
function in order to select which editor the TNC 
should start.
Behavior between two machining points 
An approach height can now be defined for 
each machining point in a point pattern. The 
TNC then approaches this position at the height 
you defined. Use: Moving over chips or other 
hindrances
Plain-language programming functions:
Feed-rate reduction during machining of 
contour pockets 
When clearing out a contour pocket, traverse 
paths where the tool is in full engagement 
result, such as in narrow channels or when 
shifting to the next clearance path. Now you can 
use parameter Q401 to define a percent value 
by which the TNC reduces the feed rate in such 
situations.
Option Description ID
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 11
#53 Upgrade functions as Feature Content Level 03 
(FCL), see page 1 – 6
529 969-01
Touch probe functions:
New probe cycles for presetting 
The new touch-probe cycles 408 and 409 are 
available for presetting in the center of a slot or 
a ridge.
New 3-D probing cycle 
The new touch-probe Cycle 4 is available, with 
which you can perform a measurement in 
three dimensions. You define the direction of 
traverse via three incremental traverse paths in 
X, Y and Z. You can receive the results of the 
measurement in either the workpiece or the 
machine coordinate system.
Option Description ID
1 – 12 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
Machine 
parameters
New: MP732 – Axis-error compensation for rotary axes 
With MP732, the non-linear axis-error compensation (activated via MP730) 
can be projected onto the traverse range for a specific axis. This is especially 
useful when using rotary axes with a limited traverse range. Instead of the 
previous range of 0° to 360°, you can now make entries of –90° to +90°, for 
example. 
Input: %987654321 bit-encoded 
0: Previous behavior 
1: Active
New: MP1012.x – Second axis-specific rapid traverse 
With MP1012.x you can enter a second axis-specific rapid traverse as an 
alternative to MP1010.x. 
Use the FN17: SYSWRITE ID 20 NR 18 = <value> function to switch between 
the two machine parameters. MP1012 can only be used in the Program Run, 
Single Block, Program Run, Full Sequence and MDI operating modes. 
<value> = 0: MP1010 and MP1011 active 
<value> = 1: MP1012 active, MP1011 not active, meaning that the possible 
increase in the contouring feed rate is not limited. 
The rapid traverse from MP1010 in connection with MP1011 is always 
active at program end and when a program is first selected. 
Input: 10 to 300 000 [mm/min or °/min]
New: MP1085.x – Axis-specific jerk for contouring movements 
With MP1085.x you set an axis-specific maximum permissible jerk for 
motions in the Program Run, Single Block,Program Run, Full Sequence 
and MDI operating modes, as long as the feed rate is not equal to FMAX or 
is less than the value in MP1092. Until now, this value was set for all axes 
in MP1090.0. 
The value in MP1090.0 will continue to be used as the maximum 
permissible jerk for motions in all axes. Even with interpolating axes this 
value is the maximum jerk for the entire machine. 
The formula shown can be used to calculate a guide value for MP1085. The 
formula is conceived for the calculated jerk to be large enough that the 
acceleration of the axis is not impaired. Input:0.1 to 1000 [m/s3]
MP1085 MP10602 60000×
MP1010
------------------------------------------------≥
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 13
New: MP1086.x – Axis-specific jerk for rapid-traverse movements 
With MP1086.x you set an axis-specific maximum permissible jerk for 
motions in the Program Run, Single Block, Program Run, Full Sequence 
and MDI operating modes, if the feed rate is equal to FMAX or is greater than 
the value in MP1092. Until now, this value was set for all axes in MP1090.1. 
The value in MP1090.1 will continue to be used as the maximum 
permissible jerk for rapid-traverse movements in all axes. Even with 
interpolating axes this value is the maximum jerk for the entire machine. 
The formula shown can be used to calculate a guide value for MP1086. The 
formula is conceived for the calculated jerk to be large enough that the 
acceleration of the axis is not impaired. 
Input: 0.1 to 1000 [m/s3] 
0: Not active (then also for FMAX value in MP1085.x)
If you enter a jerk for one or more axes (e.g. rotary axes) that is lower than the 
value previously (before 340 49x-03) entered in MP1090.x, reduced speeds 
can occur during contouring movements. However, this behavior only occurs 
if you used MP1090.x to subject axes to a greater than ideal load for the axes. 
If you want to avoid this behavior, then you must enter the same values in 
MP1085.x or MP1086.x and MP1090.x, which results in the same behavior as 
previously (340 490-02). However, this leads to a loss of the speed advantage 
gained with the interpolation of axes with NC software 340 49x-03. The 
calculated path jerk is always ≥ to the smallest axis-specific jerk of the 
participating axes.
New: MP1205 – Reduction of the starting feed rate 
MP1205 was introduced in order to lower the contouring feed rate at the 
beginning of a contour element. This slower contouring feed rate can be 
used to improve the accuracy when machining corners at contour 
transitions. 
MP1205 is only in effect if MP7684 bit 10 = 0, which activates the changed 
calculation of the feed rate for the beginning of a contour element. 
Input: 0: Not active (fast but somewhat less precise) 
1: Active (slow but likely more precise)
New CC 424: MP2184.x – Reserved 
Input: 0
New CC 424: MP2186.x – Speed-dependent switching of the PWM 
frequency 
MP2186.x specifies the shaft speed at which the PWM frequency ≤ 5 kHz 
is switched to twice the PWM frequency (see page 1 – 64). 
Input: 0 to 100 000 [rpm]
MP1086 MP10602 60000×
MP1010
------------------------------------------------≥
Note
HEIDENHAIN recommends entering the permissible jerk for each axis in 
MP1085.x and MP 1086.x. This way the jerk is based on the weakest axis 
participating in a motion. The value in MP1090.x should be chosen 
correspondingly greater than until now (340 49x-02) or greater than the 
largest axis-specific jerk (or the value 0 should be entered to omit limiting 
by MP1090.x) so that the control has the possibility of using the optimum 
jerk and therefore the optimum acceleration for interpolating axes.
1 – 14 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
New CC 424: MP2188.x – Speed-dependent switching of the PWM 
frequency 
MP2188.x specifies the shaft speed at which the original PWM frequency 
(≤ 5 kHz) is returned to (from twice the PWM frequency > 5 kHz as the 
result of MP2186.x). 
 MP2188.x must be < MP2186.x (see page 1 – 64). 
Input: 0 to 100 000 [rpm]
New CC 424: MP2192 – Trigger threshold for LIFTOFF 
With MP2192 you enter a percent value of the dc-link voltage Uz as trigger 
threshold for the detection of a powerfail. If the dc-link voltage Uz drops 
below the value resulting from MP2192, an NC stop and LIFTOFF are 
performed. 
If you enter the value 0 for MP2192, only the UV ready signal is monitored. 
If you enter a value in MP2192 greater than the typical value of 400 V for a 
powerfail, LIFTOFF is performed correspondingly earlier and with more 
energy in the dc-link. MP2192 must be > MP2194. 
The entered value must be > 400 V for this function to be useful. 
HEIDENHAIN recommends a value of 80%. 
Input: 0 to 100 [%]
New CC 424: MP2194 – DC-link voltage as of which the spindle is 
braked in a powerfail 
With MP2194 you enter a voltage value in [V] of the dc-link voltage. If the dc-
link voltage Uz drops below the value in MP2194, the spindle is actively 
braked. 
Normally energy is recovered during braking of the axes with LIFTOFF. This 
does not apply to linear motors with poor efficiency. Here energy is needed 
in order to brake an axis. This means that a load is placed on the dc-link 
during the braking procedure. In certain circumstances this can mean that 
there is no longer enough energy to perform LIFTOFF. The only energy 
source in the system may be a rotating spindle. If the dc-link voltage drops 
below the value in MP2194, the spindle is braked and energy is recovered. 
This should make enough energy available in order to perform LIFTOFF 
completely. 
The entered value must be > 400 V for this function to be useful. 
HEIDENHAIN recommends a value of 450 V. 
Input: 0 to 3000 [V]
New: MP2208.x – Inductivity of the series reactor 
With MP2208.x you can overwrite the value for “Inductivity of the series 
reactor L” in the motor table. 
Input: * = Entry from the motor table active 
Value of the series reactor in [µH]
Warning
This function can only be used in combination with regenerative 
HEIDENHAIN inverters.
Refer to the notes about the LIFTOFF function in the Technical Manual.
Warning
This function can only be used in combination with regenerative 
HEIDENHAIN inverters.
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 15
New: MP2209.x – Mass moment of inertia of a drive motor 
With MP2209.x you can overwrite the value for “Mass moment of inertia J” 
in the motor table. This makes it possible to react to additional, rigidly 
coupled inertias. 
Input: * = Entry from the motor table active 
Value of the mass moment of inertia in [kgm2]
New CC 424: MP2640.x – Torsion compensation 
With MP2640.x you can perform a torsion compensation between the 
position and speed measuring systems. The torsion compensation 
regulates the difference in position that results from the elasticities 
between the motor (rotary encoder) and the position measuring system. An 
additional torsion motion is added to the speed controller. In MP2640.x you 
enter a factor for each drive for the elasticity. HEIDENHAIN recommends 
using MP2640 as a replacement for MP2606, since MP2640 can be used to 
take additional effects into account. 
Input: 0.001 to 30.000 [µm/A] 
0: Not active 
 
The block diagram shows how the torsion compensation works:
• 1: Torsion compensation
• 2: Position controller
• 3: Speed controller
• 4: Current controller – power module
• 5: Motor
• 6: Elastic coupling
• 7: Machine
• 8: Linear encoder
1 – 16 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
New: MP3350 and MP3351 – Monitoring of the spindle speed 
With MP3350 and MP3351 you set the maximum permitted excess spindle 
speed. An NC stop with a subsequent emergency stop is trigged if the 
actual spindle speed is greater than the nominal spindle speed + the 
permitted excess speed. With this function you can also have the spindle be 
monitored for unexpected start-up. 
In MP3350 you enter a relative value in percent, and in MP3351 as absolute 
value,for the permissible excess speed. The absolute value in MP3351 is 
only used if the absolute value that results from MP3350 is less than the 
value in MP3351. 
If you want to use monitoring of the spindle speed for spindles with gear 
stages, then you should be more generous with the tolerance that results 
from MP3350 and MP3351, since the spindle speed can vary significantly 
when switching between the gear stages. 
Input MP3350: 0 to 100 [%] 
Input MP3351: 0.001 to 100 000.000 [rpm] 
0: Monitoring off
New: MP3530 and MP13530 – Increased spindle power for roughing 
With MP3530 and MP13530 you can avoid a reduction in the maximum 
spindle power during roughing due to changes in load when the tool’s teeth 
are engaged in the material. 
Here the spindle speed is increased higher than previously when there is no 
load. It is now increased above the nominal speed, which was not the case 
previously. Energy is stored in the inertia of the spindle, and is then available 
when the teeth engage the material. This increases the mean power, and 
the mean speed corresponds to the nominal speed. 
If MP3530 or MP13530 are set, an overshoot can occur when the nominal 
speed is reached. If this overshoot impairs the performance, then you may 
have to deactivate the increase of the spindle power. 
Input: 0: Not active 
1: Increased spindle power for roughing
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 17
Expanded: MP4310.x – Miscellaneous PLC parameters 
The input range was expanded with the MP4310.7, MP4310.8 and 
MP4310.9 indexes. These are saved to the corresponding PLC memories. 
MP4310.7 to M4412-M4427 or W990 
MP4310.8 to M4428-M4443 or W992 
MP4310.9 to M4444-M4459 or W994
Expanded: MP7230.x – Conversational language 
MP7230.18 = Norwegian (Option #41) 
MP7230.19 = Slovak (Option #41) 
MP7230.20 = Latvian (Option #41) 
MP7230.21 = Korean (Option #41) 
MP7230.22 = Estonian (Option #41)
New: MP7246 bit 3 – Settings file for AFC (Adaptive Feed Control) 
By setting MP7246 bit 3, the *.H.AFC.DEP table for control settings is 
generated for the adaptive feed control in a teach-in cut. 
Input: 0: Do not generate settings file for AFC 
1: Generate settings file for AFC
New: MP7263 bit 2 – Display the “Edit ON/OFF” soft key in the pocket 
table 
MP7263 bit 2 can be used to hide the “Edit ON/OFF” soft key when 
displaying the pocket table. This makes it possible to prevent manual editing 
of the pocket table. 
Input: 0: Display soft key 
1: Do not display soft key
New: MP7362.4 – Background: Unselected tab 
You can use MP7362.4 to select the color of the unselected tabs in the 
graphics window. 
Default setting: $0C0C0C0
New: MP7392.1 – Type of screen saver 
With MP7392.1 you select the type of screen saver that starts after the time 
in MP7392.0 expires. 
Input: 0: No screen saver 
1: Default screen saver of the X server 
2: 3-D line graphics
New: MP7432 – Limit-switch tolerance for M140/M150 
With MP7432 you can enter a tolerance for the limit switches. The limit 
switches can then be traversed with M140/M150 by this tolerance without 
an error message. 
Retraction with M140/M150 can still be performed if a limit value has been 
entered and the axes are still within the tolerance. If the axes are still within 
the tolerance, they can even be moved outside of the traverse range, but 
only to another limit switch. 
If one or more axes that are already slightly outside the limit-switch range 
are to be moved to the same limit switch, the axes are not moved. No limit-
switch error message appears if the axes are still within the tolerance of the 
limit switch. 
Input: 0.0001 to 1.0000 [mm] 
0: Limit-switch tolerance off
New: MP7483 – Tool name/number for TOOL CALL 
With MP7483 you specify if the tool name or number or both can be used 
for TOOL CALL/TOOL DEF. For example, if a tool number is used even 
though only tool names are allowed (MP7483 = 1), an NC error message is 
output. 
Input: 0: Names and numbers are permitted (as before) 
1: Only names are permitted 
2: Only numbers are permitted
1 – 18 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
New: MP7506 – Selection of kinematics at booting 
With MP7506 you can make an advance selection of which entry in the 
kinematics table is to become active when the control is booted. Selection 
is made by entering the line number of the desired kinematics in 
KINELIST.TAB. 
Input: 0 to 999 
–1: Function not active
New: MP7630 – Recovery time after EMERGENCY STOP test is 
configurable 
If you use protective contactor combinations, this may lead to problems if 
the EMERGENCY STOP test is also performed with these combinations. 
The reason for this is the recovery time of such assemblies after an 
emergency stop. In some cases it is greater than 200 ms. 
In order to maintain these specifications, the “Control is ready” output 
(X41/34) remains off for the time in MP7630 after detecting the 0 level at the 
“control-is-ready signal acknowledgment” input (X42/4). This time for step 
4 (see flowchart) can now be configured in MP7630. This time is to be set 
so that the protective contactor combinations can become ready again. 
Input: 0: Previous behavior 
1 to 999 [ms]
New: MP7672.x – HR 410, distance per handwheel step 
If MP7641 bit 1 is set, then with MP7672.x you can set the distance per 
handwheel step for the HR 410. Different distances per step can be set for 
three speed stages. 
Input: 0.0000 to 1.0000 [mm]
New: MP7674.x – Handwheel subdivision factor 
MP7674.x can always be used to set a minimum axis-specific subdivision 
factor for the HR 130, HR 330, and HR 332. It can be used for the HR 410 if 
MP7641 bit 1 is not set (without detent encoder). 
Input: 0: No limitation 
1 to 10
Note
Please note that with this feature, the same kinematics are always active 
whenever the control is booted. If you change the actual kinematics of the 
machine before booting, this is not taken into account. The kinematics set 
via MP7506 are still active after booting even after such a change.
������
�����
� �	
��� � �
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 19
New: MP7675.x – Handwheel maximum distance 
MP7675.x has no meaning for the HR 130, HR 330, or HR 332. 
If MP7641 bit 1 is set (with detent encoder) for the HR 410 or HR 420 , then 
a maximum distance in [mm] per detent can be entered for each axis. 
If MP7641 bit 1 is not set (without detent encoder) for the HR 420 , then a 
maximum distance in [mm] per handwheel revolution can be entered for 
each axis. 
These limitations serve to prevent the movement monitoring from 
becoming active because of abrupt motions resulting from handwheels with 
large gear ratios on axes with poor dynamics. 
Input: 0: No limitation 
0.0001 to 10.0000 [mm]
New: MP7682 bit 8 – Behavior of M8 
You can control the behavior of M8 at the end of cycles 202 and 204 with 
MP7682 bit 8. 
Input: 
0: At the end of cycles 202 and 204, the status of M8 is restored to that 
before the cycle call (behavior unit now). 
1: At the end of cycles 202 and 204, the status of M8 is not restored 
automatically.
New: MP7682 bit 9 – Load tilted working plane 
With MP7682 bit 9 you control whether the status of the Tilt working 
plane function in an NC program is loaded into the Manual operating mode 
during a program interruption. 
Input: 
0: The status of the Tilt working plane function is not loaded into the 
Manual operating mode during a program interruption (behavior until now). 
1: The status of the Tilt working plane function is loaded into the Manual 
operating mode during a program interruption.
New: MP7684 bit 10 – Modification of the calculation of the contouring 
feed rate 
MP7684 bit 10 introduced a modified calculation of the contouring feed rate 
at the beginning of a contour element. The modified calculation improves 
the surface quality at contour transitions, which can lessen the accuracy at 
corners. This can be deactivated by setting MP7684 bit10. 
Input: 0: Active 
1: Previous behavior
New: MP13350 and MP13351 – Monitoring of the spindle speed 
With MP13350 and MP13351 you set the maximum permitted excessive 
spindle speed. 
(see MP3350 and MP3351) 
Input MP13350: 0 to 100 [%] 
Input MP13351: 0.001 to 100 000.000 [rpm] 
 0: Monitoring off
Changed: MP1090.x – Limiting the path jerk 
Limits the path jerk that results from MP1085.x or MP1086.x. MP1090.0 
takes effect for movements not at FMAX or when the feed rate is less than 
the value in MP1092. MP1090.1 takes effect for movements at FMAX or 
when the feed rate is greater than the value in MP1092. This limitation can 
be switched off by entering the value 0 in MP1090.x. 
Input: 0.1 to 1000 [m/s3] 
 0: Not active
Changed: MP1820 and MP1830 – Multiplication factor and 
characteristic curve kink point 
The characteristic curve kink point for operation with servo lag, defined via 
MP1820 and MP1830, can now also be used with the CC 424.
1 – 20 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
Changed: MP1092 – Feed-rate threshold for MP1085.x and MP1086.x 
With MP1092 you specify a feed-rate threshold for the various jerk 
parameters in MP1085.x and MP1086.x. 
If the programmed feed rate is less than the value in MP1092, the 
parameters in MP1085.x apply. If the programmed feed rate is greater than 
the value in MP1092, the parameters in MP1086.x apply. This way you have 
the same behavior as previously for all axes via MP1090.0 and MP1090.1. 
Enter the value 0 in MP1092 to deactivate this feed-rate limit. Then the jerk 
parameters from MP1085.x apply to movements not at rapid traverse. The 
values in MP1086.x become active for movements at FMAX. 
Input: 1 to 300 000 [mm/min] (behavior until now) 
0: Not active
Changed: MP2050 – Functionality of drive enabling 
MP2050 can now also be overwritten by the PLC or the LSV2 protocol.
Changed: MP2100 – Type of axis power modules 
A change to MP2100 no longer leads to an automatic restart.
Changed: MP2150 – Powerfail 
MP2150 can now also be overwritten by the PLC or the LSV2 protocol.
Changed: MP2182.x – Current controller cycle time 
Set MP2182.x = 2 if you want to use automatic PWM frequency switching. 
The PWM frequency of a power stage is then doubled at a certain speed, 
based on a PWM frequency ≤ 5 kHz. In MP2186.x and MP2188.x you define 
the speeds at which switching occurs. The current controller cycle time is 
always (if MP2182.x = 2) based on the high PWM frequency.
Changed: MP2195 – Suppress error message of the HEIDENHAIN 
supply units 
MP2155 can now also be overwritten by the PLC or the LSV2 protocol.
Changed: MP2420.x – Proportional factor for the current controller 
Automatic calculation of the P factor for synchronous and asynchronous 
motors is now possible. Automatic calculation is not to be used for linear 
synchronous and torque motors. 
The calculated value is entered in the MP file. An * is appended to the 
calculated value to show that the parameter was determined automatically. 
Input: 0 to 9999.99 [V/A] 
* = automatic calculation of the P factor
Changed: MP2430.x – Integral factor for the current controller 
Automatic calculation of the I factor for synchronous and asynchronous 
motors is now possible. Automatic calculation is not to be used for linear 
synchronous and torque motors. 
The calculated value is entered in the MP file. An * is appended to the 
calculated value to show that the parameter was determined automatically. 
Input: 0 to 9999.99 [V/A] 
* = automatic calculation of the I factor
Changed: MP2630.x – Holding current for vertical axes 
The input range was extended. 
Input: –100.000 to +100.000 [A]
Changed: MP3142 and MP13142 – Line count of the rotary encoder on 
the spindle 
The input range was extended. 
Input: 100 to 100 000 [lines]
Changed: MP7260 to MP7267 
MP7260 to MP7267 can now also be overwritten by the PLC or the LSV2 
protocol.
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 21
Changed: MP7261.x – Size of the pocket tables 
The input range was extended. 
Input: 0 to 9999
Changed: MP7246 bit 0 – MP with multiple function 
Disabling of the generation of paraxial positioning blocks via MP7246 bit 0 is 
available again. 
Input: 0: Generation permitted 
1: Generation not permitted
Changed: MP7266.x – Tool table: Tool data 
The input range was extended by the index MP7266.40. 
MP7266.40 for AFC: Control strategy name for “Adaptive Feed Control”
Removed: MP7235 – Time difference to the Universal Time set in the 
BIOS 
This is now realized with the Set System Time dialog box. Open this dialog 
box by pressing the MOD key in the Programming and Editing operating 
mode, and then the SET DATE/TIME soft key.
1 – 22 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
PLC programming
In connection with this, a possibility for outputting the cause of the last PLC 
run-time error was introduced. PLC word W1002 can be used to determine 
the last PLC run-time error that led to the stop of PLC program execution.
If a PLC run-time error occurs, the generated error code is saved in W1002 and 
simultaneously in the remanent memory of the control. When a new PLC run-
time error occurs, W1002 and the value in the remanent memory are 
overwritten. 
If the control is restarted or a PLC program start is triggered in some other 
manner (by Compile, Restart PLC or acknowledgment of PLC run-time errors), 
the value in W1002 regenerates itself via the information in the remanent 
memory. Once the value has been entered in W1002 again, this information 
is deleted from the remanent memory. This way the last PLC run-time error is 
always available in W1002, even after the PLC is restarted. In addition, the 
error code can already be seen in the PLC table as early as in the Power 
interrupted status after the control has been restarted.
The error code in W1022 can be output and evaluated in the PLC program. The 
following applies to the evaluation of the error code, which should be 
performed during the first PLC run-through:
• W1002 = 0: No PLC run-time error occurred before the last PLC 
program start
• W1002 = 1: Error information in W1002 is invalid (e.g. because of an 
error in the hardware). If necessary: Implement safety reaction.
• W1002 ≥ 50: PLC run-time error with number code (see the 
PLCdesignNT help for the error name). If necessary: Implement safety 
reaction.
Warning
HEIDENHAIN would like to point out the following information for the 
processing of signals in the PLC:
For all PLC markers, the status 0 (not set) must be used as the safe 
status. Only this way can the safety of a machine be ensured if the power 
fails.
The following must be kept in mind for remanent markers: 
Remanent markers, bytes, words and double words can also be deleted 
(e.g. if the buffer battery is empty). In order to detect this state, we 
recommend setting a flag marker in the remanent memory. Set this 
marker once, at a time when it is ensured that all signals in the PLC are 
valid. 
This marker should be used as a reference in the PLC program. As long 
as this marker is set, the remanent markers have not been deleted (e.g. 
by an empty buffer battery or an error in the PLC). If this flag marker is 
deleted, all remanent markers are invalid. An appropriate safety reaction 
with an error message must occur if this happens.
In order to attain an optimum level of safety for your machine and the 
operator, HEIDENHAIN recommends the combined use of these safety 
measures.
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 23
Configuration data of the PLC 
You use the PLC configuration file to influence the memory allocation of the 
control and change the configuration data of the PLC. Enter certain 
keywords to perform changes. After compilation by the PLC, the NC detects 
the changed settings, and the control must be restarted. 
The values you enter may only be greater than the default values.
Available keywords: 
Keyword DescriptionExample
DEFINE Configuration definitions for controlling the 
conditional compilation, soft-key menu 
generation and cycle-project configuration. 
System parameters that may not be 
changed are identified by a preceding and 
following $ character. Depending on which 
options have been set, they are defined via 
the compiler and can be used for conditional 
compilation. For more information about 
this, please refer to the PLCdesignNT help.
REMBYTEMIN Start address of the bytes, words or double 
words whose data remains stored after a 
power interruption (remanence). 
Default value: 0
REMBYTEMIN = 0
REMBYTEMAX End address of the bytes, words or double 
words whose data remains stored after a 
power interruption (remanence). 
The range defined by REMBYTEMIN and 
REMBYTEMAX may not be larger than 1024 
bytes. 
Default value: –1 = Deactivated
REMBYTEMAX = 200
1 – 24 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
REMMARKERMIN Start address of the markers whose data 
remains stored after a power interruption 
(remanence). 
Default value: 0
REMMARKERMIN = 0
REMMARKERMAX End address of the bytes, words or double 
words whose data remains stored after a 
power interruption (remanence). 
The range defined by REMMARKERMIN 
and REMMARKERMAX may not consist of 
more than 2048 markers. 
Default value: –1 = Deactivated
REMMARKERMAX = 150
MARKERS A total of 100 000 
bytes is available 
for all keywords, 
timers, counters 
and strings 
combined
Number of markers 
available. 
Default value: 10000
MARKERS = 15000
BYTES Size in bytes for the 
byte/word/double 
word memory. 
Default value: 10000
BYTES = 20000
INPUTS Number of input 
markers available. 
Default value: 384
INPUTS = 450
OUTPUTS Number of output 
markers available. 
Default value: 192
OUTPUTS = 250
INPUTBYTES Size in bytes for the 
byte/word/double 
word memory range 
used by the Profibus 
inputs. 
Default value: 1000
OUTPUTBYTES Size in bytes for the 
byte/word/double 
word memory range 
used by the Profibus 
outputs. 
Default value: 1000
Keyword Description Example
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 25
Multiple I/O-Force Lists possible 
It is now possible to make multiple lists available for the I/O Force function 
in the PLC operating mode. If an I/O Force List is open, press the PGM MGT 
key to switch to an existing list or create a new list. Create a new I/O Force 
List by entering a new file name with the extension .FLT. The selected list 
is identified by the automatically generated FORCELISTPATH = PLC:\*.FLT 
entry in OEM.SYS.
M4623 – Disable DNC operation 
The start of DNC operation can be disabled with the PLC. Set the marker 
M4623 in order to disable the start of DNC operation via an LSV2 
connection. This setting can be interrogated via an LSV2 telegram.
W274 – Keys for spindle speed override 
If +/– and 100% keys are used for the spindle-speed override, then it can be 
seen in W274 if these keys are pressed. Value 256 for the “100%” key, 
value 257 for the “+” key and value 258 for the “–” key.
FN18 – ID20 NR13 
You can use the FN 18: SYSREAD Q<no.> = ID20 NR13 function to interrogate 
the number of the active spindle (0 or 1).
FN18 – ID30 NR52 
You can use the FN 18: SYSREAD Q<no.> = ID30 NR52 IDX <NR> function to 
ascertain whether a string or a numeric value was transferred in the <NR> 
Q-parameter number. If <NR> was used to transfer a tool number, the 
function returns 0, and if a tool name was transferred the function returns 
1. FN18 function ID990 NR10 must be used to convert a tool name to the 
corresponding tool number for further processing.
FN18 – ID990 NR10 
You can use the FN 18: SYSREAD Q<no.> = ID990 NR10 IDX <NR> function 
to ascertain the tool number that belongs to the tool name contained in 
<NR.>
1 – 26 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
Example of how the FN18 functions for tool name and number can be used. 
In this example the Q-parameter number Q330 could have been transferred as 
a string or a number from a cycle. The following example can be used for 
further processing: 
...
FN 9: IF +Q330 EQU +0 GOTO LBL 131
FN 18: SYSREAD Q35 = ID1000 NR7483 Interrogate MP7483 
whether tool name and 
number are permitted
FN 18: SYSREAD Q30 = ID30 NR52 IDX330 Interrogate if the tool 
name is programmed
FN 9: IF +Q30 EQU +0 GOTO LBL 45 No tool name 
programmed
FN 10: IF +Q35 NE +2 GOTO LBL 46 Tool name programmed
FN 14: ERROR = 1094 Tool name is not 
permitted
LBL 46
FN 18: SYSREAD Q330 = ID990 NR10 IDX330 Determine the tool 
number for the tool 
name
FN 10: IF +Q330 NE -1 GOTO LBL 34
FN 14: ERROR = 1092 No tool number could be 
found
LBL 45
FN 10: IF +Q35 NE +1 GOTO LBL 34
FN 9: IF +Q330 EQU +0 GOTO LBL 34 Tool number = 0 always 
permitted
FN 14: ERROR = 1093 Tool number not 
permitted
LBL 34
FN 18: SYSREAD Q0 = ID50 NR22 IDX330
...
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 27
FN18 – ID56 NR4 
You can use the FN 18: SYSREAD Q<no.> = ID56 NR4 function to ascertain 
the number of lines of a freely definable table opened with FN26: TABOPEN. 
The function returns the value –1.0 if no table is open at the time of reading.
FN18 – ID240 NR8 
You can use the FN 18: SYSREAD Q<no.> = ID240 NR8 IDX <NR> function to 
ascertain the current ACTUAL positions of the axes in the REF system. With 
IDX <NR> from 1..9 the coordinates of the axes X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V and W 
are read.
FN18 – ID990 NR4 
You can use the FN 18: SYSREAD Q<no.> = ID990 NR4 function to interrogate 
whether the touch probe is deflected. If it is deflected, the value 1.0 is 
returned. If not, the value 0.0 is returned.
 FN17 – ID53 NRxxx 
With FN 17: SYSWRITE ID 53 NRxxxx IDXxxxx = <value> you can edit all the 
data of all indexes of an indexed tool. The function behaves like FN 17 –
 ID50, only that here the same value is written to all indexes. With NRxxxx 
you indicate a column of the active tool table and with IDXxxxx a tool number 
of the indexed tool for which <value> is written to all indexes. 
The following NC block is used to completely disable all indexes of the 
current indexed tool: FN 17: SYSWRITE ID 53 NR7 = 1.0. 
FN17 – ID290 NR5 
With FN 17: SYSWRITE ID 290 NR5 = <value> you can transfer <value> = 0 
to deactivate the temperature compensation in the kinematics table. It can 
be activated again with <value> = 1. Temperature compensation is always 
active if the program is interrupted.
FN17 – ID622 NR0 
With FN 17: SYSWRITE ID 622 NR0 IDX1.0 = <value> you can transfer a 
<value> for the time in seconds after which the teach-in cuts for AFC are 
ended automatically. The function behaves like the pressing of the EXIT 
LEARNING soft key after the appropriate time. This function is deactivated 
again by programming <value> = 0.
FN17 – ID2020 NR1 
FN 17: SYSWRITE ID 2020 NR1 makes it possible for you to set PLC markers 
M4030 and M4031 for tapping. This way a brief resetting of marker M4031 
in Cycle 209 can be prevented. 
FN17 – ID1000 
FN 17: SYSWRITE ID 1000 NR<MP number> IDX<MP index> = <value> makes 
it possible to change machine parameters in the process memory. The 
change remains in effect until a reboot is performed or an MP file or MP 
subfile is selected, writing a new value to the MP. The unit of the <value> 
must be the same as the unit of the MP in the MP file.
Note
When reading or writing machine parameters with the FN17/FN18 function 
ID1000, the value of corresponding MPs are always read and written in 
millimeters, even if inches are used in the NC program instead of 
millimeters.
1 – 28 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
New soft key within the WATCH LIST function: 
The new TABLE soft key is available in the third soft-key row. Select any 
operand in the WATCH LIST. Press the TABLE soft key to get directly to the 
selected operand in the table of the PLC memories.
Symbolic names with more than 24 characters in the WATCH LIST 
Names for operands with more than 24 characters can now by enteredin 
the SYMBOL column of the WATCH LIST without getting an error message. 
Characters after the 24th position (number of significant characters) are 
truncated.
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 29
PLC modules Changed: Module 9035 (Reading the status information) 
Module 9035 with index 4 (displayed screen window) now supplies in bits 4 
and 12 the information of whether the PLC status window is being 
displayed. 
Bit 4 always = 0, since the window can never be displayed 
Bit 12 = 1: PLC status window present in the machine screen
Changed: Module 9158 (Torque limiting by the PLC) 
Error code 2 is now also returned in W1022 for Module 9158 if the axis 
number of an axis is invalid, if it is an open-loop axis, or if it is temporarily not 
a closed-loop axis.
Changed: Modules 9180 to 9184 (Simulation and disabling of keys and 
key groups) 
The modules 9180, 9181, 9182, 9183 and 9184 now also support vertical 
soft keys. This is achieved in Modules 9183 and 9184 with the new key-
group code 7 (vertical soft keys, switchover key for vertical soft keys).
Changed: Module 9222 (Status request of PLC positioning movement) 
In the Program Run modes, Module 9222 reports with value 6 the status 
“PLC positioning temporarily halted” (stop in the Automatic operating 
modes).
Changed: Module 9245 (Read a field from a table) 
Module 9245 and the tableread function (PLC screen masks) can now be 
used to read data, including strings, from system tables like the tool table 
and pocket table (*.T and *.TCH). Data can be read from all freely definable 
tables. 
The error codes have changed accordingly:
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Field was read
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Line does not exist in table
2 Incorrect “file handle” or table was opened in 
“buffered” mode
3 Impermissible string numbers
7 Module could not read from the table
20 Module was not called in a spawn or submit job
29 The opened file is not a valid table
30 Field name does not exist in table
1 – 30 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
Module 9048 Interrogating the operating states of axes
Module 9048 is used to interrogate the operating state of a certain axis or for 
all axes together.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Axis number>
Axis number: Individual information for a programmed axis
–1: Information for all axes, bit-coded as axis mask
PS B/W/D/K <Status information>
0: Brake test active/inactive
1: Free rotation active/inactive
CM 9048
PL B/W/D <Status>
Interrogation of an individual axis: 1/0 = active/inactive
Interrogation of all axes: Bit-coded axis mask
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Status has been read
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid value for status information
2 Invalid axis programmed:
If status information 0 was transferred, then this error 
occurs if an invalid axis number, an open-loop axis or 
an axis that is temporarily not a closed-loop axis was 
selected.
If status information 1 was transferred, then this error 
occurs if an invalid axis number, an open-loop axis or 
an axis that is temporarily not a closed-loop axis was 
selected, or if a slave axis or the NC axis is not a rotary 
axis.
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 31
Module 9064 Status information about collision monitoring
With Module 9064 you interrogate whether collision monitoring is active in the 
currently selected operating mode.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
0: Interrogation of DCM status in the current operating 
mode
CM 9064
PL B/W/D <Status information>
With Mode 0
 0: Monitoring not active
 1: Monitoring active
Error recognition: 
Module 9065 Status of the commissioning function (expanded)
Module 9065 is used to activate commissioning functions and ascertain status 
information dealing with the determination of the field angle of an axis.
Conditions:
Synchronous, linear and torque motors determine the field angle each time 
the control is started if no EnDat or Z1-track encoders are used. For the 
duration of determining the field-angle (about 5 to 7 seconds), <Mode> 1 
returns bit-coded the axes for which field-angle determination is active.
Module 9162 reports that the rotary encoder is not ready while the field 
angle is being determined. A PLC error message can be suppressed if 
determining is active.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
0: Axes for which the field angle is being determined with a 
commissioning aid and an internal oscilloscope
1: Axes for which automatic determination of the field angle 
is active
CM 9065
PL B/W/D <Axes bit-coded>
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Status has been read
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid value for mode
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Axes have been determined
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid value for mode
1 – 32 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
Module 9066 Status of HEIDENHAIN hardware (changed)
Module 9066 interrogates the status information of HEIDENHAIN hardware 
components, including the SIK component. The module can only be called in 
cyclic PLC programs.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Code for hardware components>
0: HEIDENHAIN inverter
1: SIK ID
CM 9066
PL B/W/D <Status information>
Code 0: HEIDENHAIN inverter
 Bit 0: Not used
 Bit 1: dc-link voltage too high
 Bit 2: Heat sink temperature too high
 Bit 3: Short-circuit of a motor phase with Uz
 Bit 4: dc-link current too high
 Bit 5: Power supply unit not ready
 Bit 6: Leakage current too high
Code 1: SIK ID
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Status has been read
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 2 Invalid value for code
24 Module was called in a spawn or submit job
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 33
Module 9128 Torque limiting by the PLC
Module 9128 can be used to program a maximum torque for the programmed 
axis. The torque of the drive is limited to the programmed value. The value –1 
cancels the torque limitation and the value from the motor data becomes 
effective again. The torque can be limited in [mA] or in [0.1%] of the rated 
current.
Condition:
The module is only executable in the cyclic PLC program.
The programmed value for the maximum torque may not be higher than the 
value in the motor data. If the programmed value is higher than the value in 
the motor data, the value in the motor data is used as the limit.
A torque value of 0 cannot be programmed.
Programming a torque value of –1 cancels limitation. The original value from 
the motor data becomes effective again.
The unit of the resulting torque is [mA].
If a drive is switched off, the torque from the motor data becomes effective 
when it is switched on again.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
0: Current in [0.1%] of the rated current
1: Current in [mA] (like Module 9158)
PS B/W/D/K <Axis number>
15: Spindle
PS B/W/D/K <Torque>
–1: Cancel the torque limiting
CM 9128
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Torque limiting programmed
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid value for torque
2 Invalid value for axis number or mode, axis is an open-
loop axis or is temporarily not a closed-loop axis
24 Module was called in a spawn or submit job
1 – 34 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
Module 9129 Status of torque limiting by the PLC
Module 9129 is used to determine the current status of torque limiting for the 
programmed axis. The momentary maximum torque can be determined in 
[mA] or in [0.1%] of the rated current.
Condition:
The module is only executable in the cyclic PLC program.
The greatest possible return value is the value resulting from the motor data.
If torque limiting is not active, the maximum current can be determined from 
the motor data.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
0: Limiting active/inactive
1: Current in [mA]
2: Current in [0.1%] of the rated current
PS B/W/D/K <Axis number>
15: Spindle
CM 9129
PL B/W/D <Status>
Mode 0: 0 = Limiting active / 1 = Limiting inactive
Mode 1: Current in [mA]
Mode2: Current in [0.1%] of the rated current
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Status has been read
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 2 Invalid value for axis number or mode, axis is an open-
loop axis or is temporarily not a closed-loop axis
24 Module was called in a spawn or submit job
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 35
Module 9173 Speed-dependent wye/delta switchover
With Module 9173, a monitoring function dependent on the speed can be 
realized for the wye/delta switchover of the spindle. A switchover request is 
detected by Module 9174, which supplies the current status of the wye/delta 
operation. If a switchover is necessary, this is still done by Module 9163. The 
actual speed is assumed during the switchover. The readiness of the current 
controller is automatically rescinded when Module 9163 is called.
Condition:
The module should not be called cyclically. A single call is enough for 
activation, deactivation or changing.
Additional information: Useful combinations for <Mode> parameter: 
xx0 Deactivate monitoring
001 Monitoring on, Switchover compatible
011 Monitoring on, Accelerated but safe switchover, Wait for readiness of 
current controller
111 Monitoring on, Fastest switchover possible
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
Bit 0:
0 = Monitoring off (function deactivated)
1 = Monitoring on (automatic assumption of the actual 
speed during switchover)
Bit 1:
0 = Switchover compatible to previous switchover; 
switchover same as first switch-on of spindle
1 = Switchover accelerated
Bit 2:
0 = Wait for readiness of current controller 
1 = Do not wait for readiness of current controller
PS B/W/D/K <Switchover speed from wye to delta operation>
PS B/W/D/K <Switchover speed from delta to wye operation>
CM 9173
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Speed-dependent monitoring active
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid speeds (switchover speed of wye operation ≥ 
switchover speed of delta operation), or negative 
speed
1 – 36 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
Module 9174 Spindle status regarding wye/delta switchover
Module 9174 supplies the current spindle status for wye/delta operation. In 
order to receive one of the two “Request switchover x -> x” status values, the 
speed-dependent wye/delta switchover monitoring in Module 9173 must be 
active.
Call:
CM 9174
PL B/W/D/K <Status>
0: Spindle in wye operation
1: Request for wye -> delta switchover
2: Spindle in delta operation
3: Request for delta -> wye switchover
Module 9216 Pop-up window with tool selection lists (expanded)
Module 9216 was expanded by Mode 3. With it, the selection list also displays 
tools for which a pocket is reserved in the magazine.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
0: Tools in tool table not in the magazine
1: Tools in tool table in the magazine
2: Empty pockets in the magazine
3: Tools with reserved pockets in the magazine
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 37
Module 9248 Copying, renaming and deleting files 
Module 9248 is used to copy, rename and delete files. This module can be 
used to access all mounted drives. Any necessary file conversions (ASCII --> 
binary, binary --> ASCII) are performed automatically during the copy process.
Conditions:
The file names must contain drive information (e.g. PLC:) and file types.
The file types are used to determine whether a conversion is necessary.
If a conversion must be performed, then the file types must be identical.
The file types are used to determine whether renaming is permissible. If the 
file type remains the same during renaming, then there are no limitations. If 
the file type is changed, then renaming is only permitted between certain 
file types.
Dependencies with other files are not considered when deleting files.
Call:
PS B/WD/K/S <Name of the source file>
PS B/W/D/K/S<Name of the target file>
Only with mode 0 or 1
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
0: Copy
1: Rename
2: Delete
CM 9248
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Successful execution of module
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 2 Module was called in an invalid mode setting
7 Error during file conversion, invalid source or target 
string, error during copying without file conversion, or 
source file does not exist
20 Module was not called in a submit job or spawn job
36 Not identical file types, conversion not possible
1 – 38 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
Module 9300 Locking/releasing the pocket table (expanded)
Module 9300 locks the pocket table for pocket switching with Modules 9305, 
9306 and now also 9301, 9302 or 934x, and then releases it again. The module 
can now also be called while an NC program is running. This means that error 
code 5 has been removed. The module had returned it when the module was 
called during a running NC program. Error code 6 was introduced in its place. 
This results in the following behavior:
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Lock/release pocket table>
0: Release the pocket table
1: Lock the pocket table
CM 9300
PL B/W/D <Error>
0: Pocket table locked/released
1: Pocket table could not be locked
2: Pocket table could not be released
3: Transfer parameter invalid
4: Module was not called in a spawn job or submit job
5: Not used
6:
Code 0: Pocket table already released
Code 1: Pocket table already locked
Module 9304 Copy pocket-table entry to PLC memory
Module 9304 copies the contents of the freely definable columns p1 to p5 of 
a pocket-table entry into the word memory of the PLC.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Magazine number>
PS B/W/D/K <Pocket number>
PS B/W/D/K <Double-word address>
CM 9304
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Successful execution of module
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid pocket number programmed
2 Invalid magazine number programmed
4 Invalid double-word address programmed
20 Module was not called in a spawn job or submit job
36 Error in file handling
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 39
Module 9305 Tool exchange in the pocket table (expanded)
Until now the module could only be called at standstill or during a strobe 
output. Now the module can also be called during a running NC program if the 
pocket table has been locked by the PLC with Module 9300 against other 
accesses. The meaning of error number 21 in W1022 changes 
correspondingly.
Error recognition: 
Module 9306 Exchange tools between tool magazines (expanded)
Until now the module could only be called at standstill or during a strobe 
output. Now the module can also be called during a running NC program if the 
pocket table has been locked by the PLC with Module 9300 against other 
accesses. The meaning of error number 21 in W1022 changes 
correspondingly.
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
W1022 21 Module was called during an NC program run without 
any locking in place
Marker Value Meaning
W1022 21 Module was called during an NC program run without 
any locking in place
1 – 40 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
Module 9311 Dynamically change values for friction compensation
Module 9311 is used at run-time to prescribe other values for the friction 
compensation. The original values from MP2610.x, MP2612.x and MP2614.x 
are temporarily overwritten in the DSP. The MP file remains unchanged.
Conditions:
This function is supported as of the DSP hardware CC 424.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Axis number>
PS B/W/D/K <Current in [mA]>
0..30000 replaces the value in MP2610.x
PS B/W/D/K <Path in [0.1 μm]>
0..10000 replaces the value in MP2612.x
PS B/W/D/K <Path in [0.1 μm]>
0..10000 replaces the value in MP2614.x
CM 9311
Error recognition: 
Module 9312 Change machine parameters in the current machine-
parameter file
Module 9312 is used to dynamically overwrite the values of the machine 
parameters of the active machine-parameter file or the process memory of the 
DSP.
Conditions:
For numbers the values must be returned as an integer. The decimal point 
is shiftedby the number of possible decimal places. For example, if 
MP910.0 is to be set to 100.12 mm, then the <MP value> transferred must 
be 1001200. (4 possible decimal places lead to a multiplication by 10 000).
For non-indexed machine parameters, zero must be programmed as the 
index.
Once the NC program has started, the module operates only during the 
output of M/G/S/T/T2/Q change signals.
Depending on the changed machine parameter’s type, the geometry is re-
initialized.
Not every MP can be changed by the PLC.
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 New values assumed for axis number
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid value as replacement for machine parameter
2 Invalid axis number programmed
19 Function is not supported by the DSP board (CC 422)
24 Call was not from a cyclic program
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 41
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
Bit 0:
0 =Modify MP numerical value (MP is a number)
1 =Modify MP string (MP is a string)
Bit 1:
0 =Modify parameter in file (bit 2 is then relevant)
1 =Modify parameter in process memory 
 (behavior like Module 9031)
Bit 2:
0 = Change file and 
 immediately assume new value(s) in NC
1 = Change file and 
 do not immediately assume new value(s) in NC
 Will be assumed at next call with bit 2 = 0
PS B/W/D/K/S<File name>
not supported at present
(a value must be transferred, but the value entered is not 
evaluated yet)
PS B/W/D/K <MP number>
PS B/W/D/K <MP index>
PS B/W/D/K/S<MP value>
Depending on the mode, the MP value is interpreted as a 
PLC string number, PLC constant string or number
CM 9312
PL B/W/D <Error code>
0: No error
1: Parameter does not exist or cannot be changed
2: New value for parameter is invalid
3: Error while saving
4: Call was not in a submit or spawn job
5: Call during running NC program without change signal
6: Invalid PLC string for file name or MP value
7: Parameter file does not exist
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 No error
1 See error code
1 – 42 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
Module 9313 Read machine parameters
Module 9313 reads the contents of machine parameters from the process 
memory or from the current machine-parameter file. For machine parameters 
defined as numerical values, the content can also be read as a string. Machine 
parameters defined as strings cannot be read as numbers.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
Bit 0:
0 = Read MP as numerical value (MP must be a number)
1 = Read MP as string (MP can be a number or text)
Bit 1:
0 = Read MP from file
1 = Read MP from memory
PS B/W/D/K/S<File name>
not supported at present
(a value must be transferred, but the value entered is not 
evaluated yet)
(only the active MP file can be read from)
PS B/W/D/K <MP number>
PS B/W/D/K <MP index>
PS B/W/D/K/S<Target word or target string>
Mode bit 0 = 0: Interpretation as a double-word address
Mode bit 0 = 1: Interpretation as a PLC string number
CM 9313
PL B/W/D <Error>
0: No error
1: MP number, PLC string or PLC double-word address 
invalid
2: No “:” separator in MP file, e.g. (MP 10: %0111)
3: MP value outside permissible value range
4: MP not found in file
5: No MP file found
6: Call was not in a submit or spawn job
7: MP (defined as string) cannot be read as a number
8: No system memory
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 No error
1 See error code
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 43
Module 9322 Information of the current NC program (changed)
With Module 9322, you can determine the current block number of the active 
NC program. If the module is called from the cyclic PLC program, only the 
block number of the current NC main program is read in real time. If the 
module is called from a spawn job or submit job, the path of the current 
NC program is determined in addition to the block number (from the block 
scan).
Constraints:
Because of the geometry look-ahead, the call from the cyclic PLC program 
only supplies the block number in real time, but no information about the NC 
program.
Call from the cyclic PLC program: 
For all traverse blocks that are not generated from an NC program, a cycle 
or an NC macro, block number –1 is read.
Call from the cyclic PLC program: 
After the NC program is cancelled or after the end of the NC program, the 
last block number executed is returned.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Mode>
When called from a cyclic PLC program, the setting of 
<Mode> is without effect. The block number of the active 
NC program is always returned.
When called from a spawn job or submit job:
0: String / block number and path refer only to the active NC 
(sub)program. Block number from block scan.
1: String / block number and path refer to the active NC 
(sub)program or cycle. Block number from block scan.
2: Only the name of the NC main program without 
information about the block number (block number is set to 
0 when executed correctly).
PS B/W/D/K <String number for path of the NC program or cycle>
Call from a cyclic PLC program: Without effect.
CM 9322
PL B/W/D <Block number of current NC program or cycle>
–1: Error if error marker is set 
–1: Block number in certain cases, if call was from a cyclic 
PLC program
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 Information of current NC program has been read
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 1 Invalid mode
2 Invalid string number
1 – 44 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
Module 9390 Open the online help window with the control’s browser
With Module 9390 you open an online help window with the control’s 
browser. The module can be called from a cyclic PLC program or from a spawn 
job or submit job. The extension .CHM can be given in the call, but is not 
necessary.
Constraints:
The .CHM help file must be stored language-sensitive in the 
TNC:\tncguide\de directory, or in TNC:\tncguide\en etc.
If an empty string is given as file name, the main.chm file is used. Depending 
on the link in main.chm the context number then branches to the OEMx.CHM 
specified there.
If 0 was given as the help number, or if the given number could not be found 
in the help system, the start page of the given help file is opened.
If the help system could not be started (e.g. the *.CHM file is missing), an 
NC error message with a reference to this PLC module is generated.
Call:
PS SXX <File name>
from string number S0/S1/... or S “file” or S“”
PS K/B/W/D <Help number of the HTML page to be opened from the 
respectively valid help-number range>
CM 9390
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 No error
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 2 Invalid parameter or parameter does not exist
22 Help system could not be started
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 45
Module 9391 Display an error number with additional offset
With Module 9391 you can display with an additional offset a PLC error 
message from the .PET table. Module 9391 behaves like Module 9085. The 
module can be called from a cyclic PLC program or from a spawn job or submit 
job. 
An offset is added to the value for the help number in the .PET file in order to 
generate the actual help number. This way a group error number can be 
defined for an (OEM) device in the .PET table. The error number (used as an 
offset) supplied by the device in case of error then leads to the appropriate 
help text. 
Two new columns were added to the .PET table for this. In the column ONL-
Name you enter the file name of the help file that is to be called additionally in 
connection with an offset. In the ONL-Number column you enter the ID (=help 
number) of the HTML page in the help file to be opened. The offset is added 
to this ID (=help number) during the module call, and is given by the module. 
This makes it possible to refer to specific HTML pages in addition to the more 
general PLC error message.
Constraints:
The .CHM help file must be stored language-sensitive in the 
TNC:\tncguide\de directory, or in TNC:\tncguide\enetc.
An OEM-specific OEMx.CHM file is necessary.
If no OEMx.CHM file is indicated, the online help is not called. All other 
reactions saved for this error in the .PET table are performed.
Call:
PS K/B/W/D <Line number in the .PET error table>
PS K/B/W/D <Offset for the help number in .PET>
CM 9391
Error recognition: 
Marker Value Meaning
M4203 0 No error
1 Error code in W1022
W1022 2 Invalid parameter or parameter does not exist
1 – 46 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
New smarT.NC 
functions
DXF: Divide contour elements (software option) 
In the DXF converter you can now also divide poorly connecting contour 
elements so that they are selectable as individual contours.
DXF: Extract machining positions (software option) 
Along with contour programs (*.HC files), point files (*.HP files) can also 
now be generated directly by the DXF converter.
Behavior between two machining points 
(upgrade function) 
An approach height can now be defined for each machining point in a point 
pattern. The TNC then approaches this position at the height you defined. 
Useful for: Moving over chips or other hindrances.
Contour pocket on point pattern 
(upgrade function) 
A contour pocket can be machined on a point pattern using Unit 130.
Rapid probing 
(upgrade function) 
Various touch-probe parameters can be set globally using Unit 441.
Touch probe Cycles 408 and 409 
(upgrade function) 
It is now possible to set presets in the center axis of a slot or ridge using 
Units 408 and 409.
Editor in the Programming and Editing operating mode 
(upgrade function) 
Creation and editing of *.HU and *.HC programs on the simulation side of 
the control in smarT.NC mode.
Feed-rate reduction during machining of contour pockets 
(upgrade function) 
When clearing out a contour pocket, traverse paths where the tool is in full 
engagement result, such as in narrow channels or when shifting to the next 
clearance path. Now you can define a percent value by which the TNC 
reduces the feed rate in such situations.
Tool table in the smarT.NC look and feel 
The tool table TOOL.T can now also be edited in the smarT.NC operating 
mode. The depiction was adapted to smarT.NC.
Expanded file management 
The file management in smarT.NC was revised completely.
End angle can be defined for a pitch circle instead of an angle 
increment 
As part of the pitch-circle definition, an end angle can now be defined 
instead of an angle increment in a point pattern.
Climb milling/up-cut milling for helical finish milling 
In Unit 208 it is possible to define the milling direction (climb milling/up-cut 
milling).
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 47
Scale in the pattern generator 
A scale can now be shown in the pattern generator, so that the dimensions 
of the defined machining pattern can be determined.
Zoom function in the pattern generator 
A zoom function is now available in the pattern generator, with which the 
view of the defined machining pattern can be magnified.
Align workpiece with Units 401 and 402 
Units 401 (basic rotation over 2 holes) and 402 (basic rotation over 2 studs) 
were expanded for the purpose of compensating via rotation in the C axis a 
misalignment determined with the cycles.
Rapid traverse with the PLANE function 
FMAX can now be programmed with the PLANE function. The rapid-
traverse override potentiometer functions accordingly when this function is 
executed.
Selection of datum number 
With the datum shift (Unit 7) you can now select a datum number from a 
datum table via soft key.
Tool names with measuring cycles for workpiece measurement 
For cycles for workpiece measurement, a tool name can now be defined for 
the tool to be corrected instead of the tool number.
Remanently store control settings 
Settings for the control in the smarT.NC operating mode are saved beyond 
the run-time of a process or a reset of the control.
1 – 48 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
New plain-
language 
programming 
functions
DXF: Divide contour elements 
In the DXF converter you can now also divide poorly connecting contour 
elements so that they are selectable as individual contours.
DXF: Extract machining positions 
Along with contour programs (*.HC files), point files (*.HP files) can also 
now be generated directly by the DXF converter.
Feed-rate reduction during machining of contour pockets 
(upgrade function) 
When clearing out a contour pocket, traverse paths where the tool is in full 
engagement result, such as in narrow channels or when shifting to the next 
clearance path. Now you can define a percent value by which the TNC 
reduces the feed rate in such situations.
Climb milling/up-cut milling for helical finish milling 
In Cycle 208 it is possible to define the milling direction (climb milling/up-cut 
milling) via parameter Q351.
Text strings in Q-parameter programming 
Strings can now also be used and processed when programming Q 
parameters.
Text strings possible in CYCLE DEF 
In CYCLE DEF, individual cycle parameters can now be entered as text 
strings instead of as numerical values or constants.
Tool names with measuring cycles for tool measurement 
For cycles for workpiece measurement, a tool name can now be defined for 
the tool to be corrected instead of the tool number.
Tilted status during program interruption 
If bit 9 is set in MP7682, then if the MANUAL OPERATION soft key is 
pressed during a program interruption, the Tilting ON/OFF status from 
program run is assumed in the Manual operating mode. That way the tilted 
status is exactly as it was defined in the program.
Safety clearance at the end of Cycle 27 
For Cycle 27, a retraction in the direction of the tool axis to the safety 
clearance is now only done after machining a contour pocket if MP7420 bit 
4 is set.
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 49
New touch probe 
functions
New probe cycles for presetting (FCL 3 function) 
The new touch-probe cycles 408 and 409 are available for presetting at the 
center of a slot or a ridge.
New 3-D probing cycle (FCL 3 function) 
The new touch-probe Cycle 4 is available, with which you can perform a 
measurement in three dimensions. You define the direction of traverse via 
three incremental traverse paths in X, Y and Z. You can receive the results 
of the measurement in either the workpiece or the machine coordinate 
system.
Align workpiece with Cycles 401 and 402 
Cycles 401 (basic rotation over 2 holes) and 402 (basic rotation over 2 studs) 
were expanded for the purpose of compensating via rotation in the C axis a 
misalignment determined with the cycles.
Measuring results available globally 
Measuring results of the cycles for datum setting (408 to 419) are now 
available for further use in Q parameters.
1 – 50 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
New NC functions Global PGM Settings (software option #44) 
Possibility of superimposing various coordinate transformations and 
settings in the program-run modes of operation.
Warning
The following must be observed when using the Global PGM Settings:
Basically, all settings in the Global PGM Settings remain active when 
executing cycles and NC programs. However, when executing macros or 
PLC positionings, all Global PGM Settings are automatically deactivated.
If you disable one or more axes via Global PGM Settings, then this 
disabling is only cancelled within a macro or during the PLC positioning. 
However, if you transfer axis position values to the PLC (e.g. with FN19) 
within a cycle or NC program and then perform a positioning with the 
PLC, then this positioning really is performed with all axes. However, if 
the axis position values transferred from a cycle or an NC program are not 
approached, due to the Global PGM Settings, then this can lead to a crash 
during the subsequent PLC positioning.
M118 cannot be deselected in cycles if handwheel superimpositioning 
has been activated in the Global PGMSettings. However, handwheel 
superimpositioning is automatically deactivated in the Global PGM 
Settings when executing a macro.
If you read the position values of an axis via the PLC, then when you 
interrogate the nominal values, the nominal value programmed in an NC 
program is returned, not the actual value of the axis. If further actions 
derive from the nominal value, then this can lead to problems, since 
these value do not necessarily reflect the actual position values of the 
axes. If you interrogate the actual value of an axis, then the actual position 
is returned.
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 51
Changed NC 
functions
Additional status display 
The additional status display was improved. The following changes and 
improvements were made:
• The additional status display is now shown in forms, structured with 
tabs. You switch between the tabs via soft keys. The STATUS PGM, 
STATUS POSITIONS, STATUS TOOL and STATUS COORDINATE 
TRANSFORMATIONS tabs can be selected directly, and the other 
status displays are selected with soft keys. 
• The most important status information is now collected on an overview 
page.
• A progress bar with the current program run time in % is now shown in 
the PGM status. In addition, the actual and programmed feed rate are 
shown as numerical values.
• The active machining cycle and the active parameters programmed in 
Cycle 32 Tolerance are shown in the CYC status.
• The active basic rotation is now also shown in the TRANS status.
• Only the status information important for test run is shown in the Test 
Run operating mode.
• If the Global Program Settings software option is available, two 
additional tabs containing information about the activated functions are 
shown.
• If the Adaptive Feed Rate Control software option is available, the 
additional AFC tab containing information about the feed-rate control is 
shown.
PLANE function 
FMAX can now be programmed for the positioning speed of the PLANE 
function.
Tool-usage file 
The total machining time of the program is now also available in the tool-
usage file. This time serves as the basis for the progress display in the 
additional status display when the program is being executed.
Tool-pocket table 
Up to 9999 magazine pockets can now be managed in the tool-pocket table.
Network protocol 
The TNC can now also be connected via NFS version 3. A higher data-
transfer speed is available in this mode.
Circular motions with active rotation 
Circles that were not traversed in the active main plane can now also be 
machined in combination with Cycle 10 Rotation. Until now an undefined 
motion occurred, and an error message was output if the rotation was 
increased.
Collision with M140/M150 
If M140 or M150 is active, then no more error message is shown if there 
would be a collision. Similar to the limit switches, positioning is ended if the 
programmed motion results in a collision.
1 – 52 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
iTNC – Operation 
and technique
New multiturn encoders are supported 
If a software version less than 340 49x-02 SP7 is being used, then the error 
code 0x7F in the EnDat defective <error code> <axis> error message has 
another meaning in addition to the error codes in the Technical Manual. 
If a motor with a newer generation multiturn encoder is attached to a 
CC 424 with a software less than 340 49x-02 SP7, the EnDat error 0x7F is 
reported. In this case the NC software must be updated to 340 49x-SP7 or 
340 49x-03. The motors will be equipped with these rotary encoders no 
earlier than 2007.
Reversing a software update 
If a target file for the SavePlc parameter is given in the setup.ini file, then 
a software update can be reversed. The iTNC then automatically saves a link 
to the file that is necessary in order to reverse the update. After an update, 
the -SETUP code number is entered on a single-processor control, and the 
Setup Back button is pressed in the iTNC Control Panel on a dual-processor 
control in order to reverse an update. The previous software version is then 
reinstalled. The PLC partition is restored from the *.zip file that was entered 
under SavePlc= in the setup.ini file. Please note that a subdirectory in 
which you want to save the *.zip file must be created on the TNC partition 
before the update, otherwise the update is cancelled when backing up the 
old PLC partition. 
Only updates from one full software version to another can be reversed. You 
cannot reverse the installation of service packs. 
New ending for setup files 
Until now, setup files ended with .omf. The ending .elf is also possible 
with NC software 340 49x-03. 
Function of the LOAD SP soft key changed 
The LOAD SP soft key, which is available in the Programming and Editing 
operating mode after pressing the MOD key, now functions identically to 
the SETUP code number. This means that now instead of selecting a 
directory, a setup.elf or setup.omf file in the appropriate directory must be 
selected in order to install a new software version. This soft key can be used 
for installing service packs and full versions.
Note
A software update can only be reversed if the new software was updated 
onto a software as of version 340 49x-03. 
If you install version 340 49x-03 onto version 340 49x-02, then this update 
cannot be reversed with –SETUP.
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 53
Common USB stick for single- and dual-processor versions 
You can now save two different update procedures for automatic software 
updating on one USB stick. This makes it possible to use just one USB stick 
for updating iTNCs with and without Windows 2000. In addition to the 
install directory, the following directories are also checked for the 
presence of the setup files when the control is booted:
• iTNC without Windows 
- USB0:\installsingle\ (USB0: first partition of the first USB memory 
device)
• iTNC with Windows 
- G:\installdual\ (G: corresponds to the drive letter of the USB 
memory device)
Automatic setting of the FCL with a new SIK 
On a control in which no FCL was set in the SIK (after installation of such a 
software), the FCL was automatically set to the highest value supported by 
the software after the control had been restarted 100 times. As of 
340 49x-03, this automatic setting of the FCL does not take place until the 
control has been restarted 255 times.
Positioning of open-loop counter axes 
A new mechanism ensures that open-loop counter axes (MP120.x = 0) are 
traversed to the position required by the NC program. The execution of the 
NC program is interrupted at the point where the counter axes are 
programmed. An appropriate display points out a difference between the 
nominal and actual value. Only once this difference has been fixed can the 
program be continued.
Tool-usage file expanded 
The new WTIME column has been added to the tool-usage file. It indicates 
how long a tool was selected during the program. It also includes the times 
where the tool was moved without M3/M4, as well as times where it was 
moved at FMAX. In contrast to this, the TIME column only indicates the time 
that the tool was used to machine a workpiece (spindle on and not at rapid 
traverse!). 
If the tool-usage file is created in the Test Run operating mode, the entered 
times may deviate minimally from the actual machining times. In the Test 
Run operating mode an override of 100% is used for calculation. 
In addition, two new lines were integrated in the tool-usage file: 
The line TIMETOTAL contains the sum of all entries in the TIME and WTIME 
columns. In the other columns this line contains the value 0. 
The PATH column in the TOOLFILE line contains the tool table that was active 
when the tool-usage file was created. This makes it possible to output an 
error message when checking the tool usage in the Program Run modes if 
the active tool table does not match the TOOL.T file.Feed-rate limiting for M128 
The speed for compensating movements with M128 is now also limited via 
the PLC and the FMAX soft key, in addition to MP7471.
1 – 54 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
Oscilloscope starting from the message for power interruption 
It is now possible to operate the oscilloscope with reduced functions 
starting from the Power interrupted message. If you enter the code 
number DSP123 before calling the oscilloscope, then starting from the Power 
interrupted message the data are recorded and can be displayed via the 
oscilloscope.
Log entries
• The log entries for the arrow keys and the TAB key were changed as 
follows: Cursor Left, Cursor Right, Cursor Up, Cursor Down, Tab.
• Differences between positions at switch-on and switch-off for axes 
with EnDat encoders are now entered in the log.
• Data from a PLC positioning is now entered in the log.
• If errors occur in the kinematics description when using the old format, 
they are entered under KINEMATIC in the log. If a file or table column is 
not found, the file or column name is entered in the log.
• If a soft key defined by a resource file and having an overlay value is 
pressed, the overlay value is entered in the log.
Additional log 
A second log parallel to the existing log was introduced. It is in the battery-
buffered RAM, and so enables access to the log data on the control even 
without a hard disk. Enter the code number LOGBOOK1 to output it and save 
it as an ASCII file. 
This log is not available for the programming station.
Limit external access to the control 
External access to the control via LSV2 can be limited to specified 
computers. 
If the entry REMOTE.PERMISSION = <computer>;<computer> exists in the 
TNC:\TNC.SYS file, then only the computers listed will be granted access to 
the control. The <computer> entry can be either the names or IP addresses 
of computers, and must be separated by semicolons. Access to the control 
is refused if the REMOTE.PERMISSION entry exists in the TNC:\TNC.SYS file but 
the computer is not listed. If the REMOTE.PERMISSION entry does not exist, 
then every computer can access the control.
Disable software options for General Key 
Use the keyword LOCKEDOPTIONS = <option>[,<option>[,...]] in OEM.SYS 
to select software options that can then not be enabled by the General Key. 
<option> is the number of the software option to be disabled. This way you 
can disable those software options for which your machine is not prepared. 
Example: LOCKEDOPTIONS = 44,45
Note
Please note that the control has not finished booting at this time, and that 
the displayed values can therefore deviate from the correct or expected 
values.
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 55
Recognition of rotary axes improved 
The fact that an axis is a rotary axis could until now only be defined for NC 
axes (A, B, C) via MP100.x. If an angle encoder with distance-coded 
reference marks was used on a PLC axis, the error message Encoder 
defective was generated during a zero crossover. 
Now this information is detected for a rotary axis either in the axis 
designation (MP100.x) in the momentary traverse range or by the entry in 
MP810.
PLC texts in UTF8 
The PLC texts for PLC soft keys, FN14 error messages (UTF8 code in 
ERROR.A or FN14 file) and PLC mask files (UTF8 code in ERROR.A or 
DIALOG.A) can now be displayed as UTF8-encoded texts (e.g. for Asian 
languages). For the FN14 error messages and the PLC mask files, the UTF8 
code must then exist in the files used. 
PLC texts that are to be displayed in the PLC status window may not be 
UTF8 encoded. As an alternative, the English character set may be used. 
Dialogs for user parameters and soft-key descriptions for the HR 420 cannot 
be displayed in Asian languages. If such dialogs are used, the English 
language is displayed instead. 
The ASCII characters of the values 0xEF, 0xBB and 0xBF serve to indicate 
the UTF8 code. These three characters must be in the correct sequence as 
the first three characters in the appropriate file, and only serve to indicate 
the UTF8 code.
Read MP file without activation 
In the PLC Programming operating mode, files with the extension .MP or an 
unknown extension can be opened with the ASCII editor. You can use the 
PGM MGT key in the PLC Programming operating mode to open files, but the 
values of the machine parameters cannot be changed (write protection). 
This way you can open *.MP files for reading them without activating them.
1 – 56 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
Edit NC programs on the PCL partition 
It is now possible to open NC programs with the NC editor in the PLC 
Programming operating mode. If in the PLC Programming operating mode you 
select via the PGM MGT key a *.H file on the PLC partition for editing, the 
control automatically switches to the Programming and Editing operating 
mode.
Restore machine status 
In the PLC:\MGROUPS.SYS file you can now enter an M function in up to four 
groups. During block scan, the M function is collected for all groups in which 
it occurs, and is then considered during restoration. However, this could 
lead to such M functions being executed more than once when restoring 
the machine status. This function only makes sense if the ORDER = PRIO 
option has not been entered. 
Setting the system time via soft key 
(Only on single-processor controls) 
After pressing the MOD key in the Programming and Editing mode of 
operation, the SET DATE/TIME soft key is available. After pressing this soft 
key, the following window in which you can enter the system time appears. 
If you make any changes to these settings, the control must be restarted. 
Set the time zone for the control to automatically switch between standard 
and daylight savings time.
Adaptation of the motor tables for EcoDyn motors 
The two entries N-XH (Upper speed) and N-FS (Rotational speed for 
weakened-field operation) were added to the motor tables for EcoDyn 
motors. Until now the value for both these entries was 0, and they were not 
active. The adaptation of these two entries generally improves the behavior 
of the motors in weakened-field operation.
Accelerate 3-D graphics during program test 
The function of MP7312 or the LCUTS column, as described in Update Info 
12, is now supported. By entering in MP7312 as small a value as possible 
between 1 and 8, you should be able to detect an acceleration of the graphic 
simulation (the 3-D graphics) in the Test Run operating mode. However, 
HEIDENHAIN instead recommends entering the real values of the 
corresponding tooth lengths of the tools in the LCUTS column of the tool 
table.
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 57
Wye/delta switchover of the spindle without spindle stop 
With the 340 49x-03 software it is possible to switch between wye and delta 
operation of the spindle without having to stop the spindle. However, only 
one gear stage can be used in order to use this direct switchover. This must 
be configured correspondingly via MP3010, MP3210 and MP351x. The 
flowchart shows the principle procedure for direct switchover of the modes 
via the PLC: 
1 – 58 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
 
The diagram shows in principle how you can determine the switchover 
speeds for the wye/delta switchover:
• 1: Lower switching speed = n(intersection) – 2% to 4% of nmax
• 2: Speed at which the two characteristic curves intersect: 
n(intersection) at n(S1_wye) = n(S1_delta)
• 3: Upper switching speed = n(intersection) + 2% to 4% of nmax
Danger
The contactor for the wye/delta switchover may not be switched under 
load!
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 59
Expanded SIK functions 
The display and management of the SIK options, Feature Content Level and 
General Key was revised. Press the MOD key and enter the code number 
SIK to display the input mask for SIK functions:The display gives you the following information and possibilities for settings:
NC Information: 
SIK Information: 
Display Meaning
ID number Software
Rev. Software version
Control Type Type of control
Performance Class Type of main computer
Features Characteristics of the 
control
Display Meaning
Identifier (SIK ID) SIK number
Control Type Type of control
Performance Class Type of main computer
Features Characteristics of the SIK
1 – 60 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
General Key: 
The General Key permits you to enable and test all new Feature Content Level 
functions and software options. The General Key is valid for 90 days after the 
first enabling. After these 90 days have expired, the General Key can only be 
used again after the software version on your control has been updated.
SIK ok, 
wrong SIK (Control Type mismatch), 
wrong SIK (Features mismatch), 
wrong SIK (Performance Class mismatch), 
no SIK (Programming Station) or 
no SIK
Status of the SIK
Display Meaning
Status NONE General Key was not used yet 
for this software version.
dd.mm.yyyy Date up to which all options will 
be available. It is not possible to 
enable them again after this 
date.
EXPIRED General Key has expired for this 
software version. Enabling is 
not possible.
Set Pressing the Set button or the SET GENERAL KEY soft 
key opens a window in which you press the Apply 
button or the SET GENERAL KEY button again to enable 
all options for 90 days. 
If this is done successfully, the General Key has been 
set message appears and the expiration data of the 
General Key is shown in the Status field.
Expire Pressing the Expire button or the EXPIRE GENERAL KEY 
soft key opens a window in which you press the 
Apply button or the EXPIRE GENERAL KEY button again 
to expire the General Key immediately. 
Be aware that it is then no longer possible to enable 
the General Key for this software version!
Display Meaning
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 61
Feature Content Level (FCL):
Danger
If you reduce the Feature Content Level, then all new FCL functions and 
expanded features will be set to the desired lower version. Only error fixes 
remain active. This action can only be reversed by entering a valid code 
number again.
Display Meaning
Actual Value Current version of the Feature Content Level
Installed Software 
Supports
Highest possible FCL with the current software
Set Pressing the Set button or the SET FCL soft key 
opens a window in which you can enter the code 
number for the desired Feature Content Level 
under Enter Key Code. HEIDENHAIN can give 
you the code number after having been informed 
of the SIK number. 
Then press the Set FCL button or the SET FCL 
soft key to confirm the entry. If this is done 
successfully, the message Feature Content 
Level has been set appears.
Reduce Pressing the Reduce button or the REDUCE FCL 
soft key opens a window in which you can enter 
the desired lower Feature Content Level under 
New (lower) FCL. 
Please note that this action can only be reversed 
by entering a valid code number again. 
If you really want to reduce the Feature Content 
Level, then press the Apply button or the 
REDUCE FCL soft key to confirm the entry. If this is 
done successfully, the message Feature 
Content Level has been reduced appears.
1 – 62 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
SIK Options: 
All available software options and their corresponding numbers are listed in a 
table. The check marks in the first column indicate which software options 
have been enabled on your control.
To enable additional software options, proceed as follows:
Press the MOD key and enter the code number SIK to display the input 
mask for SIK functions.
In the table on the right side of the screen, use the arrow keys or the mouse 
to select the software option you want to enable.
Pressing the Set Option button or the SET OPTION soft key opens a window 
in which you can enter the code number for the desired software option 
under Enter Key Code. HEIDENHAIN can give you the code number after 
having been informed of the SIK number.
Enter the code number and confirm the entry by pressing the Apply button 
or the SET OPTION soft key. 
If this is done successfully, the message Option <number> has been set 
appears, and the option is checked in the table.
When you leave this table of SIK functions by pressing the END soft key or the 
END key, you are requested to reboot the control if you have made any 
changes. Press the emergency stop button and press the Reboot Now! button 
or the REBOOT NOW soft key to reboot the control and activate the changes.
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 63
New functions of 
the CC 424
Characteristic curve kink point for control with servo lag 
The characteristic curve kink point for operation with servo lag, defined via 
MP1820 and MP1830, can now also be used with the CC 424.
Maximum braking time of 5 seconds rescinded 
Until now the switch-off procedure was allowed to take a maximum of 5 
seconds until standstill. After 5 seconds at most the drive controllers 
(current and speed controllers) were switched off and SH2 was set. 
However, under certain circumstances high-speed spindles and torque 
motors with much inertia require more time to brake to a standstill from the 
maximum speed. For this reason the maximum braking time of 5 seconds 
was rescinded. Now the drives are braked until standstill, and only then is 
SH2 set.
Speed-dependent switching of the PWM frequency 
This function is used with high-speed spindle drives. This switchover is only 
possible for double-speed control loops. 
In MP2186.x and MP2188.x, a speed-dependent hysteresis for switching 
the PWM frequency is specified. It only takes effect if the value in MP2188 
is less than the value in MP2186. 
This function is associated with MP2182.x and MP2180.x Only if 
MP2182.x = 2, and MP2180.x ≤ 5 kHz, does the switching of the PWM 
frequency take effect. Please note that the adjustment of the current 
controller (MP2420, MP2430) is based on the lower PWM frequency 
≤ 5 kHz. Adaptation of the current-controller parameters and consideration 
of the power-module derating are performed automatically.
Using this function provides several benefits:
• At lower speeds and therefore a lower PWM frequency, the power 
module provides a comparatively high current. This results in a relatively 
high maximum motor torque.
• On the one hand, losses due to harmonics in the motor become more 
important as the speed increases, and on the other hand, the 
relationship between the electrical frequency and the PWM frequency 
worsens. These two disadvantages can be counteracted by increasing 
the PWM frequency. The resulting reduction of the current normally is 
insignificant, since in part due to motor characteristics, very high motor 
currents are mostly no longer possible or needed at higher speeds.
Note
The speed-dependent switching of the PWM frequency is only permitted 
with power modules from HEIDENHAIN.
Danger
Speed-dependent switching of the PWM frequency with non-HEIDENHAIN 
power modules can lead to malfunctions, and possibly to damage of the 
power modules. Therefore, only use this function with power modules 
from HEIDENHAIN.
1 – 64 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
When determining the optimum switching speed for the PWM frequency, you 
should consider that the maximum motor current decreases as the speed 
rises, due to the finite dc-link voltage. 
The current for the drive depends on the maximum permissible motor current 
and power-module current. The smaller of the two values limits the current for 
the drive. The value of the maximum power-module current is reduced by 
approx. 30% because of the derating when doubling the PWM frequency. 
The optimum switching speed results from the intersection of the maximum 
current curve of the motor with the maximum current curve ofthe power 
module for the high PWM frequency. You can determine the maximum 
current curve of the motor spindle by using the TNCscopeNT software. 
Record the current Inoml/S in dependency of the speed. The spindle must be 
accelerated to the maximum speed so that the derating behavior can be seen 
in the curve. The figure shows the behavior when the values entered for the 
switching speed (MP2186.x, MP2188.x) are too low. This then results in a 
speed range where the current for the motor is less than the permitted and 
maximum current, resulting in inconsistencies in the motor’s torque behavior.
• 1: Red line: Maximum current for the drive, resulting from the entries in 
MP2186.x and MP2188.x
• 1: Dashed line: Maximum possible current for the drive (Imax motor)
• 2: Switching point for the PWM frequency set too low
• 3: Optimum switching point for the PWM frequency
• 4: Maximum power-module current at low PWM frequency
• 5: Maximum power-module current at high PWM frequency (Imax 
power module)
Summary
• The speed is switched at the intersection of the two current curves 
(Imax motor, Imax power module) so that no inconsistencies in the 
torque behavior of the motor occur.
• For better controllability (no harmonics at higher PWM frequencies), it 
might already make sense to switch at lower speeds.
• The best speed to switch at must be determined by experimenting. The 
value above should serve as an initial value.
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 65
More master-slave torque axes possible 
PWM outputs X55/X57 and X56/X58 can now be used on a CC 424 with 8 
and 14 control loops to operate master-slave torque axes. Until now no 
more than two master-slave torque axes were possible on X51/X53 and 
X52/X54.
C-axis operation possible 
C-axis operation is now possible with the CC 424 in the same manner as 
with the CC 422. The position encoder inputs of the CC 424 are used for C-
axis operation.
Counter axes and analog controlled axes are possible 
It is now possible with the CC 424 to operate uncontrolled axes (counter 
axes) or analog controlled axes (MP120 input value < 51) via the position 
encoder inputs.
Monitoring the nominal speed 
If the nominal speed exceeds the maximum motor speed (N-MAX from the 
motor table) by more than 15%, an error message is output and an 
emergency-stop reaction is triggered. When using an EcoDyn motor, the 
error is triggered when the maximum permissible voltage is exceeded.
Determining the field angle – Drive remains controlled 
After the commutation angle has been determined successfully, the 8150 – 
Field angle ascertainment successful error message is now output. The 
drive now remains controlled.
Switch-on time via Module 9161 reduced 
The delay when switching on the axes via Module 9161 was reduced.
Errors of a supply module lead to an NC stop and an emergency stop 
Errors of the supply module (e.g. excessive Uz or Uv temp.) now lead to an 
NC stop (if M148 then LIFTOFF) with a subsequent emergency stop. In 
earlier versions there was no NC stop.
Overcurrent cutoff 
The momentary current is monitored by the CC 424, and the following errors 
now lead to an immediate cutoff:
• Excessive actual current: If the actual current exceeds the maximum 
permissible current (depending on the power module and motor), the 
error 0xC3C0 (Motor current too high) is triggered.
• Excessive current offset: If the offset current exceeds the permissible 
threshold (50% of the maximum current), the error 0xC600 (Current 
offset too high) is triggered. One possible reason could be a phase to 
earth fault.
1 – 66 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
1.6.4 DCM – Dynamic Collision Monitoring
Warning
The following must be noted as of version 340 49x-03 when editing 
kinematics or associated tables. Only if this is followed are changes to the 
kinematics detected by the collision monitoring:
If kinematics or an associated table (e.g. CMO descriptions) are edited in 
an NC program or NC macro with FN26:TABOPEN and FN27:TABWRITE, then 
they must be closed after the changes are made. This occurs 
automatically at the end of a program or if FN26:TABOPEN is called again. 
Activation of the kinematics is permitted with FN17:SYSWRITE ID290 NR1 
here, since this FN17 function automatically closes all tables before 
activation. If a changed table is activated by the PLC via Module 9097 
before it has been closed, the changes are not detected.
If kinematics or an associated table are opened and edited by the PLC via 
Modules 9240 through 9246, they must be closed by the PLC after the 
changes have been made. This must be done before activation of the 
kinematics (e.g. via Module 9097), a tool call or a change of the tool data 
with M4538.
If kinematics or an associated table are edited with the table editor, the 
editor must be exited with the END or PGM MGT keys. If the changed 
kinematics are activated (e.g. with PLC Module 9097 or FN17:SYSWRITE 
ID290 NR1) before the editor has been exited, the changes will not take 
effect. 
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 67
Transformations in 
CMOs
Software version 340 490-03 makes it easier to describe collision monitored 
objects (CMO) for the collision monitoring. It is now possible to insert the 
coordinate transformations directly into the object-description file of a CMO. 
Shifts and rotations can be entered in a CMO definition table via the keyword 
TRANS, an axis (X, Y, Z, A, B or C) in the AXIS column and a value in the new 
COORD column. This functions like entering the description of a kinematics 
configuration. The coordinate transformations in a CMO definition file are only 
effective within the respective object-description file, but there it affects all 
subsequent objects.
This makes it possible in just one object-description file
to describe rotated and unrotated objects,
to describe multiple objects after a rotation that then all have the same 
position, and
to shift the datum and then perform a rotation.
The following kinematics section will be used as an example to show the 
changes in the description of the CMOs.
1 – 68 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
The description of the kinematics with CMOs previously looked like this: 
The definition table for IR_Receiver: 
NR KEY AXIS COORD ON/OFF FILE DONTTEST
0 TOOLFILE
1 CMO HEAD
2 Trans Z 67
3 Trans Y -105
4 Trans A 15
5 CMO IR_Receiver
6 Trans A -15
7 Trans Y 105
8 Trans Z -67
9 Trans Y -140
10 Trans Z 70
11 Trans B 135
12 CMO HEAD_Addition
13 Trans B -135
14 Trans Z -70
15 Trans Y 140
16 Trans X 0.025
17 Trans Z 145
18 MachAxis B
19 CMO Z-Portal
20 MachAxis Z
21 MachAxis X
.. ...
[END]
NR KEY X Y Z AXIS RADIUS HEIGHT DOC
0 Cylinder 0 0 -35 Z 35 35 Connector 
IR_Receiver
1 Cylinder 0 0 -57 Z 30 22 IR_Receiver
[END]
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 69
The definition table for HEAD_Addition: 
The possibility of including the transformation of a CMO into the CMO’s own 
definition table improves the clarity of the kinematics table. This also makes it 
easier to integrate CMOs, since there are no changes to the actual kinematics 
of a machine. 
The description of the kinematics with CMOs can look like this as of 340 490-
03: 
NR KEY X Y Z AXIS RADIUS HEIGHT DOC
0 Cuboid -40 -20 -40 HEAD 
Addition
1 40 00 40
[END]
NR KEY AXIS COORD ON/OFF FILE DONTTEST
0 TOOLFILE
1 CMO HEAD
2 CMO IR_Receiver
3 CMO HEAD_Addition
4 Trans X 0.025
5 Trans Z 145
6 MachAxis B
7 CMO Z-Portal
8 MachAxis Z
9 MachAxis X
.. ...
[END]
1 – 70 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
Transformations that were only contained in the kinematics tables for the 
description of CMOs are omitted completely and instead integrated in the 
CMO definition table.
The new definition table for IR_Receiver: 
As an alternative, the X, Y and Z columns can be used for the description of 
transformations, but thenno entry is permitted in the AXIS column. If there is 
an entry in the AXIS column, the X, Y and Z columns are ignored.
The new definition table for HEAD_Addition: 
Transformations in the CMO definition table must always occur before the 
definition of objects. These transformations only serve to describe the position 
and orientation of the CMOs, and do not need to be cancelled in order to 
describe the further kinematics of the machine. If there is a transformation at 
the end of a definition table, the error message Kinematic table defective is 
output.
NR KEY X Y Z AXIS COORD RADIUS HEIGHT DOC
0 Trans Z 67
1 Trans Y -105
2 Trans A 15 Position1
3 Cylinder 0 0 -35 Z 35 35 Connector 
IR_Receiver
4 Cylinder 0 0 -57 Z 30 22 IR_Receiver
[END]
NR KEY X Y Z AXIS COORD RADIUS HEIGHT DOC
1 Trans -140 70
2 Trans B 135
3 Cuboid -40 -20 -40 HEAD 
Addition
4 40 00 40
[END]
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 71
Changing CMOs in 
NC programs
The NC function WRITE TO KINEMATIC was expanded in order to adapt the 
position, orientation and size of CMOs to new situations even during 
execution of an NC program. It is now possible to search active CMO 
definition tables for keywords (KEY) and to overwrite individual cells in the 
table. When entering keywords in the DOC column, make sure that each 
keyword is only entered once.
Example for a change to a CMO definition table in an NC program: 
Specifying the tool 
axis in the 
kinematics
It is now possible to specify a permitted tool axis in the kinematics table. This 
way you can permit only a certain tool axis to be selected with a TOOL CALL. 
A tool axis is defined in the kinematics table with the ToolAxis keyword in the 
KEY column and by indicating an axis (X, Y, Z, U, V, W). As an alternative, the 
tool axis can also be defined in a SUBFILE or TOOLFILE. 
If a different tool axis is selected with a TOOL CALL, the Tool axis not allowed 
error message is output and an NC stop is triggered. The error message is 
generated as well if no tool axis is programmed in the TOOL CALL and no tool 
axis has been defined modally. 
Note
If you change the kinematics tables or CMO definition tables with WRITE TO 
KINEMATIC, then the values in the tables are overwritten. If you do not 
rescind the changes you made with WRITE TO KINEMATIC in the NC program, 
the new values remain in the table. The changes to the machine kinematics 
are then not just temporary.
Comment:
0 BEGIN PGM N545TCM MM
:
5 WRITE TO KINEMATIC AT COLUMN “COORD” 
CAPTURE “DOC” KEY “Position1” = 25 
Overwrite cell in the 
kinematics table
6 WRITE TO KINEMATIC AT COLUMN “HEIGHT” 
CAPTURE “DOC” KEY “IR_Receiver” = 45 
Overwrite cell in the 
kinematics table
:
4
3
WRITE TO KINEMATIC AT COLUMN “COORD” 
CAPTURE “DOC” KEY “Position1” = 15 
Write original value to cell 
in table again
4
4
WRITE TO KINEMATIC AT COLUMN “HEIGHT” 
CAPTURE “DOC” KEY “IR_Receiver” = 22 
Write original value to cell 
in table again
:
1 – 72 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
So that the kinematics can be switched, the tool axis is not checked during the 
switch. This makes it possible to change the tool axis by switching the 
kinematics. The axes can be traversed without a subsequent TOOL CALL to 
activate the new, permitted tool axis, but the entry under ToolAxis and the 
active tool axis are not checked.
Uniform kinematics It is now possible to use uniform kinematics on machines with and without 
software option #40. An error message is no longer generated when a 
kinematics description with CMOs is used on a control without the DCM 
software option.
DCM with counter 
axes
The changes in position of manually-operated counter axes in the Manual 
Operation and El. Handwheel operating modes are now detected by the 
collision monitoring. However, counter axes and controlled axes may not be 
moved simultaneously if collision monitoring is to be effective. 
In the Positioning with MDI, Program Run – Single Block, Program Run – 
Full Sequence and smarT.NC machining modes, the counter axes may only be 
moved at standstill, M strobe, etc., in order to ensure protection by DCM 
against collisions. 
The NC axes can then also be moved in the machining modes while being 
protected against collision.
Warning
The following must be kept in mind when specifying a tool axis:
After the kinematics have been switched, checking of the tool axis must 
be activated with a TOOL CALL.
A tool axis may only be defined once via ToolAxis in the machine 
kinematics. If ToolAxis is defined more than once, then only the first 
instance is used.
If the ToolAxis is to be switched via the kinematics tables, then the 
definition of the tool axis should be performed in the various SUBFILEs. 
This way you avoid multiple definitions in one kinematics description.
Danger
This means that an error message no longer appears if DCM is not 
available. 
Even if there are CMOs in the kinematics tables, there is no protection 
against collisions without software option #40 (DCM).
Danger
If you position manually-operated counter axes during execution of an NC 
program or during an individual NC block (during calculation of path 
interpolations), the new positions of the counter axes cannot be detected 
or considered by DCM. There is no protection against collisions.
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 73
1.6.5 AFC – Adaptive Feed Control (Software Option #45)
With adaptive feed control (AFC), the contouring feed rate is regulated 
depending on the respective spindle power in percent. This is done with the 
help of the feed-rate override factor, which is normally determined in the PLC 
by the setting of the override potentiometer. If AFC is active, then this factor 
is no longer formed from the potentiometer, but rather from the spindle power 
and other process data, and the contouring feed rate is calculated. The iTNC 
then automatically changes the value of the feed-rate override factor, with the 
goal of maintaining the spindle power at a constant reference value. 
The main benefit of this process control, along with ensuring the quality of the 
machining procedure (e.g. detection of cutter breakage or wear), is the 
optimization of the machining time, which is intended to ensure or improve 
productivity and efficiency. Changes in the material (harder sections), 
deviations in oversizes and tool wear lead to the danger of overloading the 
spindle. AFC can be effective in counteracting this.
Benefits of adaptive feed control:
Optimizing the machining time: 
By regulating the feed rate, the attempt is made to maintain the maximum 
spindle power learned over the entire machining time. 
The total machining time is reduced by increasing the feed rate in machining 
zones where less material is being removed.
Tool monitoring: 
The tool life of a tool is increased by reducing the feed rate when the 
maximum spindle power learned is exceeded, until the time when this 
reference spindle power is reached again. 
If it is detected that the maximum spindle power was exceeded and at the 
same time the minimum feed rate could not be maintained, a programmed 
switch-off reaction is performed. This avoids subsequent damages due to 
cutter breakage or wear.
Protecting the machine mechanics 
Damages to the machine due to overload can be avoided by reducing the 
feed rate ahead of time and with appropriate switch-off reactions.
Documentation by capturing and saving the learning and process data.
Limitations regarding the use of AFC:
AFC cannot be used with analog spindles.
AFC cannot be used in volts-per-hertz control mode.
1 – 74 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
The following graphic schematically shows the principle of adaptive feed 
control:
1: Feed rate
2: Air cut
3: Beginning of machining
4: Feed-rate calculation during machining
5: Feed rate calculated by AFC
6: Feed rate programmed in the NC program
7: Cutting depth
8: WorkpieceSeptember 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 75
Operating states 
of AFC
The two main operating states of adaptive feed control are Learning and 
Controlling and Monitoring.
General 
information about 
Learning
A learning phase must be completed before AFC can be activated. This 
learning phase serves to ascertain the corresponding reference power of the 
spindle PREF for each individual machining step. The learning phase is divided 
into one or more learning sections. The beginning of a learning section or 
machining section is defined by the output of M function M03 or M04 (Spindle 
on right/left) in an NC program after a TOOL CALL has been processed. The end 
of the cut is defined by the spindle stop (M function M05). The NC macros 
M3.H, M4.H and M5.H must be assigned to these spindle M functions in the 
MFUNCT.TAB table. 
At the beginning of cutting with M3 or M4, the FN17 block 
FN 17:SYSWRITE ID 622 NR0 IDX 0.0 =+1 must be programmed in the 
M-function macro for starting a cut after the M function. 
At the end of cutting with M5, the FN17 block 
FN 17:SYSWRITE ID 622 NR0 IDX 0.0 =+0 for ending a cut must be 
programmed before M5. 
This way AFC can be used without having to change the existing NC program. 
The only restriction is that no M-function macros can be executed with active 
radius compensation. Before calling the macros, the radius compensation 
must be deactivated, and reactivated after the macro if necessary. 
 
The beginning of another section can be defined for the same tool with 
another call of M03 or M04. In order to exclude a tool from AFC (e.g. touch 
probe, tap, …), the AFC column must be undefined (empty) in the TOOL.T tool 
table. Otherwise in this column you must enter the identifier from the global 
control parameter table AFC.TAB. This identifier selects the control parameter 
block from the table AFC.TAB. 
 
If a cutting data table .CDT exists and is used, the basic control setting in the 
AFC column of this table is read. This means that the entry in the cutting data 
table has precedence over the entry in the tool table. The data ascertained 
during each learning section of the reference machining, especially the 
maximum spindle power, are saved with a generated cutting number in a 
table. They form the foundation for the subsequent controlled machining with 
active AFC. 
 
As an alternative to the generated cutting number, the value in NR can be used 
as the cutting number by programming discrete FN17 cutting blocks. 
However, the programmer must then ensure that the numbers are entered 
correctly and sequentially. The learning phase can consist of an entire 
machining process with multiple tools, but it also can also be stopped after a 
certain time in which the important parameters for the respective tools have 
been determined. The learning phase can be ended either manually via a soft 
key or automatically after a programmed time for the machining step has 
expired. 
1 – 76 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
With FN 17: SYSWRITE ID 622 NR0 IDX1.0 = <value> you can transfer a 
<value> for the time in seconds after which the teach-in cuts are ended 
automatically. The function behaves like the pressing of the EXIT LEARNING 
soft key after the appropriate time. This function is deactivated again by 
programming <value> = 0. 
At any time during the teach-in cut, you can change the machining feed rate 
with the feed-rate override potentiometer any way you want, and so influence 
the ascertained reference load. The file generated in this step is given the 
name of the selected NC program and receives .AFC.DEP as the file extension. 
.DEP is appended because this file depends on an existing .H file. E.g. an NC 
program with the name MACHINING.H results in a file with the name 
MACHINING.H.AFC.DEP. This file, and the global parameter table AFC.TAB as 
well, are set up as freely definable tables, and form view is also possible 
(switch via soft key). However, the format is prescribed and cannot be 
changed.
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 77
Details of the learning phase:
The spindle power is only recorded once the nominal speed has been 
reached, since the spindle is operated at a constant speed, and acceleration 
and braking phases are not included in the machining.
Saving of the spindle power in air (idle power) in order to later evaluate only 
the power used during the actual machining process.
Detection of entry into the material by the cutter when the idle load is 
exceeded by 2%.
Saving of the maximum value of the spindle power of a learning section as 
reference for the control.
Saving of the machining time of each learning section.
Monitoring for stationary spindle or deviation from the nominal speed during 
active feed not at FMAX.
If the learning process is ended during a learning step, either via the EXIT 
LEARNING soft key or because the programmed time (FN17 - ID622) has 
expired, the control immediately begins regulating the feed rate adaptively. 
The value determined up to that point is used as the spindle reference value, 
and is entered in <NAME>.H.AFC.DEP. This is useful if it can be seen that the 
spindle power will not increase significantly any further in this step. 
Note
Below a certain minimum tool diameter (e.g. 5 mm), in some 
circumstances it may not make sense to use AFC, since the actual data 
may become too small for safe control. This can be specified in the tool 
or cutting data table by leaving the AFC column empty. The entry in the 
cutting data table makes it possible for the basic setting to depend on the 
pairing of the tool and workpiece materials.
If it becomes necessary in other cases for AFC to abort a machining step, 
there are two possibilities:
• By leaving the AFC column empty in the tool or cutting-data table.
• By deactivating AFC via targeted switch-off with FN 17:SYSWRITE ID 
622 NR0 IDX 0.0 =+0 in the NC program or a corresponding M-function 
macro. If you use the M-function macros for M3 and M4, then the 
FN 17 block must follow the call of the M-function macro. This way 
you end the cut for AFC before machining actually takes place.
1 – 78 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
General 
information about 
Controlling
The maximum spindle power was determined for each learning and machining 
step. By changing the feed-rate factor within programmable limits (e.g. 70% 
to 130%), the software continuously attempts to match the momentary 
spindle power to the reference value during machining.
This way the feed rate can be increased for areas where only a small amount 
of material is being cleared, and a slower feed rate can be used when there is 
more material than usual or the cutter is becoming dull. This protects the 
spindle drive and the tool from overload. If a disturbance in the process occurs 
during machining, a programmable switch-off reaction is performed. This 
occurs if the feed rate falls below the minimum feed-rate factor (e.g. 70%) at 
the reference spindle load. You can then assume that the cutter has become 
dull or has broken. If the feed rate falls below the defined value of 30% of the 
programmed feed rate, an NC stop is performed. This defined error reaction 
cannot be influenced, and occurs independently of the programmed overload 
reaction. 
Controlling can be switched off and on again via soft key at any point during 
machining. Controlling is also always switched off if the value set for the 
override potentiometer is manually reduced by more than 10%. The 
potentiometer is then effective again instead of AFC. Adaptive feed control 
must then be switched on again via soft key. A potentiometer value less than 
or equal to 50% is also always effective, i.e. AFC is inactive then. If the 
potentiometer value exceeds these 50% while AFC is on, then AFC becomes 
active again. The maximum spindle power that occurs while under control is 
ascertained and saved for evaluationlater. The machining time of each 
machining section is also saved. 
The events AFC ON, AFC OFF, potentiometer manually changed -> AFC OFF 
are entered in the log of the iTNC.
Tasks of AFC in each machining section:
Detection of entry into the material by the cutter when the idle load is 
exceeded by 2%. Regulate to entry speed until a path corresponding to the 
cutter radius has been cleared, but at most 600 ms.
Calculation of the optimum feed-rate factor.
Monitoring for overload and switch-off reaction.
Saving the maximum value of the spindle power for the evaluation.
Detection of exit from the material by the cutter when the power is below 
the programmed exit load, and regulation to the exit speed until a path 
corresponding to the cutter radius has been traversed.
After detection of traverse in air, regulate to the programmed idle feed rate.
AFC is not in effect when machining at rapid traverse, since FMAX is used 
in the IPO, and at times override for FMAX.
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 79
Automatic 
selection of the 
Learning / 
Controlling status
If an NC program is selected for machining and started, and if AFC is active, 
then it is first checked whether an associated <name>.AFC.DEP file exists in the 
same directory as the NC file. If this is the case, then the data in this file are 
immediately used as control parameters, and machining is performed with 
adaptive feed control. If this file does not exist, the first machining run is used 
as the learning phase and the file is created. If the AFC file is determined to be 
incomplete during machining, the missing steps are automatically performed 
in the Learning mode, thereby generating the missing data. 
When Learning is deactivated (M05, manually via soft key, or with FN 17), the 
learned data are saved and the status of this data block is set to “Controlling.” 
During Controlling, the data blocks are read in the same sequence they were 
learned, the step numbers are evaluated and other parameters (tool number, 
index) are checked to see if they match.
Associated files Files for machining
The following requirements are mandatory for controlling to be activated:
An NC program must have been selected (<name>.H).
The column AFC must be enabled in the tool table via MP7266.40. 
If you are working with a <name>.CDT cutting table, then you must create an 
AFC column and enter any desired control strategy there. If an entry in the 
cutting data table intersects with an entry in the tool table, the entry in the 
cutting data table has priority.
M-function macro files M3.H, M4.H, M5.H (and possibly more).
MFUNCT.TAB macro definition.
1 – 80 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
The three files of adaptive feed control:
File of the global control parameters: AFC.TAB 
In the AFC.TAB table, which must be saved in the TNC:\ root directory, you 
enter the basic control settings with which the TNC is to perform the feed-rate 
control. 
The data in this table are default values that are copied during the teach-in cut 
to the file associated with the respective machining program, where they 
serve as the basis for controlling. 
Control parameters for the subsequent standard control strategy are already 
saved there. Other settings can be programmed as desired. 
The static control parameters that must be programmed in AFC.TAB for each 
cutting-data set are:
Column Function
NR Current line number in the table (has no other function)
AFC Name of the control strategy. You must enter this name in the 
AFC column of the tool table. It specifies the association of the 
control parameters to the tool. 
FMIN Minimum feed rate at which the TNC is to perform an overload 
reaction if the feed rate falls below this value for one second. 
Enter the value in percent of the programmed feed rate.
FMAX Maximum feed rate in the material, to which the TNC may 
increase automatically. Enter the value in percent of the 
programmed feed rate.
FIDL Feed rate at which the TNC should traverse when the tool is 
not cutting (feed rate in air). Enter the value in percent of the 
programmed feed rate.
FENT Feed rate at which the TNC should traverse when the tool 
enters or exits the material. Enter the value in percent of the 
programmed feed rate.
September 2006 NC Software 340 490-03/340 491-03 and 340 492-03/340 493-03 1 – 81
Example of an AFC.TAB:: 
Proceed as follows to create an AFC.TAB file (only necessary if the file does 
not already exist):
Select the Programming and Editing operating mode.
Select the file manager: Press the PGM MGT key
Select the TNC:\ directory
Create the new AFC.TAB file and confirm with the ENT key. The TNC displays 
a list with table formats.
Select the AFC.TAB table format and confirm with the ENT key. The TNC 
creates the table with the Standard control strategy.
OVLD Reaction that the iTNC is to perform if an overload occurs:
M: Perform an NC-function macro defined by the OEM
S: Immediately perform an NC stop
F: Perform an NC stop once the tool has retracted
E: Only display an error message on the screen
–: Do not perform an overload reaction
The iTNC performs the overload reaction if during active 
controlling the maximum spindle power is exceeded for more 
than one second and at the same time the feed rate is below 
the minimum you defined.
POUT Spindle power at which the TNC is to detect an exit from the 
workpiece. Enter the value in percent of the learned reference 
load. Recommended value: 8%
SENS Sensitivity (aggressiveness) of the regulation. A value between 
50 and 200 can be entered. 50 is controlling with a slow 
response, whereas 200 is very aggressive controlling. 
Aggressive controlling reacts quickly and with large changes in 
value, but tends to create overshoots. Recommended input 
value: 100
PLC The value entered here is written to word W342 at the 
beginning of a cut. The module cannot be called in the cyclic 
PLC program. Depending on this, any necessary fine 
adjustments to the adaptive feed control can be performed 
from the PLC program.
NR AFC FMIN FMAX FIDL FENT OVLD POUT SENS PLC
0 Standard 60 140 150 70 - 5 100 0
Column Function
1 – 82 HEIDENHAIN Technisches Handbuch iTNC 530
Settings file with the control parameters: <name>.H.AFC.DEP 
This file is automatically created during the learning phase, and filled with 
values. It contains all control information for the cuts that occur in the NC 
program. You can manually change all entries, except TNR and IDX, at any 
time in order to adapt the control parameters specifically to the NC program. 
Call the <name>.H.AFC.DEP via the SETTINGS TABLE soft key. It contains the 
following additional information:
Example of a <name>.H.AFC.DEP file after a successful teach-in cut: 
Column Function
NR Number of the machining section
TOOL Number or name of the tool with which the machining section 
was performed (cannot be edited)
IDX Index of the tool with which the machining section was 
performed (cannot be edited)
PREF Reference load of the spindle. The TNC determines the value 
as a percent of the spindle’s rated power.
N Code whether a tool number (0) or tool name (1) was 
programmed in the NC program.
POUT Exit load of the spindle. The TNC uses the value as a percent 
of the reference load PREF of the spindle.
ST Status of the machining step
L: (= Learning) A teach-in cut will be performed for this 
machining cut next time, and the iTNC will overwrite the 
values already entered in this line.
C: (= Controlling) The teach-in cut was performed 
successfully. The next time it is machined, AFC will control 
the feed rate.
AFC Name of the control strategy used. If the control strategy given 
in the tool table is not in AFC.TAB, then the entry default is in 
this column. Default settings are then used for adaptive feed 
control.
NR TOOL IDX FMIN FMAX FIDL FENT OVLD POUT PREF SENS ST PLC AFC
0 2 0 60 140 150 70 - 5 64 100 C 0 Standard
September 2006 NC Software